IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130 to 17A
IBM
Maintenance Information Procedures
SY33-2070-09
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130 to 17A
IBM
Maintenance Information Procedures
SY33-2070-09
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note!
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under “Notices”
on page xv.
Tenth Edition (June 1997)
The information contained in this manual is subject to change from time to time. Any such changes will be reported in subsequent
revisions.
Changes have been made throughout this edition, and this manual should be read in its entirety.
Order publications through your IBM representative or the IBM branch office serving your locality. Publications are not stocked at the
address given below.
A form for readers' comments appears at the back of this publication. If the form has been removed, address your comments to:
IBM France
Centre d'Etudes et de Recherches
Service 0798 - BP 79
06610 La Gaude
France
Ÿ FAX: 33 4 93 24 77 97
Ÿ E-mail: FRIBMQF5 at IBMMAIL
Ÿ IBM Internal Use: LGERCF at LGEPROFS
Ÿ Internet: [email protected]
When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a non-exclusive right to use or distribute the information in any way it believes
appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1989, 1997. All rights reserved.
Note to U.S. Government Users — Documentation related to restricted rights — Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to
restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Figures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Notices
European Union (EU) Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Electronic Emission Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Trademarks and Service Marks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Product Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
General Safety
Service Inspection Safety Procedures
Service Inspection Safety Procedures for the 3745, 3746-900, and Controller
Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Control Panel LED Status Versus 3746-900 States
3745/3746-900 Power Supply CP/CB and Fuse Reference . . . . . . . . . . xxx
Controller Expansion Fuse Reference
Sicherheitsüberprüfungen für IBM 3745, 3746-900 und die Erweiterung der
Steuereinheit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxi
Einführung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxi
Bedeutung der LEDs am Bedienungsfeld der 3746-900 . . . . . . . . . . . . xlii
Stromversorgung der 3745/3746-900, Sicherungsautomaten (CB),
Überstromschutzschalter (CP) und Sicherungen (F)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . xliii
Sicherungen der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xliii
Safety Label Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lvii
Safety Labels on the 3745 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lvii
Safety Label on the 3746-900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lix
Safety Label on LCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lix
3745/3746-900 Safety Label Identifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lx
LCB Safety Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lxii
Controller Expansion Label Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lxii
Safety Label Part Numbers by Country
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lxiii
Preface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lxv
About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lxv
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lxv
How this Manual Is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lxv
Who Should Read this Manual
Summary of Changes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lxvii
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Console Use for Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Service Processor Window Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Selection Table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
3745 Maintenance Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Problems During Machine, EC, or MES Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Selection Table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Symptom Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
General Verbal Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iii
3745 Console Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
3745 Control Panel Symptoms
3745 Power Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Miscellaneous Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Using Reference Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
3745 Control Panel Codes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Using the MIP FRU Group Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
3745 FRU Group Table
3745 Cable Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
3745 FRU List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
. . . . . . . . . . 1-55
3745 and Service Processor Maintenance Using a CPN
Service Processor Maintenance Using an SRC Sequence Number . . . . 1-57
Engineering Data Transfer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
. . . . . 1-58
Transferring 3745 Engineering Data to MOSS-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
Logon on the Remote Service Processor
Transferring Engineering Data to the Remote Service Processor
Transferring Engineering Data from the Local Service Processor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
. . . . . 1-59
3745 Diagnostic Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
Disabling Procedure 0110: Preparing a CA for Maintenance . . . . . . . . 1-61
Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance 1-62
Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the
MOSS for Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
Disabling Procedure 0140: Preparing a TRSS for Maintenance . . . . . . 1-66
Disabling Procedure 0150: Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
LIC/Line Address Table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-73
3745 Control Panel Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78
Purpose of the Control Panel
Uses of the Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78
Explanation of 3745 Panel Keys, LEDs, and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
Power On Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
Control Panel Display Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
How to Perform 3745 Control Panel Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
Power On Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
General IPL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
MOSS IML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
MOSS Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
Request Local Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83
Force Local Console
Panel Test and Console Link Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83
Load from Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83
Loop on MOSS Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83
Display Stacked Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
IOC Bus MAPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
MAP 0100: IOC Bus Trouble Shooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
3745 MOSS MAPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
MAP 3200: MOSS Control Panel Code 001
MAP 3210: MOSS Control Panel Code 059
MAP 3220: Undefined Panel Message
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
MAP 3230: Console Link Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
3745 Line Adapter MAPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
iv 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAP 3500: Activate/Deactivate Line Problem or Line Errors on the TSS . . 2-7
MAP 3520: Activate/Deactivate Ring Problems or Ring Errors on the TRSS 2-8
MAP 3530: Activate/Deactivate Line Problems or Line Errors on the
HPTSS/ESS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
3745 Channel MAPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
3745 Power MAPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
MAP 3700: CA Isolation Procedure
MAP 3900: Overcurrent on Power Supply 1
MAP 3905: Power ON Problem in Host Mode or Host Power Sequence
Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
MAP 3910: Overcurrent on Power Supply 2
Power MAP 3920: Air Flow Detector Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Power MAP 3925: Scheduled Power on Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Power MAP 3930: Power Control Subsystem Problems . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Power MAP 3935: Power OFF not Possible in Host Mode . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Power MAP 3945: Power OFF not Possible in Local Mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
. . . . . . . . 2-26
Power MAP 3950: PCC-Detected Error on MOSS Reset . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Power MAP 3960: Power OFF not Possible in Network Mode . . . . . . . 2-28
Power MAP 3970: PCC-Detected Error on CCU Reset or on Remote
Power OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
3745 LAN MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
MAP 4500: 3745 Models 17A Permanent Console Link Problem . . . . . 2-31
3745 Control Panel Code
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
3745 RSF MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
MAP 4510: 3745 Model 17A Manual Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
MAP 5200: 3745/3746-900/Service Processor/Network Node Processor
Icon Color Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
MAP 5205: LAN Checking
Service Processor MAPs
MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN Attached to the Service Processor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2-42
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Diagnostic Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3745 Diagnostics
Errors During Diagnostics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Diagnostic Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Checkout Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
CBA Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
How to Run MOSS Diagnostics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
How to Loop MOSS Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
How to Run the Console Link Test for 3745 Models 130, 150, 160, and 170 . 3-6
Local/Remote or Alternate/RSF Link Tests
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
How to Run the Control Panel Test
How to Run Internal Function Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
How to Run the LIC Wrap Test with IFTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
How to Run the Wrap Test (WTT) for TSS, HPTSS, or 3746-900 . . . . . . . 3-15
Wrap Test Initial Selection for TSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Wrap Test Initial Selection for HPTSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Wrap Test Initial Selection for 3746-900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Available Wrap Options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
How to Run the Channel Wrap Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Contents
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exchange Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
List of 3745 FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
FRU Physical Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
3745 Frame
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Basic Board, Cards, Connectors, and Crossovers
MOSS Board, Cards, and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
LIC Board Type 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
LIC Board Type 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
LIC Board Type 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
DMUX and SMUX Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
LIC Board Type 1 Packaging for LICs Type 1 to 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
LIC Board Type 2 Packaging for LIC Type 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
LIC Board Type 2 Packaging for LIC Type 6 (Low Speed) . . . . . . . . . 4-19
LIC Board Type 2 Packaging for LIC Type 6 (High Speed) . . . . . . . . . 4-20
LIC Board Type 3 Packaging for LIC Types 1 to 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Ethernet Lines Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
High Speed Lines Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Token-Ring Tailgate
Channel Tailgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Console Operator Tailgate For 3745 Models 1X0
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Console Operator Tailgate for 3745 Model 17A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
EPO Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
3745 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Flexible Diskette Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Hard Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Primary Power Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Power Supply 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
3745 Power Supply Cross Reference
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Power Supply 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Fan 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Fan 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
3745 FRU Exchange Procedures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Card Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
DCREG Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
DMUX Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
SMUXA/B Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
LIC Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Control Panel Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Battery Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Fan 1 Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Fan 2 Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
FDD Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
HDD Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
TERMC/TERMR Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
TERMD/TERMI Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
ESS Tailgate Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
PS1 Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
PS2 and Primary Power Box Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
EPO Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Basic Board Exchange Procedure
LIC Board Type 1 and 3 Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
LIC Board Type 2 Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
MOSS Board Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Channel Tailgate Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
vi 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
CE Leaving Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Appendix A. Maintenance Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Contacting Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Control Program Maintenance Aids
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
MOSS Microcode Maintenance Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Scanner Microcode Maintenance Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
General Purpose Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
ESD Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-3
Shipping Group Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
PKD (Portable Keypad Display) Maintenance Aids for LIC 5 and 6 . . . . . . A-5
Appendix B. 3745 Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Service Personnel Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Customer Documentation for the 3745 (Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and 17A)
and 3746 (Model 900) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Service Documentation for the 3745 (Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and 17A)
and 3746 (Model 900) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Related Signal Converter Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Related NCP Service Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
World Wide Web
List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-1
Glossary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X-7
Contents vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
viii 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figures
0-1. 3745/3746-900 Power Control Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
0-2. Ground Wire Connection on Controller Expansion
. . . . . . . . . . . xxi
0-3. Ground Wire Connection Between Attached Controller Expansions
0-4. Ground Wire Connection Between Controller Expansions at Less
. xxii
than Six Meters
0-5. Ground Wire Connection Between Controller Expansions at More
than Six Meters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
0-6. Ground Pin on Mainline ac/dc Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
0-7. Ground Pin of the Controller Expansion ac Outlet Distribution Box . . xxv
0-8. LCB Grounding Via Screws
0-9. LCB Grounding Via Ground Wire
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
0-10. Ground Wire Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
0-11. Führung des Stromversorgungskabels bei der 3745/3746-900 . . . xxxiii
0-12. Schutzleiteranschluß an der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit . . . . . xxxiv
0-13. Schutzleiteranschluß zwischen angeschlossenen Erweiterungen der
Steuereinheit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxv
0-14. Schutzleiteranschluß bei einem Abstand von weniger als 6 Meter
zwischen den Erweiterungen der Steuereinheit . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxvi
0-15. Schutzleiteranschluß bei einem Abstand über 6 Meter zwischen den
Erweiterungen der Steuereinheit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxvii
0-16. Schutzleiterkontakt am Hauptstromversorgungskabel . . . . . . . . xxxviii
0-17. Schutzleiterkontakt des Wechselstromverteilerkastens der
Erweiterung der Steuereinheit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxviii
0-18. Erdung des Verteilerkastens über Schrauben . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxix
0-19. Erdung des Verteilerkastens über Schutzleiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxix
0-20. Schutzleiteranschluß
0-21. 3745 Label and Power Rating Plate Locations (Back)
0-22. 3745 Label and Power Rating Plate Locations (Front) . . . . . . . . . lviii
0-23. 3746 Model 900 (Frame 07) Label Locations
0-24. LCB Safety Label Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lix
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xl
. . . . . . . . . lvii
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . lix
0-25. 3745/3746-900 Safety Labels
0-26. 3745/3746-900 Safety Labels
0-27. LCB Safety Label (PN 80G3928)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lx
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lxi
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lxii
0-28. Controller Expansion Power Rating Plate Location . . . . . . . . . . . lxii
1-1. Reference Code Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1-2. TSS Service Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63
1-4. Mode Control Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
1-6. TRSS Service Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
1-3. Select/Release Screen
1-5. TSS/HPTSS/ESS Diagnostic Selection Screen
1-7. Select Screen
1-8. Connect/Disconnect Screen
1-9. TRSS Diagnostic Selection Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
1-10. TSS/HPTSS Diagnostic Selection Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72
1-11. TSS Service Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
1-12. Select/Release Screen
1-13. Mode Control Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
1-14. LIC Types 1 and 4 Wrap Plug (PN 65X8927) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
1-15. LIC Type 3 Wrap Cable (PN 65X8928) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
1-16. LIC Types 5 and 6 Wrap Plug (PN 11F4815) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ix
1-17. LIC Types 1, 3, and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
1-18. LIC Types 5 and 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77
1-19. 3745 Control Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80
2-1. Console Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-2. EPO Location 01S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2-3. UEPO Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2-4. EPO Location 01S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2-5. LAN Attached to the Service Processor
3-1. CBA Diagnostic Coverage
3-2. Console Output
3-3. Cable Configurations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-4. Maintenance Functions Menu
3-5. How to Select Diagnostics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-6. How to Enter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3-7. Error Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-8. LICs Type 1 and 4 (Wrap Plug PN 65X8927) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3-9. LIC Type 3 (Wrap Cable PN 65X8928) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3-10. LIC Types 1, 3, and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3-11. LICs Type 5 and 6 (Wrap Plug PN 11F4815) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-12. LIC Types 5 and 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
4-1. 3745 Frame (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-2. 3745 Frame (Back)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-3. Card Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-4. 3745 Model 17X Basic Board (without TPS, HPTSS, or ESS) . . . . . 4-6
4-5. 3745 Model 17X (Basic Board with TPS and HPTSS or ESS)
. . . . 4-7
4-6. 3745 Model 130 (Basic Board with TPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-7. 3745 Model 150 (Basic Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-8. 3745 Model 160 (Basic Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-9. 3745 Models 130, 150, 160, and 170 (MOSS Board, Cards, and
Connectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-10. 3745 Model 17A (MOSS Board, Cards, and Connectors)
. . . . . . 4-12
4-11. 3745 LIC Unit Type 1 Board and Connectors (for LIC Types 1,3, and
4 in Models 150, 160, and 170) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-12. 3745 LIC Unit Type 2 Board and Connectors (for LIC Types 5 and 6
in Models 150 and 170) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-13. 3745 LIC Unit Type 3 Board and Connectors (for LIC Types 1,3, and
4 in Model 150)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-14. 3745 LIC Board 01M-A2 Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-15. 3745 LIC Board 01M-A1 Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-16. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-17. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging (LICs Type 5)
. . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-18. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A1 Packaging (LIC type 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-19. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging (LICs Type 6 Low Speed)
4-20. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A1 Packaging (LICs Type 6 Low Speed)
. . . 4-19
. . . 4-19
4-21. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging (LIC Type 6 High Speed) . . . . 4-20
4-22. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A1 Packaging (LIC Type 6 High Speed) . . . . 4-20
4-23. 3745 LIC Board 01M-A2 Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-24. 3745 Ethernet Lines Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-25. 3745 High-Speed Lines Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4-26. 3745 Token-Ring Tailgate
4-27. 3745 Channel Tailgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-28. 3745 Channel Tailgate Details. For more details see YZ052 Sheet
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-29. 3745 Models 1X0 Console Operator Tailgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
x
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-30. 3745 Models 17A Console Operator Tailgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4-31. 3745 EPO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4-32. 3745 Control Panel
4-33. 3745 Flexible Diskette Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4-34. 3745 Hard Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4-35. 3745 Primary Power Box Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4-36. 3745 Power Supply 1 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4-37. 3745 Power Supply 2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4-38. 3745 Fan 1 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-39. 3745 Fan 2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-40. CB1 Location.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4-41. Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4-42. Shipping Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4-43. Channel Tailgate Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4-44. Select Out Switch
4-45. Basic Board and CB1 Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4-46. Location of the LIC Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4-47. DMUX Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4-48. DMUX Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4-49. DMUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4-51. SMUX Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
4-50. Location of the LIC Boards Type 2
4-52. SMUX Location
4-53. SMUX Link and Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
4-54. Location of the LIC Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4-55. LIC 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4-56. LIC Board Type 1 and 2
4-57. LIC Board Type 3
4-58. Panel, MOSS, and CB1 Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4-59. MOSS Right Cover
4-60. Panel Cable Location on MOSS Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4-61. Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4-62. Panel Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4-63. Battery Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4-64. Power Services Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4-65. Acknowledge Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4-66. Fan 1 and CB1 Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4-67. Fan 1 Air Flow Detector and Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4-68. Fan 2 and CB1 Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4-69. Fan 2 Air Flow Detector and Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4-70. FDD and CB1 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4-71. PS1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4-72. MOSS Covers
4-73. FDD Removal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4-74. FDD Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4-75. HDD and CB1 Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4-76. HDD Removal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
4-77. New Type of HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4-78. HDD Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4-79. HDD Connectors and Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4-80. HDD Connectors and Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4-81. Basic Board and CB1 Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4-82. CB1 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
4-83. Basic Board Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Figures xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-84. Terminator Card Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
4-85. CB1 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
4-86. ESS Tailgate Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
4-87. ESS Tailgate and Basic board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
4-88. ESS Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
4-89. EAC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
4-90. Power Supply 1 (PS1) and CB1 Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
4-91. Power Supply 1 (PS1) Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
4-92. Primary Power Box
4-93. Power Supply 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4-94. Primary Power Box, Power Supply 2, and CB1 Locations . . . . . . 4-69
4-95. Cable Locations on Primary Power Box
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4-96. PS2 in Primary Power Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4-97. PS2 and Primary Power Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
4-98. Primary Power Box and CB1 Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
4-99. EPO Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
4-100. Cables on Primary Power Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4-101. Primary Power Box and PS2 Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4-102. EPO Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4-103. Basic Board, MOSS Board, and CB1 Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
4-104. Basic Board and MOSS Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4-105. Basic Board Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4-106. FDS and Multivoltage Cable Locations on the PS1 . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4-107. Fan2 Air Flow Detector and Power Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
4-108. MOSS to Basic Cable Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
4-109. Basic Board Enclosure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
4-110. Basic Board Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
4-111. Basic Assembly 1
4-112. Basic Assembly 2
4-113. Y and Z Rows
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4-114. CB1 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
4-115. LIC Board Type 1 Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
4-116. DMUX Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
4-117. LIC Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
4-118. LIC Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4-119. CB1 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
4-120. SMUX Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
4-121. LIC Board Type 2 Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
4-122. SMUX Link and Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
4-123. LIC Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
4-124. LIC Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
4-125. MOSS Board and CB1 Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
4-126. MOSS Board Covers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
4-127. MOSS Board Cards and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
4-128. MOSS Board Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
4-129. CB1 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
4-130. Select Out Switch
4-131. Channel Tailgate and Basic Board Grid
4-132. Channel Tailgate, Cables, and Basic Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
xii 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tables
0-1. Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii
0-2. ac Input Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii
0-3. LED Status Versus 3746-900 States
0-4. 3745 Power Supply CP/CB and Fuse Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx
0-5. Teilenummern
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xli
0-6. Einstellung der Spannung des Wechselstromeingangs . . . . . . . . . xli
0-7. Bedeutung der LEDs am Bedienungsfeld der 3746-900 . . . . . . . . xlii
0-8. Stromversorgung der 3745, Sicherungsautomaten (CB),
Überstromschutzschalter (CP) und Sicherungen (F)
0-9. Safety Label Numbers by Country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lxiii
1-1. General Symptoms
. . . . . . . . . . xliii
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-2. 3745 Console Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-3. Control Panel Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-4. Power Symptoms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-5. Panel Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-6. 3745 FRU Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
1-7. 3745 Cable Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
1-8. 3745 Diagnostic Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
1-9. Diagnostic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
1-10. Panel Display Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81
2-1. Wrap plug PN
2-2. 3745 Control Panel Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2-3. Icons Color Selection Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
3-1. Wrap Plugs for Testing ARC Assembly A and ARC Assembly B (with
Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3-2. Wrap Plugs for LIC Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3-3. Wrap Plugs for Testing ARC Assembly B (without Cable) . . . . . . 3-22
4-1. TIC Position and Ring Address
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-2. Basic Board Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-3. DMUX Packaging
4-4. SMUX Packaging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-5. 3745 Ethernet Line Locations
4-6. 3745 High-Speed Line Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4-7. 3745 Token-ring Line Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4-8. Channel Interface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-9. 3745 Power Supply Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4-10. Select Out Switches According to CADR Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4-11. Voltage Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
B-1. Customer Documentation for the 3745 Models 130 to 17A and 3746
Model 900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B-2. Service Documentation for the 3745 Models 1x0 and 17A, and 3746
Model 900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xiii
xiv 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not imply
that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates.
Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or
imply that only IBM's product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally
equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any of IBM's intellec-
tual property rights may be used instead of the IBM product, program, or service.
Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, except
those expressly designated by IBM, is the user's responsibility.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in
this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to
these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director of
Licensing, IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood, New York 10594,
U.S.A.
European Union (EU) Statement
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Direc-
tive 89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility. IBM can not accept responsibility for any failure to
satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification
of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.
Electronic Emission Notices
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interfer-
ence at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to
meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television inter-
ference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or
modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xv
Industry Canada Compliance Statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
Avis de conformité aux normes d'Industrie Canada
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement
sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Japanese Voluntary Control Council For Interference (VCCI) Statement
This equipment is in the 1st Class category (information equipment to be used in
commercial and/or industrial areas) and conforms to the standards set by the Vol-
untary Control Council for Interference by Information Technology Equipment aimed
at preventing radio interference in commercial and industrial areas.
Consequently, when used in a residential area or in an adjacent area thereto, radio
interference may be caused to radios and TV receivers, and so on.
Read the instructions for correct handling.
Korean Communications Statement
Please note that this device has been approved for business purpose with regard to
electromagnetic interference. If you find this is not suitable for your use, you may
exchange it for a non-business one.
New Zealand Radiocommunications (Radio) Regulations
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.
Trademarks and Service Marks
The following terms, denoted by an asterisk (*), used in this publication, are trade-
marks or service marks of IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries:
ESCON
NetView
IBM
RETAIN
OS/2
The following terms, denoted by a double asterisk (**), used in this publication, are
trademarks of other companies:
Hayes
Tektronix
Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.
Tektronix, Incorporated.
xvi 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Product Safety Information
General Safety
This product meets IBM safety standards.
For more information, see the following manual:
IBM 3745 Communication Controller All Models
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Models 900 and 950
Safety Information, GA33-0400.
Service Inspection Safety Procedures
Service Inspection Safety Procedures for the 3745, 3746-900, and Controller Expansion -
English
Sicherheitsüberprüfungen für IBM 3745, 3746-900 und die Erweiterung der Steuereinheit -
Deutsch
xviii
xxxi
xliii
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
xvii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Service Inspection Safety Procedures for the 3745, 3746-900, and
Controller Expansion
Important
This procedure addresses the 3745, 3746-900, and the controller expansion. If one of these machines
is not present, ignore the statement concerning this machine in the following procedure.
Introduction
A safety inspection procedure for the 3745, 3746-900, and controller expansion should be per-
formed:
Ÿ When it is inspected for an IBM agreement
Ÿ When IBM service is requested and no service has recently been performed by IBM
Ÿ When an alterations and attachments review is performed
Ÿ When changes have been made to the equipment that might affect its safety.
If the inspection indicates unacceptable safety conditions, the conditions must be corrected before IBM
services the machine.
Note: The correction of any unsafe condition is the responsibility of the owner of the equipment.
The 3745, 3746-900, and controller expansion areas and functions checked through these procedures are:
1. External covers
2. Safety labels
3. Safety covers and shields
4. Grounding (earthing)
5. Circuit breaker and protector rating
6. Input power voltage
7. Power control switch
8. Power ON indicator.
Note: The 3746-900 is powered ON and OFF through the basic 3745 frame, from a host, locally, or from
the service processor.
Hazardous voltages are still present in some areas of the 3745 and the 3746-900 when power is
OFF.
Steps 1 through 6 must be performed after power OFF as follows:
Ÿ CB1s are switched OFF on the 3745 and 3746-900.
Ÿ All equipment installed in the controller expansion (if present) is powered OFF.
Ÿ Power supplies for the 3745, 3746-900, and controller expansion at customer's premises are
switched OFF.
Do not remove the power cord and ground strap .A/ of the controller expansion in order to maintain
the ground protection (see Figure 0-2 on page xxi, Figure 0-3 on page xxii, Figure 0-4 on page xxiii,
or Figure 0-5 on page xxiv).
1 External Covers
Check that:
Ÿ They are all present on the 3745, 3746-900, and controller expansion.
Ÿ They are locked with two kinds of locks: flat blade screw for the IBM access area and hex head
for the customer access area (refer to the IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models 130 to
17A, Parts Catalog, S135-2012).
Ÿ They can be fully opened.
xviii 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Ÿ Appropriate service clearance and access are provided around the frames with external covers
opened.
Leave all external covers opened to allow further safety inspection steps.
2 Safety Labels
Check that:
Ÿ All the safety labels are at the places indicated by letters in “Safety Label Locations” on
page lvii.
Ÿ Each label is of the model corresponding to the letter as shown in “3745/3746-900 Safety Label
Identifications” on page lx.
3 Safety Covers and Shields
Referring to the FRU location (Chapter 4), check that:
Ÿ All the safety covers are present and secured with screws.
Ÿ All the voltage terminal boards (TBs) are protected by a plastic shield screwed on top of the TB.
4 Grounding (Earthing)
Note
In this book, "ground" means that the equipment must be connected to the earth.
a Grounding on the 3745
Refer to YZ110 for grounding jumper/contact locations.
.
Check that:
Ÿ Electrical continuity is assured between the frame ground and the terminals indi-
cated on the ground distribution diagrams.
Ÿ Electrical continuity is assured between the 3745, frame grounds, and to the premises
grounding system, through the 3745 power cord.
b Grounding on the 3746-900 and Controller Expansion to the Premises Grounding
System
Ÿ Electrical continuity is assured between their frame ground and premises grounding
system through their power cords.
Ÿ The 3746-900 is grounded to the 3745 via the power control cable (see Figure 0-1 on
page xx).
Ÿ For the controller expansion, an additional ground wire .A/ is also used (see Figure 0-2 on
page xxi, Figure 0-3 on page xxii, Figure 0-4 on page xxiii, or Figure 0-5 on page xxiv).
1 3745/3746-900 Power Control Cable
Check that the power ground cable is correctly connected in the 3745 .D/ and in the
3746-900 .C/.
Safety xix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Figure 0-1. 3745/3746-900 Power Control Cable Routing
Notes:
a) .D/Lock washer (PN 17G5853) and nut (PN 1622404).
b) .C/Screw (PN 61F4511), star washer (PN 17G5852), and lock washer
(PN 1622318).
2 Controller Expansion Ground Wire Cable
Ÿ If you have only one controller expansion installed, check that the ground wire .A/ is
installed (see Figure 0-2 on page xxi).
Ÿ If you have several controller expansions installed, check that the ground wires .A/
are installed according to your configuration (see Figure 0-3 on page xxii,
Figure 0-4 on page xxiii, or Figure 0-5 on page xxiv).
xx 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Figure 0-2. Ground Wire Connection on Controller Expansion
Safety xxi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Controller
Expansion
B
B
B
Detail
Screw M5
Lock Washer
B
A
Star Washer
A
To Permanent Connection
of Building Ground
(Protective Earthing)
Figure 0-3. Ground Wire Connection Between Attached Controller Expansions
xxii 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Figure 0-4. Ground Wire Connection Between Controller Expansions at Less than Six Meters
Safety xxiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Figure 0-5. Ground Wire Connection Between Controller Expansions at More than Six Meters
Notes:
a) .A/Ground wire (PN 58G5691)
b) .B/Screw (PN 61F4513), star washer (PN 1622347) or (PN 17G5853), and lock
washer (PN 1622319).
3 ac/dc Power Cable Ground Wire
Ÿ Check the mainline ac/dc power cable for damaged or burned pins and broken insu-
lation.
Ÿ Measure the resistance of the disconnected mainline ac/dc power cable from ground
pin on one end to the ground pin on the other end.
The measurement should be 0.1 ohm or less.
xxiv 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Ground Pin
Figure 0-6. Ground Pin on Mainline ac/dc Power Cable
c Internal Grounding in the 3746-900 and Controller Expansion
On the 3746-900
Ÿ Check that electrical continuity is assured between the LCB housing and 3746-900 frame,
if LCBs are present. This operation must be performed before any network connection.
On the Controller Expansion
Ÿ Check that electrical continuity is assured between each machine installed in the controller
expansion (service processor, network node processor, modem, optical disk drive, and so
on) and the ground pin of the ac outlet distribution box (see Figure 0-7).
Ÿ Check that electrical continuity is assured between the ground pin of the ac outlet distrib-
ution box and the controller expansion mount frame.
Ground Pin
Figure 0-7. Ground Pin of the Controller Expansion ac Outlet Distribution Box
Ÿ Check that electrical continuity is assured between the LCB housing and the controller
expansion frame, if LCBs are present. This operation must be performed before any
network connection (see Figure 0-8 on page xxvi).
Note: All the previous measurements should indicate 0.1 ohm or less.
d Grounding of Line Connection Boxes (LCBs) not Installed in the 3746-900 or Controller
Expansion
Check that electrical continuity is assured between the LCB housing and the premises
grounding system.
There are two ways to ensure proper grounding of the LCB depending on where it is installed:
1) Grounding is ensured by the four screws which secure the LCB on the rack if the frame of
the rack is connected to the premises ground system.
Safety xxv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Screws for
Grounding
Front View
Figure 0-8. LCB Grounding Via Screws
2) Grounding is ensured by a wire connected from the LCB to the premises ground system.
Bottom View
Ground
Wire
To Premises
Grounding
System
Figure 0-9. LCB Grounding Via Ground Wire
IBM does not provide this wire. In order to ensure correct grounding, this ground wire
must be made using a wire AWG 12 (minimum 2.5 square millimeters).
Screw: 5 mm in diameter, length from 6 to 10 mm (refer to Figure 0-10 on page xxvii).
Connection of Ground Wire to LCB
xxvi 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Figure 0-10. Ground Wire Connection
This operation must be performed before any network connection.
Note: All the previous measurements should indicate 0.1 ohm or less.
e Building Grounding
Ÿ Check that there is less than 1 V ac between the metal housings of plugs, connec-
tors, receptacles, and so on., and any grounded point in the building. This can be
any grounded metal structure, such as the stanchions of a raised floor (if they are
electrically connected to building ground), a metal water pipe, building steel, and so
on.
Notes:
1) When probing a painted metal part, ensure that the meter probe tip penetrates the
paint.
2) Also check plugs of incoming cables.
5 Circuit Breaker and Protector Rating
Refer to Table 0-4 on page xxx for CB and CP locations.
Check that:
Ÿ All CBs and CPs in the 3745 and 3746-900 are rated at the indicated value in Table 0-4 on
page xxx. If the rating is not indicated, check the part number against one of the following:
– IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models 130 to 17A, Parts Catalog, S135-2012
– IBM 3746 Expansion Unit Model 900, Parts Catalog, S135-2013
– IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Models 900 and 950, Parts Catalog, S135-2015.
Ÿ The fuses in the controller expansion ac outlet distribution box must be 7 A, 250 V slow
(PN 58G5782).
6 Input Power Voltage
The power rating plate indicates the voltage range available (200/220/240) and the frequency
(50/60 Hz).
3745 Input Power voltage
The voltage label (label J) indicates the input voltage for which the 3745 is wired. This information
must be in accordance with Switch 1 on PS2.
Performing a power conversion Inspection.
Ÿ A power conversion inspection must be performed on any 3745 Communication Controller that
has been converted from 50 Hz to 60 Hz, or from 60 Hz to 50 Hz.
Ÿ The following is used only for the primary power box. Refer to Figure 4-1 on page 4-3 for
location.
Ÿ Check Table 0-1 on page xxviii for the correct part numbers for the specified 50 Hz or 60 Hz
use. In case of discrepancy, contact your support structure.
Safety xxvii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Table 0-1. Part Numbers
Frequencies
50 Hz
Part Numbers
PN 03F4745
PN 03F4569
60 Hz
Refer to Figure 0-21 on page lvii for voltage label and power rating plate location, and to page
YZ060, sheet 1 for the PS2 box voltage adjustment by SW1.
Check that:
Ÿ The power rating plate and the voltage label of the 3745 are consistent with the frequency and
the voltage measured at the customer's power supply. If they are inconsistent, inform your
branch office.
3746-900 Input Power voltage
The power rating plate indicates the voltage range available (200/220/240) and the frequency
(50/60&rlb.Hz).
The 3746-900 voltage range is 200/220/240.
Check that:
Ÿ The power rating plate of the 3746-900 is consistent with the frequency and the voltage meas-
ured at the customer's power supply. If they are inconsistent inform your branch office. Refer to
“3745/3746-900 Safety Label Identifications” on page lx for the power rating plate location.
dc Input Voltage
For dc input, the customer's voltage must be within -40.0 V to -60.0 V. There is no adjustment
for the optional dc input.
ac Input Voltage
For ac input, the customer's voltage must be within 180 V to 260 V.
Adjustment of the input voltage can be done according to the customer voltage on TB1 of the
transformers located at the rear of the 3746-900.
Table 0-2. ac Input Adjustment
Voltage
Measured
Wire
Position
Nominal
Voltage
From 180
to 210 Volts
TB1-2
TB1-3
TB1-4
200/208 Volts
From 210
to 230 Volts
220 Volts
From 230
240 Volts
to 260 Volts
Important Note:
Since the 3745 can be remotely powered ON, all the following procedures must be performed with the
power control function on the 3745 and the 3746-900 control panel set to local mode.
Controller Expansion Input Power Voltage
The power rating plate indicates the voltage range available (200/240) and the frequency (50/60 Hz).
Check that the power rating plate of the controller expansion is consistent with the frequency and the
voltage measured at the customer's power supply. If they are inconsistent inform your branch office.
Refer to “Controller Expansion Label Location” on page lxii for power rating plate location.
7 Test of the Emergency Power OFF
xxviii 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
a. Ask the customer to connect the power cord to the customer's mains supply.
b. Put CB1 ON.
c. Power ON the 3745 and the 3746-900 (power control function to Local on the control panel).
d. Operate the EMERGENCY switch to POWER OFF (O) and check that:
1) The 3745 and the 3746-900 are powered OFF.
Note
In the 3746-900, the primary powers (ACDC) or filters section (DCDC) stay energized.
For total disconnection:
1. Turn the CBs OFF.
2. Remove all the power plugs from supply outlets or shutdown the installation.
2) The diskette and disk drives are stopped.
3) All the fans are stopped.
e. Relatch the EMERGENCY switch, then power ON the controller.
8 Power ON Indicator
Once the controller is powered ON, check that:
a. The Power ON indicator on the 3745 control panel is lit.
b. The Ready LED and the Standby LED (on the 3746-900 control panel) are lit according to the
table shown in “Control Panel LED Status Versus 3746-900 States” on page xxx.
Safety xxix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Control Panel LED Status Versus 3746-900 States
Table 0-3. LED Status Versus 3746-900 States
Standby
LED
Ready LED
OFF
3746-900
State
Comment
Blinking
AC ON
Initialization of the CBSP hardware, and the 3746-900 waits for
first recognition by the MOSS-E on LAN connection.
ON
OFF
Standby
The 3746-900, initially recognized by the MOSS-E, waits for a
power ON condition (only the CBSP EEPROM code is
running).
OFF
OFF
Blinking
ON
Power ON
Ready
IML loading in all 3746-900 processors.
The 3746-900 is now available.
3745/3746-900 Power Supply CP/CB and Fuse Reference
Table 0-4. 3745 Power Supply CP/CB and Fuse Reference
Frame
CB/CP/F
CB1
Location
01H-A1
Rating
10 A
PS
ALL
Frame 1
CP2
01H-A1
1,5 A
2 A
PS2
CP3
01H-B1
Fans
F1
01H-B1
0.2 A
15 A/220 V
50 A
PS2
Frame 7:
3746-900
CB1 AC
CB1 DC
CP1
07K-A1/07J-A1
07J-A1
ac Power
dc Power
dc Power
dc Power
dc Power
dc Power
dc Power
07K-A1/07J-A1
07H-A1
5 A
CP2
12 A
CP3
07H-A1
12 A
CP4
07H-A1
12 A
CP5
07H-A1
12 A
Controller Expansion Fuse Reference
The ac outlet distribution box of the controller expansion contains two fuses: 7 A 250 V slow.
xxx 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Sicherheitsüberprüfungen für IBM 3745, 3746-900 und die Erweiterung
der Steuereinheit
Wichtige Informationen
Dieses Verfahren bezieht sich auf IBM 3745, 3746-900 und die Erweiterung der Steuereinheit. Sollte
eine dieser Maschinen nicht vorhanden sein, die diesbezügliche Anweisung im folgenden Verfahren
ignorieren.
Einführung
Sicherheitsprüfungen für 3745, 3746-900 und die Erweiterung der Steuereinheit sind in folgenden
Fällen erforderlich:
Ÿ Bei einer Prüfung nach Absprache mit IBM
Ÿ Wenn eine IBM Wartungsleistung angefordert wird und in der letzten Zeit keine Wartung durch IBM
durchgeführt worden war.
Ÿ Wenn Änderungen am Gerät oder Anschlüsse überprüft werden.
Ÿ Wenn Änderungen am Gerät vorgenommen worden sind, die möglicherweise die Sicherheit
beeinträchtigen.
Wenn bei der Überprüfung ein unzureichender Sicherheitszustand festgestellt wird, müssen die Mängel
behoben werden, bevor IBM das Gerät wartet.
Anmerkung: Für die Behebung von Sicherheitsmängeln ist der Besitzer des Geräts verantwortlich.
Folgende Bereiche und Funktionen der 3745, 3746-900 und der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit werden
geprüft:
1. Äußere Abdeckungen
2. Sicherheitsaufkleber
3. Sicherheitsabdeckungen
4. Erdung
5. Sicherungsautomat und Überstromschutzschalter
6. Netzeingangsspannung
7. Netzkontrollschalter
8. Betriebsanzeige
Anmerkung: Die IBM 3746-900 wird über den Grundrahmen der IBM 3745, von einem Host, lokal oder
vom Serviceprozessor aus ein- und ausgeschaltet.
Auch nach dem Ausschalten liegt in einigen Bereichen der 3745 und 3746-900 eine gefährliche
Spannung an.
Vor der Ausführung der Schritte 1-6 muß die Stromzufuhr wie folgt unterbrochen werden:
Ÿ Die Sicherungsautomaten (CB1) der 3745 und 3746-900 ausschalten (Stellung: OFF).
Ÿ Alle Geräte in der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit (wenn vorhanden) ausschalten.
Ÿ Stromversorgungen der 3745, 3746-900 und der controller expansion beim Kunden ausschalten
Netzkabel und Schutzleiter .A/ der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit nicht entfernen, damit die Erdung
gewährleistet ist (siehe Figure 0-12 on page xxxiv, Figure 0-13 on page xxxv, Figure 0-14 on
page xxxvi bzw. Figure 0-15 on page xxxvii).
1 Äußere Abdeckungen
Prüfen, ob
Safety xxxi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Ÿ alle äußeren Abdeckungen an der 3745, 3746-900 und an der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit
angebracht sind.
Ÿ die äußeren Abdeckungen auf zwei Arten verschlossen sind: mit Schlitzschrauben im IBM
Zugriffsbereich und mit Sechskantschrauben im Zugriffsbereich des Kunden (siehe IBM 3745
Communication Controller Models 130 to 17A, Parts Catalog, S135-2012).
Ÿ die Abdeckungen vollständig geöffnet werden können.
Ÿ um die Rahmen genügend Raum und Zugänge für Wartungsarbeiten sind, wenn die äußeren
Abdeckungen geöffnet sind.
Alle äußeren Abdeckungen für weitere Überprüfungen offen lassen.
2 Sicherheitsaufkleber
Prüfen, ob
Ÿ sich alle Sicherheitsaufkleber an den mit Buchstaben gekennzeichneten Stellen befinden, wie
unter “Safety Label Locations” on page lvii beschrieben.
Ÿ die Aufkleber dem jeweiligen Buchstaben gemäß “3745/3746-900 Safety Label Identifications” on
page lx entsprechen.
3 Sicherheitsabdeckungen
Bezüglich des Standorts der durch den Kundendienst austauschbaren Funktionseinheit (Kapitel 4)
prüfen, ob
Ÿ alle Sicherheitsabdeckungen vorhanden und mit Schrauben gesichert sind.
Ÿ alle Spannungsklemmleisten durch eine Plastikabdeckung an der Oberseite der Klemmleiste
geschützt sind.
4 Erdung
Hinweis
Im vorliegenden Handbuch bedeutet "erden", daß das Gerät mit der Schutzerdung verbunden
werden muß.
a Erdung der 3745
Positionen der Erdungsbrücken/Kontakte siehe YZ110.
.
Prüfen, ob
Ÿ der elektrische Durchgang zwischen der Rahmenerdung und den Anschlüssen, die
auf den Schemazeichnungen für Erdung eingezeichnet sind, sichergestellt ist .
Ÿ der elektrische Durchgang zwischen 3745, den Rahmenerdungen und dem Erdungssystem
des Gebäudes durch das Netzkabel der 3745 sichergestellt wird.
b Schutzleiterverbindung der 3746-900 und der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit an das
Erdungssystem des Gebäudes
Ÿ Der elektrische Durchgang zwischen der Rahmenerdung und dem Erdungssystem des
Gebäudes wird über die Netzkabel sichergestellt.
Ÿ Die 3746-900 wird über das Stromversorgungskabel an der 3745 geerdet (siehe
Figure 0-11 on page xxxiii).
Ÿ Bei der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit wird zusätzlich ein Schutzleiter .A/ verwendet (siehe
Figure 0-12 on page xxxiv, Figure 0-13 on page xxxv, Figure 0-14 on page xxxvi bzw.
Figure 0-15 on page xxxvii).
1 Stromversorgungskabel für 3745/3746-900
Prüfen, ob der Schutzleiter des Stromversorgungskabels ordnungsgemäß an die 3745
(.D/) und die 3746-900 (.C/) angeschlossen ist.
xxxii 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
D
3746
3745
Hinteransicht
3745
C
3746
Vorderansicht
Figure 0-11. Führung des Stromversorgungskabels bei der 3745/3746-900
Anmerkungen:
a) .D/ Sicherungsring (Teilenummer 17G5853) und Mutter (Teilenummer 1622404).
b) .C/ Schraube (Teilenummer 61F4511), Zahnscheibe (Teilenummer 17G5852) und
Sicherungsring (Teilenummer 1622318)
2 Schutzleiter für die Erweiterung der Steuereinheit
Ÿ Wenn nur eine Erweiterung der Steuereinheit installiert ist, prüfen, ob der
Schutzleiter .A/ angeschlossen ist (siehe Figure 0-12 on page xxxiv).
Ÿ Wenn mehrere Erweiterungen der Steuereinheit installiert sind, prüfen, ob die
Schutzleiter .A/ gemäß Konfiguration angebracht wurden (siehe Figure 0-13 on
page xxxv, Figure 0-14 on page xxxvi bzw. Figure 0-15 on page xxxvii).
Safety xxxiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Figure 0-12. Schutzleiteranschluß an der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit
xxxiv 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Figure 0-13. Schutzleiteranschluß zwischen angeschlossenen Erweiterungen der Steuereinheit.
Safety xxxv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Figure 0-14. Schutzleiteranschluß bei einem Abstand von weniger als 6 Meter zwischen den Erweiterungen der
Steuereinheit
xxxvi 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Figure 0-15. Schutzleiteranschluß bei einem Abstand über 6 Meter zwischen den Erweiterungen der Steuereinheit
Anmerkungen:
a) .A/ Schutzleiter (Teilenummer 58G5691)
b) .B/ Schraube (Teilenummer 61F4513), Zahnscheibe (Teilenummer 1622347) oder
(Teilenummer 17G5853) und Sicherungsring (Teilenummer 1622319).
3 Schutzleiter des AC/DC Stromversorgungskabels
Ÿ Hauptstromversorgungskabel auf beschädigte oder verbrannte Kontakte und
beschädigte Isolierung prüfen.
Ÿ Den Widerstand des nicht angeschlossenen Hauptstromversorgungskabels zwischen
dem Schutzleiterkontakt am einen und dem Schutzleiterkontakt am anderen Ende
messen.
Der Widerstand darf maximal 0,1 Ohm betragen.
Safety xxxvii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Figure 0-16. Schutzleiterkontakt am Hauptstromversorgungskabel
c Interne Erdung in der 3746-900 und der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit
An der 3746-900
Ÿ Prüfen, ob der elektrische Durchgang zwischen dem Gehäuse des Verteilerkastens und
dem Rahmen der 3746-900 gewährleistet ist, sofern Verteilerkästen vorhanden sind.
Dieser Schritt muß vor dem Anschluß von Signalkabeln erfolgen.
An der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit
Ÿ Prüfen, ob der elektrische Durchgang zwischen allen in der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit
installierten Einheiten (Serviceprozessor, Netzknotenprozessor, Modem, optisches
Plattenlaufwerk usw.) und dem Schutzleiterkontakt des Wechselstromverteilerkastens
gewährleistet ist (siehe Figure 0-17).
Ÿ Prüfen, ob der elektrische Durchgang zwischen dem Schutzleiterkontakt des
Wechselstromverteilerkastens und dem Montagerahmen der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit
gewährleistet ist.
Figure 0-17. Schutzleiterkontakt des Wechselstromverteilerkastens der Erweiterung der
Steuereinheit
Ÿ Prüfen, ob der elektrische Durchgang zwischen dem Gehäuse des Verteilerkastens und
dem Rahmen der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit gewährleistet ist, sofern Verteilerkästen
vorhanden sind. Dieser Schritt muß vor dem Anschluß von Signalkabeln erfolgen (siehe
Figure 0-18 on page xxxix).
Anmerkung: Bei allen vorherigen Prüfungen sollten maximal 0,1 Ohm gemessen werden.
d Erdung der nicht in der 3746-900 oder in der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit installierten
Verteilerkästen
Prüfen, ob der elektrische Durchgang zwischen dem Gehäuse des Verteilerkastens und dem
Erdungssystem des Gebäudes gewährleistet ist.
Je nach Installationsort kann der Verteilerkasten auf zweierlei Arten geerdet werden:
1) Erdung über die vier Schrauben, mit denen der Verteilerkasten am Gehäuse befestigt ist,
falls der Gehäuserahmen mit dem Erdungssystem des Gebäudes verbunden ist.
xxxviii 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Figure 0-18. Erdung des Verteilerkastens über Schrauben
2) Erdung über einen Schutzleiter, der den Verteilerkasten mit dem Erdungssystem des
Gebäudes verbindet.
Figure 0-19. Erdung des Verteilerkastens über Schutzleiter
IBM liefert diesen Schutzleiter nicht mit. Der Schutzleiter muß aus einem
AWG12-Leiter (mind. 2,5 mm2) bestehen, damit eine korrekte Erdung gewährleistet ist.
Schraube: Durchmesser 5 mm, Länge 6 bis 10 mm (siehe Figure 0-20 on page xl).
Verbindung des Schutzleiters mit dem Verteilerkasten
Safety xxxix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Figure 0-20. Schutzleiteranschluß
Dieser Schritt muß vor dem Anschluß von Signalkabeln erfolgen.
Anmerkung: Bei allen vorherigen Prüfungen sollten maximal 0,1 Ohm gemessen werden.
e Gebäudeerdung
Ÿ Sicherstellen, daß zwischen den Metallgehäusen von Steckern, Buchsen usw. und
jeder geerdeten Stelle im Gebäude eine Wechselspannung von weniger als 1 V
anliegt. Dies kann jedes geerdete Metallteil sein, wie z.B. die Stützen eines
Doppelbodens (wenn sie mit dem Gebäudeerder verbunden sind), ein metallisches
Wasserrohr, Baustahl usw..
Anmerkungen:
1) Beim Prüfen an einem lackierten Metallteil sicherstellen, daß die Prüfspitze die Farbe
durchbohrt.
2) Stecker der anzuschließenden Kabel ebenfalls prüfen.
5 Sicherungsautomat und Überstromschutzschalter
Positionen der Sicherungsautomaten (CB) und Überstromschutzschalter (CP) siehe Table 0-8 on
page xliii.
Prüfen, ob
Ÿ alle Sicherungsautomaten und Überstromschutzschalter in der 3745 und 3746-900 die unter
Table 0-8 on page xliii angegebene Leistung haben. Wenn die Leistung nicht aufgeführt ist, die
Teilenummer in einem der folgenden Kataloge prüfen:
– IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models 130 to 17A, Parts Catalog, S135-2012
– IBM 3746 Expansion Unit Model 900, Parts Catalog, S135-2013
– IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Models 900 and 950, Parts Catalog, S135-2015.
Ÿ Bei den Sicherungen im Wechselstromverteilerkasten der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit muß es
sich um träge Sicherungen mit 7 A, 250 V handeln (Teilenummer 58G5782).
6 Eingangsspannung
Der zulässige Spannungsbereich (200/220/240V) und die Frequenz (50/60 Hz) sind dem
Typenschild zu entnehmen.
Eingangsspannung an der 3745
Der Aufkleber für die Versorgungsspannungen (Aufkleber J) gibt die Eingangsspannung für die 3745
an. Die Angaben müssen Schalter 1 an PS2 entsprechen.
Stromumwandlung prüfen
Ÿ Die Stromumwandlung muß bei jeder DFV-Steuereinheit IBM 3745 geprüft werden, die von 50
Hz auf 60 Hz oder von 60 Hz auf 50 Hz umgerichtet wurde.
Ÿ Folgendes bezieht sich ausschließlich auf das Netzspannungsgehäuse. Die Position kann
Figure 4-1 on page 4-3 entnommen werden.
Ÿ Die entsprechenden Teilenummern für die Verwendung bei 50 oder 60 Hz sind Table 0-5 on
page xli zu entnehmen. Bei Unstimmigkeiten das KD-Unterstützungspersonal benachrichtigen.
xl 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Table 0-5. Teilenummern
Frequenzen
50 Hz
Teilenummern
03F4745
60 Hz
03F4569
Die Positionen des Auflebers für die Versorungsspannungen und des Typenschildes sind
Figure 0-21 on page lvii zu entnehmen. Informationen zur Spannung?? im Netzteil PS-2 durch
SW1 siehe Seite YZ060, Blatt 1.
Prüfen, ob
Ÿ die Angaben auf dem Typenschild und dem Spannungsaufkleber der 3745 mit der an der
Netzstromversorgung des Kunden gemessenen Frequenz und Spannung übereinstimmen.
Wenn dies nicht der Fall ist, zuständige Geschäftsstelle informieren.
Eingangsspannung an der 3746-900
Der zulässige Spannungsbereich (200/220/240V) und die Frequenz (50/60 Hz) sind dem
Typenschild zu entnehmen.
Der Spannungsbereich für die 3746-900 liegt bei 200/220/240V.
Prüfen, ob
Ÿ die Angaben auf dem Typenschild an der 3746-900 mit der am Netzteil des Kunden
gemessenen Spannung und Frequenz übereinstimmen. Wenn dies nicht der Fall ist, zuständige
Geschäftsstelle informieren. Die Position des Typenschildes ist “3745/3746-900 Safety Label
Identifications” on page lx zu entnehmen.
Spannung am Gleichstromeingang
Am Gleichstromeingang muß die Spannung beim Kunden zwischen -40,0 V und -60,0 V liegen.
Der optionale Gleichstromeingang kann nicht eingestellt werden.
Spannung am Wechselstromeingang
Am Wechselstromeingang muß die Spannung beim Kunden zwischen 180 V und 260 V liegen.
Die Einstellung der Eingangsspannung gemäß der Spannung beim Kunden kann an der
Klemmleiste 1 der Transformatoren an der Rückseite der 3746-900 erfolgen.
Table 0-6. Einstellung der Spannung des Wechselstromeingangs
Gemessene
Spannung
Position des
Leiters
Nenn-
Spannung
180
bis 210 Volt
Klemmleiste TB 1-2
Klemmleiste TB 1-3
Klemmleiste TB 1-4
200/208 Volt
220 Volt
210
bis 230 Volt
230
240 Volt
bis 260 Volt
Wichtiger Hinweis:
Die 3745 kann über Fernsteuerung eingeschaltet werden. Deshalb muß bei Ausführung der folgenden
Verfahren die Stromsteuerfunktion am Bedienungsfeld der 3745 und 3746-900 auf Lokal eingestellt sein.
Eingangsspannung der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit
Der zulässige Spannungsbereich (200/240 V) und die Frequenz (50/60 Hz) sind dem Typenschild zu
entnehmen.
Prüfen, ob die Angaben auf dem Typenschild an der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit mit der an der
Netzstromversorgung des Kunden gemessenen Spannung und Frequenz übereinstimmen. Wenn dies
Safety xli
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
nicht der Fall ist, zuständige Geschäftsstelle informieren. Die Position des Typenschildes ist “Controller
Expansion Label Location” on page lxii zu entnehmen.
7 Prüfung des Notaus-Schalters
a. Den Kunden bitten, das Netzkabel an die Netzstromversorgung anzuschließen.
b. Sicherungsautomat (CB1) einschalten.
c. Die 3745 und 3746-900 einschalten (Stromsteuerfunktion am Bedienungsfeld muß auf Lokal
eingestellt sein).
d. Den NOTSCHALTER ausschalten (O) und prüfen, ob:
1) die 3745 und die 3746-900 ausgeschaltet sind.
Hinweis
In der 3746-900 stehen die primären Versorgungs- (ACDC) oder die Filterbereiche
(DCDC) weiterhin unter Spannung.
Komplettes Abschalten:
1. Die Sicherungsautomaten (CBs) ausschalten.
2. Alle Netzstecker aus den Steckdosen ziehen oder die Netzstromversorgung
abschalten.
2) die Disketten- und Plattenlaufwerke angehalten sind.
3) die Lüfter abgeschaltet sind.
e. Notschalter entriegeln und Steuereinheit einschalten.
8 Betriebsanzeige
Nach Einschalten der Steuereinheit prüfen, ob
a. die Betriebsanzeige am Bedienungsfeld der 3745 leuchtet.
b. die Betriebs-LED und die Bereitschafts-LED (am Bedienungsfeld des 3746-900) gemäß den
Angaben der Tabelle “Bedeutung der LEDs am Bedienungsfeld der 3746-900” leuchten.
Bedeutung der LEDs am Bedienungsfeld der 3746-900
Table 0-7. Bedeutung der LEDs am Bedienungsfeld der 3746-900
LED
Bereitschaft
LED
Betrieb
Status
3746-900
Kommentar
Blinken
AUS
Wechselstrom Initialisierung der CBSP-Hardware. Die 3746-900 wartet auf
EIN
erste Erkennung durch den MOSS-E beim LAN-Anschluß.
EIN
AUS
Bereitschaft
Die eingangs vom MOSS-E erkannte 3746-900 wartet auf das
Einschalten (nur das CBSP EEPROM-Programm ist aktiv).
AUS
AUS
Blinken
EIN
Einschalten
Betrieb
Alle 3746-900-Prozessoren werden hochgefahren (IML).
Die 3746-900 ist nun betriebsbereit.
xlii 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Stromversorgung der 3745/3746-900, Sicherungsautomaten (CB),
Überstromschutzschalter (CP) und Sicherungen (F)
Table 0-8. Stromversorgung der 3745, Sicherungsautomaten (CB), Überstromschutzschalter (CP) und
Sicherungen (F)
Rahmen
CB/CP/F
CB1
Position
01H-A1
Nennwerte
10 A
PS (Stromvers.)
Rahmen 1
ALLE
CP2
01H-A1
1,5 A
2 A
PS2
CP3
01H-B1
Ventilatoren
PS2
F1
01H-B1
0,2 A
15 A/220 V
50 A
Rahmen 7:
3746-900
CB1 AC
CB1 DC
CP1
07K-A1/07J-A1
07J-A1
Wechselstrom
Gleichstrom
Gleichstrom
Gleichstrom
Gleichstrom
Gleichstrom
Gleichstrom
07K-A1/07J-A1
07H-A1
5 A
CP2
12 A
CP3
07H-A1
12 A
CP4
07H-A1
12 A
CP5
07H-A1
12 A
Sicherungen der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit
Der Wechselstromverteilerkasten der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit enthält zwei Sicherungen: 7 A 250 V
träge.
Safety xliii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
xliv 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Safety xlv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
xlvi 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Safety xlvii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
xlviii 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Safety xlix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
l
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Safety li
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
lii 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Safety liii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
liv 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Safety lv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
lvi 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Safety Label Locations
Safety Labels on the 3745
On the following figures, labels are designated by letters. A particular wording corresponds to each letter
(see “3745/3746-900 Safety Label Identifications” on page lx).
Figure 0-21. 3745 Label and Power Rating Plate Locations (Back)
Safety lvii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Figure 0-22. 3745 Label and Power Rating Plate Locations (Front)
lviii 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Safety Label on the 3746-900
On the following figures, labels are designated by letters. A particular wording corresponds to each letter
(see “3745/3746-900 Safety Label Identifications” on page lx).
Po we r Ra t in g Pla t e
(Un d e r t h e c o ve r)
(Un d e r t h e c o ve r)
Fro n t Vie w
Re a r Vie w
Figure 0-23. 3746 Model 900 (Frame 07) Label Locations
Safety Label on LCB
S
Figure 0-24. LCB Safety Label Location
Safety lix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
3745/3746-900 Safety Label Identifications
The safety labels shown in Figure 0-25 on page lx and in Figure 0-26 on page lxi are in the English
language. They are also available in other languages. See “Safety Label Part Numbers by Country” on
page lxiii for ordering.
LABEL A
LABEL C
CAUTION
(Same as label A
but in local
language)
DUE TO CONNECTED EQUIPMENT
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES
MAY BE PRESENT AT ANY TIME
LABEL B
LABEL D
(Same as label B
but in local
language)
HAZARDOUS AREA
TRAINED SERVICE
PERSONNEL ONLY
LABEL E
LABEL F
LABEL H
LABEL G
> 18 Kg
DO NOT OPEN
NE PAS OUVRIR
NICHT ÖFFNEN
NIET OPENEN
NON APRIRE
NO ABRIR
~
NAO ABRIR
Figure 0-25. 3745/3746-900 Safety Labels
lx 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
LABEL K1
LA BEL K2
LA BEL L
SWITC H "O FF" C B1
AT 0 7 K-A1 FO R THIS
SIDE TRANSFO RMER
BEFO RE REMO VING THE C O VER
HASARDO US AREA
TRAINED SERVIC E
PERSO NNEL O NLY
SWIC TH "O FF" C B1
AT 07 J -A1 FO R THIS
SIDE TRANSFO RMER
BEFO RE REMO VING THE C O VER
HASARDO US AREA
TRAINED SERVIC E
PERSO NNEL O NLY
LABEL A
C AUTIO N
LINE VO LTAG E
P RESEN T WITH
MAC HINE PO WER O FF
REMO VE P RIMARY
PO WER C O RD BEFO RE
REMO VING C O VER
LABEL M
LABEL D
C AUTIO N
HAZARDO US ENERG Y
IS P RESENT WHERE
THE C ASSETE IS
PLUG G ED IN
LABEL N1
LABEL N2
> 3 2 Kg
> 18 Kg
LA BEL P
LABEL Q
C AUTIO N
1 - SWITC H O FF THE DC BO X C B1
2 - SWITC H O FF THE C USTO MER C IRC UIT BREAKER
3 - ATTAC H A WARNING LABEL DIREC TLY TO THE
C IRC UIT BREAKER INDIC ATING THAT
"PO WER MUST NO T BE AP P LIED"
60 VDC
240 VA
<
4 - DISC O NNEC T THE SUPPLY C ABLE FRO M THE
>
C USTO MER J UNC TIO N BO X
5 - LAST, DISC O NNEC T SUP PLY C ABLE FRO M THE
DC PO WER BO X
Figure 0-26. 3745/3746-900 Safety Labels
Safety lxi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
LCB Safety Label
LABEL S
HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT
Permanent ground connection
is mandatory
before network connections.
Figure 0-27. LCB Safety Label (PN 80G3928)
Controller Expansion Label Location
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
K
M
AC Outlet
Distribution Box
Power Rating
Plate
Figure 0-28. Controller Expansion Power Rating Plate Location
lxii 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
Safety Label Part Numbers by Country
The following table gives the label group part number according to the language(s) of the country in which
the 3745 is installed.
Table 0-9. Safety Label Numbers by Country
Language
3745
Frame 1
Part
3746-900
Part
Number
3746-900
Label Q
LCB
Label S
Number
Canadian French
Danish
03F4861
03F4869
03F4872
03F4860
03F4870
03F4862
03F4871
03F4863
03F4864
03F4867
03F4868
03F4865
03F4866
03F4873
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
72F0673
72F0676
72F0664
72F0674
72F0665
Dutch
English
Finnish
French
French/Dutch
German
72F0666
72F0667
72F0670
72F0671
72F0668
72F0669
72F0677
Italian
Japanese
Norwegian
Portuguese
Spanish
Swedish
Safety lxiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
lxiv 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
Preface
About this Manual
This MIP is a guide for fault isolation and repair of the 3745 Communication Controller. It is expected that
the customer has used the .Problem Determination Guide, SA33-0096 or the 3745 Models A, Problem
Analysis Guide (online document) prior to calling IBM for service. The MIP does not duplicate the tasks
done by the Problem Determination Guide.
The MIP gives the service representative information needed to:
Ÿ Analyze problems or symptoms reported by the system user.
Ÿ Restore normal 3745 operation.
Who Should Read this Manual
The person using this manual should be:
Ÿ Trained to service the 3745 and 3746-900.
Ÿ Familiar with the configuration of the system to which the 3745 is connected.
Ÿ Familiar with the operation of the 3745, as described in the IBM 3745 Hardware Maintenance
Reference, SY33-2066 and IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service Function, SY33-2069, which
are part of this Maintenance Library.
The intended audience for this manual are Product-Trained Customer Engineers (PT CE). The Product
Support-Trained Customer Engineer (PST CE) is also expected to refer to this manual when he is required
to perform the same tasks as the PT CE.
How this Manual Is Organized
This manual is organized as follows:
Ÿ Safety information is at the start of the manual.
Ÿ From Chapter 1 through Chapter 4, this manual is designed so that the information is presented to
the user in the same order as he will require it during the majority of service calls. The user is told
where to go next for each path through this part of the manual.
Ÿ At the back of the manual are:
– Appendix A, Maintenance Aids
– Appendix B, Bibliography
– Appendix X: Abbreviation list and glossary.
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
lxv
Preface
lxvi 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Amendments
Summary of Changes
All MAPs, exchange procedures, and so on, referring to the 3746-900, have been removed in this edition
except for the "Service Inspection Safety Procedures".
For information concerning the 3746 Model 900 refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller
Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Corrections and improvements relating to the previous edition have also been inserted.
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
lxvii
Amendments
lxviii 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
START
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
Important
Ÿ Your personal safety can never be over-emphasized.
Ÿ You have been taught safety procedures since the earliest phase of your IBM training.
Ÿ Your safety is part of every maintenance call.
Ÿ You are the only one who can make a maintenance call safe.
Ÿ Specific information can be found in “Product Safety Information” on page xvii and “Safety Label
Locations” on page lvii.
Start here when you use this manual to repair a 3745/3746 hardware failure.
Ÿ Remember that the 3745/3746 are machines which are designed to be repaired while the cus-
tomer is still using the operational areas. This is called Concurrent Maintenance. Before
changing FRUs, you will be directed to ensure that you have the correct area of the machine
ready for maintenance.
Ÿ When a power supply is shared between adapters, the disabling procedures apply to both 'sus-
pected' and 'associated' adapters.
Ÿ During a call for service, it will normally be necessary to use the 3745 console. To log ON at a
3745 console, proceed as directed in “Console Use for Maintenance.”
Console Use for Maintenance
001
Is the 3745 a Model 17A?
Yes No
002
The 3745 is a Model 130, 150, 160, or 170.
The 3745 has password protection for functions controlled via a console. Several types of password
exist for different activities. They are described in the IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide,
SA33-0097.
Obtain the maintenance password from the customer so that you can log on at the 3745 console
(local, remote, or alternate). This password will give you access to Menu 3 Maintenance Func-
tions, in addition to Menu 1 and Menu 2.
If the 3745 failure prevents correct operation of the 3745 console, continue at “Selection Table” on
page 1-4 .
Log ON at the 3745 console as follows:
1. Ensure that the customer is not using the console and that he has logged OFF. The channel
enable/disable screen is displayed.
2. Press F4: MOSS FUNCTIONS.
3. The password screen is displayed.
4. Enter the maintenance password.
Note: Remember to log OFF the console and to re-IML the MOSS at the end of the service call.
See “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102 for more information.
Continue with “Selection Table” on page 1-4.
003
The 3745 is a Model 17A.
(Step 003 continues)
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-1
START
003 (continued)
Is the service processor operational?
Yes No
004
Continue with “Selection Table” on page 1-4.
005
Obtain the service processor maintenance password from the customer so that you can log ON at the
service processor console.
To log ON:
1. On the MOSS-E View window, click on Program (in the action bar).
2. Click on Log On MOSS-E.
3. Enter the password.
Are you here to investigate a RSF problem?
If you do not know, continue with Step 006.
Yes No
006
1. On the MOSS-E View window, double-click on the service processor icon.
2. The Service Processor Menu window is displayed.
3. Click on the Configuration Management option.
4. Double-click on the Manage Remote Operations option.
5. On the Remote Operation Management window, select the Remote operations authorization
option and click on OK.
6. On the Remote Support Facility window, select the following two options:
Ÿ Disable Remote Support Facility
Ÿ Do not generate alerts
7. Click on OK.
8. Continue with Step 007.
007
Continue with “Selection Table” on page 1-4 .
See “Service Processor Window Overview” on page 1-3 for the main panels used to perform the proce-
dures documented in this manual.
1-2 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
START
Service Processor Window Overview
3746-9x0 Menu
MOSS-E View
Controller
Function Options Help
Configuration Management
Problem Management
3745
3746
Network Node Processor (NNP) Management
Multiaccess Enclosure (MAE) Management
Operations Mangement
3745 Menu
Change Management
Performance Management
Functions to Use Under PE Guidance
Function Options Help
Service Processor
MOSS Console
Problem Management
Operation Management
(For a detailed menu, see the 3746-900
Service Guide)
Service Processor Menu
Function Options Help
Problem Management
Display Alarms
Manage Alarms/Errors/Events (SRCs)
Report Problem Using Remote Support Facility
Configuration Management
Problem Management
Operation Management
Change Management
Operation Management
Manage Ethernet Bridge
Set 3745/MOSS-E Connection Mode
Locate Bypass Card Position
Configuration Management
Communications Manager/2
FFST/2
LAPS
Manage Remote Operation
Set Time and Date
Customize DCAF Target Settings
Manage 3745/3746-9x0 Installation/Removal
Start/Configure TCP/IP
Problem Management
Display Alarms
Manage Alarms/Errors/Events (SRCs)
Transfer NCP Dump
Connect/Disconnect 3746-9x0 from MOSS-E
Change Management
Manage Microcode Changes
Change Active Code
Manage Microcode Fixes
Set Automatic Microcode Download Option
Operation Management
Manage Disk and Data Base
Manage Passwords
Display Files
Manage Ethernet Bridge
Retrieve Engineering Data
Delete Engineering Data
Capture and Save Screens
Configure Ethernet Bridge
Configure SNMP
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
START
Selection Table
Going from top to bottom in the table, select the first entry point which fits your situation.
If You Have a:
Then Go to:
General Verbal Symptoms
The “General Verbal Symptoms” on page 1-8.
Color symptom for 3745/3746-900 icons
on MOSS-E View window.
“MAP 5200: 3745/3746-900/Service Processor/Network
Node Processor Icon Color Symptoms” on page 2-37
Customer problem number (CPN)
The “3745 and Service Processor Maintenance Using a
CPN” on page 1-55
Maintenance actions
The “3745 Maintenance Actions” on page 1-6.
Problem during installation
The “Problems During Machine, EC, or MES Installation”
on page 1-7.
Problem while installing an EC or MES
The “Problems During Machine, EC, or MES Installation”
on page 1-7.
3745/3746-900 power symptoms
3745 reference code
The “3745 Power Symptoms” on page 1-12.
“Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
3745 FRU group number to exchange
3745 FRU list to exchange
“Using the MIP FRU Group Table” on page 1-48.
The “3745 FRU List” on page 1-53.
3745 control panel code reported
3745 control panel symptoms
3745 service processor link symptom
The “3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15.
The “3745 Control Panel Symptoms” on page 1-11.
“MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN Attached to the
Service Processor” on page 2-42
3745 IOC bus symptoms
3745 console symptoms
“MAP 0100: IOC Bus Trouble Shooting” on page 2-1.
The “3745 Console Symptoms” on page 1-10.
3745 'Disk not ready' message on the 3745
console
or 'Disk error' message
or 'Diskette error' message
“How to Perform 3745 Control Panel Operations” on
page 1-82. Perform a MOSS IML, and restart, using the
control panel code reported.
3745 console message displayed
Most messages are self explanatory. If necessary, go to
the 3745 Problem Determination Guide, 3745 Service
Functions or “3745 Advanced Operations Guide”.
Alarm reported on the 3745 Model 17A
3745-XXA apply a microcode fix
The Problem Analysis Guide (online book)
The Service Processor Installation and Maintenance
manual. Use the "Handling the Microcode Change Levels"
procedure in the chapter "Maintaining the Code Loaded on
the Service Processor".
3745-XXA RSF link down
Service processor symptom
“MAP 4510: 3745 Model 17A Manual Call” on page 2-33
The "Service Processor Problem Determination" in the cor-
responding Service Processor Installation and Maintenance
manual.
Network node processor symptom
The "Network Node Processor Problem Determination" in
the corresponding Network Node Processor Installation and
Maintenance manual.
Service processor system reference code
sequence number
The “Service Processor Maintenance Using an SRC
Sequence Number” on page 1-57.
Service processor apply a microcode change
"Handling the Microcode Change Level" in the chapter
"Maintaining the Code Loaded on the Service Processor" in
the corresponding Service Processor Installation and
Maintenance manual.
Problem with the service processor integrated
modem
"How to Run the Service Processor Diagnostics" in the cor-
responding Service Processor Installation and Maintenance
manual, and run the integrated V.32 modem test, or refer
to the IBM Asynchronous/SDLC V.32 Modem/A; Installa-
tion, Operation, and Problem Determination Guide.
Problem on the external modem attached at the
service processor
Refer to the modem documentation.
Ÿ For IBM the 7855 modem refer to the problem determi-
nation chapter in the 7855 Modem Model 10, Guide to
Operation.
Ÿ For IBM the 7857 modem refer to the problem determi-
nation chapter in the IBM 7857 Modem Guide to Oper-
ation.
Ÿ For the Hayes** modem, refer to the corresponding
manual.
1-4 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
START
If You Have a:
Then Go to:
Problem on the 3746-900, or attached features
The IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900
Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
START
3745 Maintenance Actions
If You Want to:
Then Go to:
Run 3745 diagnostics in offline mode (ODG)
Run 3745 diagnostics in concurrent maintenance
mode (CDG)
The “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60.
The “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60.
Run the 3745/3746-900 LIC wrap test (WTT)
“How to Run the Wrap Test (WTT) for TSS, HPTSS, or
3746-900” on page 3-15.
Find information about using the 3745 control
panel
“3745 Control Panel Use” on page 1-78.
Know the definition of a 3745 control panel code
Install a 3745
Find information about using the 3745 MOSS
console
The “3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15.
The 3745/3746-900 Installation Guide, SY33-2067
The 3745 Service Functions Guide, SY33-2069.
Find information about connected consoles
Find the level of a FRU installed.
Check voltages on 3745
The 3745 Console Setup Guide, SA33-0158.
The 3745 Service Functions Guide, SY33-2069.
The 3745 YZ pages
Change parameters for the 3745 LIC type 5 or 6.
Appendix B, “PKD (Portable Keypad Display) Maintenance
Aids for LIC 5 and 6” on page A-5.
Apply a Microcode Fix on the 3745-17A
"Handling the Microcode Change Level" in the chapter
"Maintaining the Code Loaded on the Service Processor" in
the corresponding Service Processor Installation and
Maintenance manual.
Find information about using the service
processor console
The 3745 Models A, Basic Operations Guide, SA33-0177.
Test the 3745-17A RSF link
Find information about customer console on
3745-17A
“MAP 4510: 3745 Model 17A Manual Call” on page 2-33.
The 3745 Console Setup Guide, SA33-0158.
Perform Engineering Data Transfer
The “Engineering Data Transfer” on page 1-58.
Run diagnostics on the service processor
"How to Run the Service Processor Diagnostics" in the cor-
responding Service Processor Installation and Maintenance
manual.
Run diagnostics on the network node processor
Apply a microcode change on a service processor
The "Network Node Processor Problem Determination" in
the corresponding Network Node Processor Installation and
Maintenance manual.
"Handling the Microcode Change Level" in the chapter
"Maintaining the Code Loaded on the Service Processor" in
the corresponding Service Processor Installation and
Maintenance manual.
Find the modem setting for RSF
The Service Processor Installation and Maintenance
manual. Use the "Installing and Connecting the RSF
Modem to the Service Processor" procedure according to
your modem type.
Run diagnostics on the 3746-900 or attached fea-
tures
The IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900
Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Find miscellaneous information
“Miscellaneous Information” on page 1-13.
1-6 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
START
Problems During Machine, EC, or MES Installation
When installing a 3745, the 3745 Installation Guide, SY33-2067 should be used. When installing an EC or
an MES, the supplied instructions should be used. It is possible that the task or diagnostic you were
asked to perform during the installation detected an error, and you were requested to start troubleshooting
using this manual.
The primary purpose of this manual is to resolve problems that occur in an operational environment after a
successful installation. That is, the machine has worked previously and is now failing.
At installation time, or after an EC or MES is installed, it is possible that errors may occur due to condi-
tions which would not exist in an operational environment.
Ÿ Cables plugged incorrectly
Ÿ Terminators missing
Ÿ Mismatch between CDF and machine configuration
Ÿ Mismatch between line characteristics and setups
Ÿ Wrong address set
Ÿ Top card connectors incorrectly installed
Ÿ Loose cards.
During your path through the MIP, you should remember these possibilities and, when the failing area is
identified, check with the aid of the 3745 Hardware Maintenance Reference, SY33-2066 and YZ pages
that these conditions do not exist prior to changing FRUs.
Now, starting at the top of the “Selection Table,” work down until you find an entry that matches the
symptom detected during the installation.
Be sure to read “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1 before removing any FRUs from this
machine.
Selection Table
If You Have a:
Then Go to:
Reference code (see the "3745 Problem
Determination/Analysis Guide", Alarms)
“Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
3745 control panel code reported
3745 Power Symptoms
“3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15.
“3745 Power Symptoms” on page 1-12.
IOC bus symptoms
3745 console symptom
3745 control panel symptom
General verbal symptom
“MAP 0100: IOC Bus Trouble Shooting” on page 2-1.
“3745 Console Symptoms” on page 1-10.
“3745 Control Panel Symptoms” on page 1-11.
“General Verbal Symptoms” on page 1-8.
Error detected by diagnostics on the 3745
“Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on
page 4-99.
3745 console message displayed
CDF undefined error
Most messages are self explanatory. If needed go to the
"3745 Problem Determination Guide", "3745 Service Func-
tions", or "Advanced Operation Guide".
Correct the CDF using the manual update function (option
S). Refer to the IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Service Function, SY33-2069.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptom Index
Symptom Index
General Verbal Symptoms
Table 1-1 (Page 1 of 2). General Symptoms
If the:
Symptom:
Then:
Has detected
Ÿ Channel errors on this
Go to “MAP 3500: Activate/Deactivate Line
Problem or Line Errors on the TSS” on
page 2-7.
3745
Host
Ÿ Route inop
Ÿ Missing interrupt
Has detected channel
errors on the 3746-900
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Con-
troller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Is unable to load/dump the
control program via the
3745 CA
Go to “MAP 3500: Activate/Deactivate Line
Problem or Line Errors on the TSS” on
page 2-7.
Is unable to load/dump the
control program via the
3746-900 ESCA
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Con-
troller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
3745 using a channel
Is unable to activate an
ESCA or there is no traffic
on the ESCA
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Con-
troller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Ÿ Refer to “How to Run MOSS Diagnostics” on
page 3-4 and continue with the error
detected.
Is unable to load/dump the
control program
3745 using the MOSS HDD
Ÿ If no error is detected, go to the "Service
Function Guide" for HDD problems.
1-8 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptom Index
Table 1-1 (Page 2 of 2). General Symptoms
If the:
Symptom:
Then:
Is unable to activate (start)
a line or a ring
1. For TSS: go to “MAP 3500:
Activate/Deactivate Line Problem or Line
Errors on the TSS” on page 2-7.
2. For TRSS : go to “MAP 3520:
Activate/Deactivate Ring Problems or Ring
Errors on the TRSS” on page 2-8.
Has errors while running
lines or rings
3. For HPTSS or ESS : go to “MAP 3530:
Activate/Deactivate Line Problems or Line
Errors on the HPTSS/ESS” on page 2-9.
Is unable to activate (start)
a ring or has errors while
running a ring connected to
a 3746-900
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Con-
troller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Is unable to activate (start)
or has a problem on all the
lines of a 3746-900 CLP.
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Con-
troller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Is unable to activate (start)
or has a problem on all the
lines of a 3746-900 LIC11.
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Con-
troller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Is unable to activate or has
a problem on all the lines of
the same ARC group
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Con-
troller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
3745
Is unable to activate or has
a problem on all the lines of
the same line connection
box expansion (LCBE)
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Con-
troller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Is unable to activate or has
a problem on all the lines of
a 3746-900 LIC12
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Con-
troller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Is unable to activate or has
a problem on all the lines of
a 3746-900 LIC16
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Con-
troller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Call your support structure for assistance with
this problem. Refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Has a suspected program
loop or hang
Ÿ If a message with a reference code is gener-
ated, go to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14.
Has unexpected re-IPLs
Ÿ If no message with a reference code is gen-
erated at the re-IPL, contact your support
structure for assistance. Refer to “Con-
tacting Support” on page A-1.
Ÿ Run the RSF console link test, refer to “How
to Run the Console Link Test for 3745
Models 130, 150, 160, and 170” on
page 3-6.
Is unable to activate an
RSF link
Ÿ If no error is detected suspect the modem or
line. Ask the customer to perform problem
determination or call the appropriate service
representative.
Hardware central service
Service processor
The 3745 Model 17A, has
the RSF link down
Go to “MAP 4510: 3745 Model 17A Manual
Call” on page 2-33.
Go to “MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN
Attached to the Service Processor” on
page 2-42.
Is unable to establish a link
with a 3745 or 3746-900
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptom Index
3745 Console Symptoms
Table 1-2. 3745 Console Symptoms
If a:
Then:
Local/Remote/RSF or alternate console appears
not to function or functions incorrectly
Ensure that the Problem Determination Guide
has been followed.
"Disk not ready" message
or
Perform a MOSS IML. See “How to Perform
3745 Control Panel Operations” on page 1-82.
Restart using the reported Control Panel code.
"Disk error" message
or
"Diskette error" message
Most messages are self explanatory.
If necessary, refer to the:
Ÿ Problem Determination Guide, SA33-0096
3745 console message is displayed
Ÿ IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service
Function, SY33-2069
Ÿ IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide,
SA33-0097.
Go to “MAP 4510: 3745 Model 17A Manual
Call” on page 2-33.
On 3745 Models 17A, the RSF link is down
Service processor is failing
Refer to the "Service Processor Problem Deter-
mination" in the corresponding Service
Processor Installation and Maintenance manual.
or
Service processor symptom appears
1-10 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptom Index
3745 Control Panel Symptoms
Table 1-3. Control Panel Symptoms
If the 3745
Then:
Ÿ Run the Control Panel test. Refer to “How to Run
the Control Panel Test” on page 3-8.
Ÿ When a FRU group is called for an error, go to
Control panel displays any wrong character or all
segments of all characters are ON
“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
Ÿ If no error is detected and the problem still exists,
call your support structure for a possible microcode
problem. Refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Ÿ Run the Control Panel test. Refer to “How to Run
the Control Panel Test” on page 3-8.
Ÿ When a FRU group is called for an error, go to
“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
Control panel display has a missing character
Ÿ If no error is detected and the problem still exists,
call your support structure for a possible microcode
problem. Refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Ÿ Run the Control Panel test. Refer to “How to Run
the Control Panel Test” on page 3-8.
Ÿ When a FRU group is called for an error, go to
Has one or more control panel keys that do not
work
“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
Ÿ If no error is detected and the problem still exists,
call your support structure for a possible microcode
problem. Refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Ÿ Run the Control Panel test. Refer to “How to Run
the Control Panel Test” on page 3-8.
Ÿ When a FRU group is called for an error, go to
MOSS message indicator is always ON without
a console pending message
“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
Ÿ If no error is detected and the problem still exists,
call your support structure for a possible microcode
problem. Refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Ÿ Run the Control Panel test. Refer to “How to Run
the Control Panel Test” on page 3-8.
MOSS inoperative indicator is always ON even if
MOSS is operating
Ÿ When a FRU group is called for an error, go to
“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
Ÿ If no error is detected, go to “How to Run MOSS
Diagnostics” on page 3-4.
Go to “Power MAP 3930: Power Control Subsystem
Problems” on page 2-21.
Control panel display is blank
Ÿ Run the Control Panel test. Refer to “How to Run
the Control Panel Test” on page 3-8.
"All Channel Adapters Disabled" indicator is in
an invalid state
Ÿ When a FRU group is called for an error, go to
“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
Ÿ If no error is detected, go to “How to Run MOSS
Diagnostics” on page 3-4.
Ÿ Refer to “How to Run MOSS Diagnostics” on
page 3-4 and continue with the error detected.
"Console in Use" indicator shows the wrong
console
Ÿ If no error is detected, exchange the FRU group 52.
Go to page 1-49.
Go to “Power MAP 3930: Power Control Subsystem
Problems” on page 2-21.
Power On Indicator is not ON
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptom Index
3745 Power Symptoms
Table 1-4. Power Symptoms
If the:
Symptom:
Then:
Go to “Power MAP 3930: Power Control Subsystem
Problems” on page 2-21.
Will not power ON
Will not perform a scheduled
power ON
Go to “Power MAP 3925: Scheduled Power on Problems”
on page 2-20.
Host power ON sequence stops at
the 3745
Go to “MAP 3905: Power ON Problem in Host Mode or
Host Power Sequence Problem” on page 2-16.
Power On Indicator is not ON
Control panel display is blank
Go to “Power MAP 3930: Power Control Subsystem
Problems” on page 2-21.
3745
Go to “Power MAP 3935: Power OFF not Possible in Host
Mode” on page 2-25.
Will not power OFF
or
Go to “Power MAP 3945: Power OFF not Possible in
Local Mode” on page 2-26.
Will not power OFF when a power
OFF command is sent by the
control program
Go to “Power MAP 3960: Power OFF not Possible in
Network Mode” on page 2-28.
1-12 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptom Index
Miscellaneous Information
If You Want to:
Then Go to:
Find information about the 3745 console
Ÿ Maintenance
Ÿ Setup
Ÿ
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service
Function, SY33-2069
Ÿ
Ÿ
IBM 3745 Console Setup Guide, SA33-0158
Ÿ Customer MOSS functions
IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097
Find the level of an installed FRU
Check voltages
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service Function,
SY33-2069 CDF chapter.
YZ pages, and IBM 3745 Hardware Maintenance
Reference (specifications chapter).
Find information about the maintenance aids for:
Ÿ Control program
See this manual appendix A
Ÿ Microcode
Ÿ Special tools
Ÿ PKD and LIC5/6
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference Codes
Using Reference Codes
Reference Codes (8 digits) are always displayed at the rightmost position of the alarm on the 3745
console. They are generated by the microcode which runs within the MOSS to provide an automatic
analysis of box event records (BERs). This function is known as auto-BER and is part of the AUTOMAINT
facility. Reference codes are also generated when diagnostics detect an error.
If several alarms have been generated for the same problem, resulting in multiple reference codes, use
the reference code beginning with BX, if any. If there are no BX codes, use the reference code given by
the earliest alarm.
To analyze a reference code to find the correct action to take, use the following procedure on the 3745
console:
1. From the Maintenance Functions on Menu 3, select the BRC function.
The reference code screen will be displayed (see Figure 1-1).
à
ð
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-OFFLINE
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/89 ð1:22
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: BER CORRELATION
REFERENCE CODE INTERPRETATION
ENTER REFERENCE CODE ==>
===>
F5:BER CORRELATION
F6:ADDITIONAL INFO
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
Figure 1-1. Reference Code Screen
2. Type in the 8-digit reference code you want to analyze in the input area of the screen. Refer to
Figure 1-1.
3. Press SEND the action you are required to perform will appear on the screen.
Note
When the microcode is a possible cause of the error, it is recommended that you check:
1. If you have the highest level of microcode for your machine.
2. That any applicable MCFs are installed.
Your support structure will have this information.
4. Hit F6 for additional information (on associated components and customer resources for TSS,
HPTSS and ESS), and record the data for later usage.
Note: If the CDF is not correct, this information can be wrong.
5. When the FRU list is given, record the types and location, then use the “3745 FRU List” on
page 1-53.
If the reference code is reported as 'INVALID' or 'DUMMY', check that you have entered the same code as
reported. If so, an error in the BER analysis or BER logging has occurred. Contact your support structure
for assistance. See “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
1-14 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
3745 Control Panel Codes
For the 3746 Model 900 panel code, refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900
Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Table 1-5 (Page 1 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
SUCCESSFUL IPL COMPLETION: THE CONTROL
PROGRAM IS LOADED AND MOSS IS OPERA-
TIONAL.
000
No action required
ROS CODE DOES NOT GET CONTROL OR DOES
NOT EXECUTE SCHEDULED PROCESSING (CODE
DISPLAYED BY THE PCC )
Go to “MAP 3200: MOSS Control
Panel Code 001” on page 2-3
001
MMIO INTERFACE NOT OK (CODE DISPLAYED BY
THE PCC )
002
003
Exchange the FRU group 22
If permanently displayed, exchange
the FRU group 22
MOSS REIML has been initiated . Progression code.
Go to “Power MAP 3950:
PCC-Detected Error on MOSS Reset”
on page 2-27
Go to “Power MAP 3970:
PCC-Detected Error on CCU Reset or
on Remote Power OFF” on
page 2-30
Problem detected with MOSS POR signal (not the
same as the PCC one ).
004
005
Problem detected with CCU POR signals (not the
same as the PCC one ) .
Power on 3745 if it was previously in
'local mode'.
ac input fault detected . (always sent on panel even if
MOSS IMLed). An alarm and reference code will have
been produced on the 3745 console
Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14
006
CB1 has been set OFF then ON (during an exchange
procedure for instance).
Do not take into account the Panel
Code
PCC battery down . (always sent on panel even if
MOSS IMLed)
Problem detected with RPO signal (always ON : CCU
or cable problem)
007
008
Exchange the FRU group 39
Exchange the FRU group 49
009 and
00A
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Unused
00B
Problem detected on power supply 1 " OVERCUR-
RENT FAULT " .
Go to “MAP 3900: Overcurrent on
Power Supply 1” on page 2-12
This code is normal and no FRUs
need to be replaced. Wait at least 10
seconds after power OFF before you
try to power ON again
This code can occur if the 3745 is powered ON less
than 10 seconds after a power OFF
00C
Problem detected on power supply 1 " POWER
SUPPLY FAULT " (overvoltage, undervoltage) .
Exchange the FRU group 50
This code can occur if the 3745 is powered ON less
than 10 seconds after a power OFF
This code is normal and no FRUs
need to be replaced. Wait at least 10
seconds after power OFF before you
try to power ON again
00D
Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
This code is normal and no FRUs
need to be replaced. Wait at least 10
seconds after power OFF before you
try to power ON again
This code can occur if the 3745 is powered ON less
than 10 seconds after a power OFF
Problem detected on power 2 "OVER-CURRENT
FAULT".
Unused
Go to “MAP 3910: Overcurrent on
Power Supply 2” on page 2-18
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
00E
00F
This code is normal and no FRUs
need to be replaced. Wait at least 10
seconds after power OFF before you
try to power ON again
This code can occur if the 3745 is powered ON less
than 10 seconds after a power OFF
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 2 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
Use the function 'B' to display the four
stacked errors. Refer to “Display
Stacked Errors” on page 1-83.
Machine powered OFF because power supply or blower
faults
010
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
011 to 02F
Unused
030
031
032
Problem detected with Power supply Fan
Problem detected with MOSS and basic board Fan
Problem detected with MOSS and basic board Fan
Go to “Power MAP 3920: Air Flow
Detector Fault” on page 2-19
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Exchange the FRU group 1
.
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
033 to 04F
050
Unused
INITIAL MOSS PROCESSOR RESET STATE NOT OK
Unused
051
INITIAL MOSS PROCESSOR STATE OK
(PROGRESSION CODE) Progression code.
If permanently displayed, exchange
the FRU group 2
052
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 0 INTERRUPT PRESENT IN
THE IOIRV.
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 1 INTERRUPT PRESENT IN
THE IOIRV.
053
Exchange the FRU group 3
054
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 2 INTERRUPT PRESENT IN
THE IOIRV.
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 3 INTERRUPT PRESENT IN
THE IOIRV.
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 4 INTERRUPT PRESENT IN
THE IOIRV.
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 5 INTERRUPT PRESENT IN
THE IOIRV.
055
Exchange the FRU group 4
Exchange the FRU group 3
Exchange the FRU group 3
Exchange the FRU group 7
056
057
058
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 6 OR 7 INTERRUPT PRESENT
IN THE IOIRV.
MOSS PROCESSOR CONDITIONS CODES NOT OK
Go to “MAP 3210: MOSS Control
Panel Code 059” on page 2-4
Exchange the FRU group 2
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
059
05A
05B
05C
05D
Unused
MOSS PROCESSOR CACHE NOT OK
MOSS PROCESSOR INSTRUCTION TEST PART 1
NOT OK
Exchange the FRU group 2
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
05E
Unused
05F
060
ROS CHECKSUM NOT OK
ROS BAD PARITY LOCATION NOT DETECTED
Exchange the FRU group 2
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Exchange the FRU group 2
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
061
062
063
070
071
Unused
EIRV DOES NOT REPORT FORCED ERRORS
Unused
PIO BUS TEST DID NOT RUN COMPLETELY
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC I/Os.
Exchange the FRU group 1
.
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON DFA I/Os.
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC AND DFA I/Os.
072
073
Exchange the FRU group 7
Exchange the FRU group 6
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MCCU OR MCAD
I/Os ON MCC
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC I/Os AND ON
MCCU OR MCAD I/Os ON MCC.
074
075
Exchange the FRU group 3
Exchange the FRU group 1
.
1-16 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 3 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON DFA I/Os AND ON
MCCU OR MCAD I/Os ON MCC.
076
Exchange the FRU group 8
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC I/Os AND ON
DFA I/Os AND ON MCCU OR MCAD I/Os ON MCC.
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON PCA'S I/Os ON MCC
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC AND PCA'S I/Os
ON MCC
077
078
079
Exchange the FRU group 6
Exchange the FRU group 3
Exchange the FRU group 1
.
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON DFA AND PCA'S I/Os
ON MCC
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC I/Os , DFA I/Os
AND PCA'S I/Os ON MCC.
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MCC I/Os
(MCCU,MCAD AND PCA'S).
07A
07B
07C
Exchange the FRU group 8
Exchange the FRU group 6
Exchange the FRU group 3
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC AND MCC I/Os.
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON DFA AND MCC I/Os.
Exchange the FRU group 1
.
07D
07E
Exchange the FRU group 8
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST ERRORS WERE DETECTED ON ALL
ADAPTERS
Exchange the FRU group 1
.
07F
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
080 to 096
Unused
PIO TEST PART 1 SUCCESSFUL PROBLEM IN PIO
BUS TEST PART 2
PIO TEST PART 2 NOT SUCCESSFUL
097
098ñ
099
Exchange the FRU group 9
Exchange the FRU group 5
If permanently displayed, exchange
the FRU group 2
PIO TEST PART 2 SUCCESSFUL Progression code.
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Exchange the FRU group 12
09A to 09C
09D
Unused
PROBLEM WITH PCC
INFORMATION DEFINING THE ORIGIN OF THE
ACTIVATION OF THE MOSS DIAGNOSTICS IS NOT
VALID. (RUN THE PANEL TEST TO CHECK THE
CONTROL PANEL).
09E
Exchange the FRU group 10
CONTROL LOST IN THE MAINLINE CONTROLLER
AFTER CHECKING THE REQUEST
MOSS STORAGE TEST ENTRY CODE Progression
code.
09F
0A0
Exchange the FRU group 2
If permanently displayed, exchange
the FRU group 2
0A1ñ
0A2ñ
0A3ñ
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 1
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 2
DISABLE THE VALID OPTION KO IN TEST 1
Exchange the FRU group 2
Exchange the FRU group 11
Exchange the FRU group 12
RECONFIGURE BIT IS ALWAYS 'ON' IN TOD
ADAPTER
ADDRESS NOT INCREMENTED IN TEST 2
DIFFERENT LOADED AND STORED CONTENTS IN
TEST 2
INVALID ADDRESS IN THE ROS IN TEST 2
0A4ñ
0A5ñ
0A6ñ
0A7ñ
0A8ñ
Exchange the FRU group 13
Exchange the FRU group 13
Exchange the FRU group 11
Exchange the FRU group 13
Exchange the FRU group 13
INVALID ADDRESS AFTER 512K OR 1MEG IN TEST
2
NO MEMORY LOCATION WITHOUT ERROR IS
FOUND IN TEST 2
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 4
0A9ñ
Exchange the FRU group 11
Exchange the FRU group 13
0AAñ
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
0AB to 0AC
Unused
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 4 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
0ADñ
0AEñ
NO SINGLE ERROR CORRECTION IN TEST 3
BAD SINGLE ERROR CORRECTION IN TEST 3
Exchange the FRU group 13
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
0AF
Unused
0B0ñ
0B1ñ
NO DOUBLE ERROR DETECTION IN TEST 3
DIFFERENT LOADED AND STORED CONTENTS IN
TEST 4
Exchange the FRU group 13
Exchange the FRU group 11
RECONFIGURE BIT IN TOD ADAPTER CAN NOT BE
SET IN TEST 5
0B2ñ
0B3
Exchange the FRU group 13
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Unused
DIFFERENT LOADED AND STORED CONTENTS IN
TEST 7
0B4ñ
Exchange the FRU group 11
0B5ñ
0B6ñ
0B7ñ
DOUBLE UNCORRECTABLE ERROR IN TEST 6
ENABLE VALID OPTION KO IN TEST 9
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 9
Exchange the FRU group 13
Exchange the FRU group 12
Exchange the FRU group 13
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
0B8 to 0BE
Unused
If permanently displayed, exchange
the FRU group 2
0BF
MOSS MEMORY TEST EXIT CODE Progression code.
PROBLEM IN ROS MAINLINE CONTROLLER INITIAL-
IZATION
0C0
Exchange the FRU group 14
CONTROL LOST AFTER INITIALIZING THE ROS
MAINLINE CONTROLLER
CONTROL LOST DURING PSV SWAP TEST
STORAGE CHECK (WHEN ACCESSING THE REG-
ISTER SPACE)
0C1
0C2
0C3ñ
Exchange the FRU group 2
Exchange the FRU group 13
Exchange the FRU group 11
SCHEDULED PROGRESSION NOT PERFORMED
DURING THE PSV SWAP TEST
CACHE IN/CACHE OUT OPERATION NOT SUC-
CESSFUL
0C4ñ
Exchange FRU group 13
0C5ñ
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
0C6
Unused
If permanently displayed, exchange
the FRU group 2
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
If permanently displayed, exchange
the FRU group 2
0C7
PSV SWAP TEST SUCCESSFUL Progression code.
Unused
0C8 to 0CF
0D0ñ
DISK ADAPTER TEST ENTRY CODE Progression
code.
0D1ñ
0D2ñ
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 1
IOIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 1
ADAPTER NOT IN BUSY STATE OR NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BITS 0,1 ARE NOT B'10' IN TEST 1
Exchange the FRU group 54
Exchange the FRU group 15
0D3ñ
0D4
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Unused
ADAPTER NOT IN IDLE STATE IN TEST 1 BSTAT
BITS 0,1 ARE NOT B'00'
DIFFERENT LOADED AND READ CONTENTS IN
TEST 2
REGISTER NOT RESET AFTER A RESET COMMAND
IN TEST 2
0D5ñ
0D6ñ
0D7ñ
Exchange the FRU group 15
0D8ñ
0D9ñ
0DAñ
INVALID PIO COMMAND
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 2
IOIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 2
Exchange the FRU group 15
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 1 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00'
0DBñ
0DCñ
0DDñ
0DEñ
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 3
IOIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 2
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 3
Exchange the FRU group 15
1-18 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 5 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 2 NO INTER-
RUPT REQUESTED
CHIO TRANSFER KO
0DFñ
0E0ñ
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 4 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE RUN DIAGNOSTIC
COMMAND TEST
Exchange the FRU group 15
0E1ñ
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO RUN DIAGNOSTIC
COMMAND TEST
DIFFERENT CONTENTS IN THE FIRST AND THE
SECOND PART OF THE SECTOR BUFFER RUN
DIAGNOSTIC COMMAND TEST
0E2ñ
0E3ñ
Exchange the FRU group 15
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 RUN DIAGNOSTIC
COMMAND TEST
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 RUN DIAGNOSTIC
COMMAND TEST
0E4ñ
0E5ñ
Exchange the FRU group 21
Exchange the FRU group 15
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 5 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE DRIVES INITIALIZATION
0E6ñ
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 5 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED DRIVES INITIALIZATION
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 5 DRIVES
INITIALIZATION
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO DRIVES INITIALIZATION
0E7ñ
0E8ñ
0E9ñ
Exchange the FRU group 16
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 6 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE SEEK COMMAND
BEFORE RECALIBRATE TEST
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 6 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED SEEK COMMAND BEFORE
RECALIBRATE TEST
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 6 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE RECALIBRATE COMMAND
TEST
0EAñ
0EBñ
0EDñ
Exchange the FRU group 16
Exchange the FRU group 16
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 6 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED RECALIBRATE COMMAND TEST
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 6 RECALI-
BRATE COMMAND TEST
0EEñ
0EFñ
0F0
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Unused
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO DRIVES INITIALIZATION
RECALIBRATE COMMAND TEST
NO CYLINDER ZERO IN SSB BYTE0 BIT 7 RECALI-
BRATE COMMAND TEST
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 RECALIBRATE COMMAND
TEST
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 RECALIBRATE
COMMAND TEST
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 7 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE READ ID COMMAND TEST
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 7 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED READ ID COMMAND TEST
0F1ñ
Exchange the FRU group 16
Exchange the FRU group 16
0F2ñ
0F3ñ
0F4ñ
0F5ñ
0F6ñ
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 6 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 7 READ ID
COMMAND TEST
0F7ñ
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO READ ID COMMAND
TEST
0F8ñ
Exchange the FRU group 16
ERROR ON HEAD ADDRESSING MECHANISM READ
ID COMMAND TEST
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 READ ID COMMAND TEST
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 READ ID COMMAND
TEST
0F9ñ
0FAñ
0FBñ
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 8 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE RECALIBRATE COMMAND
BEFORE SEEK TEST
0FCñ
Exchange the FRU group 16
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 8 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED RECALIBRATE COMMAND
BEFORE SEEK TEST
0FDñ
0FE
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Unused
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 8 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE SEEK COMMAND TEST
0FFñ
Exchange the FRU group 16
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
100
Unused
HARD DISK INITIAL STATE IS NOT OK. A
RECOVERY PROCEDURE IS RUNNING.
HARD DISK INITIAL STATE NOT OK (EVEN AFTER
A RECOVERY PROCEDURE).
101
Exchange the FRU group 16
102
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
103 to 110
111ñ
112ñ
113ñ
Unused
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 8 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED SEEK COMMAND TEST
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 8 SEEK
COMMAND TEST
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO SEEK COMMAND TEST
Exchange the FRU group 16
DIFFERENT HEAD NUMBERS SEEK COMMAND
TEST
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 SEEK COMMAND TEST
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 SEEK COMMAND
TEST
114ñ
115ñ
116ñ
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 9 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE READ/WRITE A SECTOR
COMMAND
Exchange the FRU group 16
117ñ
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 9 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED READ/WRITE A SECTOR
COMMAND
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 9
READ/WRITE A SECTOR COMMAND
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO READ/WRITE A SECTOR
COMMAND
118ñ
119ñ
11Añ
Exchange the FRU group 16
DIFFERENT WRITTEN AND READ SECTORS
READ/WRITE A SECTOR COMMAND
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 READ/WRITE A SECTOR
COMMAND
11Bñ
11Cñ
1-20 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 7 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 READ/WRITE A
SECTOR COMMAND
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 10 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE READ/WRITE A FULL
TRACK COMMAND
11Dñ
11Eñ
Exchange the FRU group 16
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 10 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED READ/WRITE A FULL TRACK
COMMAND
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 10
READ/WRITE A FULL TRACK COMMAND
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO READ/WRITE A FULL
TRACK COMMAND
11Fñ
120ñ
121ñ
DIFFERENT WRITTEN AND READ TRACKS
READ/WRITE A FULL TRACK COMMAND
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 READ/WRITE A FULL
TRACK COMMAND
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 READ/WRITE A FULL
TRACK COMMAND
122ñ
123ñ
124ñ
Exchange the FRU group 16
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 11 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE READ/WRITE NO DATA
COMMAND
125ñ
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 11 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED READ/WRITE NO DATA
COMMAND
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 11
READ/WRITE NO DATA COMMAND
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO READ/WRITE NO DATA
COMMAND
126ñ
127ñ
128ñ
Exchange the FRU group 16
DIFFERENT WRITTEN AND READ SECTORS
READ/WRITE NO DATA COMMAND
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 READ/WRITE NO DATA
COMMAND
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 READ/WRITE NO
DATA COMMAND
129ñ
12Añ
12Bñ
Exchange the FRU group 16
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 12 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE READ CHECK/WRITE
VERIFY COMMAND
12Cñ
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 12 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED READ CHECK/WRITE VERIFY
COMMAND
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 12 READ
CHECK/WRITE VERIFY COMMAND
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO READ CHECK/WRITE
VERIFY COMMAND
12Dñ
12Eñ
12Fñ
Exchange the FRU group 16
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 READ CHECK/WRITE
VERIFY COMMAND
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 READ CHECK/WRITE
VERIFY COMMAND
DIFFERENT WRITTEN AND READ SECTORS READ
CHECK/WRITE VERIFY COMMAND
130ñ
131ñ
132ñ
Exchange the FRU group 16
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 13 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE ECC CORRECTION TEST
133ñ
134ñ
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 13 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED ECC CORRECTION TEST
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 8 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Panel
Definition
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Code
135ñ
136ñ
137ñ
138ñ
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 13 ECC COR-
RECTION TEST
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO ECC CORRECTION TEST
ERROR ON A SELECTED SECTOR ECC COR-
RECTION TEST
NO ERROR IN SSB WHILE EXPECTED ECC COR-
RECTION TEST
Exchange the FRU group 16
139ñ
13Añ
13Cñ
NO CORRECTION ECC CORRECTION TEST
NO DETECTION ECC CORRECTION TEST
ERROR SSB BYTE 0 ECC CORRECTION TEST
Exchange the FRU group 16
ERROR SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 ECC CORRECTION
TEST
DIFFERENT WRITTEN AND READ CONTENTS IN
TEST 13
DISKETTE CHANGE INFORMATION IS NOT
PRESENT
13Dñ
13Eñ
13Fñ
Exchange the FRU group 16
Exchange the FRU group 18
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 5 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE DRIVES INITIALIZATION
DISKETTE
140ñ
Exchange the FRU group 17
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 5 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED DRIVES INITIALIZATION DISKETTE
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 5 DRIVES
INITIALIZATION DISKETTE
141ñ
142ñ
Exchange the FRU group 19
Exchange the FRU group 17
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO DRIVES INITIALIZATION
DISKETTE
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 6 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE SEEK COMMAND
BEFORE RECALIBRATE TEST DISKETTE
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 6 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED SEEK COMMAND BEFORE
RECALIBRATE TEST DISKETTE
143ñ
144ñ
Exchange the FRU group 19
Exchange the FRU group 17
Exchange the FRU group 19
145ñ
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
146
Unused
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 6 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE RECALIBRATE COMMAND
TEST DISKETTE
147ñ
Exchange the FRU group 17
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 6 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED RECALIBRATE COMMAND TEST
DISKETTE
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 6 RECALI-
BRATE COMMAND TEST DISKETTE
148ñ
149ñ
Exchange the FRU group 17
Exchange the FRU group 19
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO DRIVES INITIALIZATION
RECALIBRATE COMMAND TEST DISKETTE OR NO
DISKETTE (OR BAD DISKETTE) IN DRIVE
14Añ
NO CYLINDER ZERO IN SSB BYTE0 BIT 7 RECALI-
BRATE COMMAND TEST2DRIVE DISKETTE
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 RECALIBRATE COMMAND
TEST DISKETTE
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 RECALIBRATE
COMMAND TEST DISKETTE
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 7 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE READ ID COMMAND TEST
DISKETTE
14Bñ
14Cñ
14Dñ
Exchange the FRU group 21
Exchange the FRU group 17
14Eñ
1-22 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 9 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 7 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED READ ID COMMAND TEST
DISKETTE
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 7 READ ID
COMMAND TEST DISKETTE
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO READ ID COMMAND
TEST DISKETTE
14Fñ
150ñ
151ñ
Exchange the FRU group 19
Exchange the FRU group 17
Exchange the FRU group 19
ERROR ON HEAD ADDRESSING MECHANISM READ
ID COMMAND TEST DISKETTE
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 READ ID COMMAND TEST
DISKETTE
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 READ ID COMMAND
TEST DISKETTE
152ñ
153ñ
154ñ
Exchange the FRU group 21
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 8 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE RECALIBRATE COMMAND
BEFORE SEEK TEST DISKETTE
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 8 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED RECALIBRATE COMMAND
BEFORE SEEK TEST DISKETTE
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 8 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE SEEK COMMAND TEST
DISKETTE
155ñ
156ñ
158ñ
Exchange the FRU group 17
Exchange the FRU group 19
Exchange the FRU group 17
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 8 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED SEEK COMMAND TEST DISKETTE
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 8 SEEK
COMMAND TEST DISKETTE
159ñ
15Añ
Exchange the FRU group 19
Exchange the FRU group 17
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO SEEK COMMAND TEST
DISKETTE
15Bñ
Exchange the FRU group 19
DIFFERENT HEAD NUMBERS SEEK COMMAND
TEST
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 SEEK COMMAND TEST
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 SEEK COMMAND
TEST DISKETTE
15Cñ
15Dñ
15Eñ
Exchange the FRU group 21
If permanently displayed, exchange
the FRU group 2
15F
170
END OF DISK ADAPTER TEST Progression code.
ROS CODE GETS CONTROL FOR A RE-IML BUT
THE RE-IML RESET SEQUENCE IS NOT PER-
FORMED
RE-IML SEQUENCE COMPLETELY PERFORMED
BUT ERROR IN MOSS PROCESSOR RESET STATE
TEST
Exchange the FRU group 2
171
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
172 to 177
178
Unused
CONTROL LOST DURING THE PROCESSING OF
THE 'MOSS DIAGS BY-PASS' REQUEST. A PCC
ERROR IS ALSO SUSPECTED.
Exchange the FRU group 22
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
179
Unused
INFORMATION DEFINING THE ORIGIN OF THE ACTI
VATION OF THE MOSS DIAGNOSTICS IS NOT
VALID. (RUN THE PANEL TEST TO CHECK THE
CONTROL PA NEL).
17A
Exchange the FRU group 10
CONTROL LOST DURING THE PROCESSING OF
THE 'MOSS DIAGS BY-PASS' REQUEST
17B
17C
17D
Exchange the FRU group 23
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Unused
STORAGE ACCESS PROBLEM. DUMP REQUEST
CAN NOT BE PROCESSED
Exchange the FRU group 11
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 10 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Panel
Definition
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Code
17E
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Unused
COMPLETION OF ROS PART OF MOSS DIAGNOS-
TICS Progression code.
If permanently displayed, exchange
the FRU group 24
17F
ENTRY INTO RAM PART OF MOSS DIAGNOSTICS
Progression code.
If permanently displayed, exchange
the FRU group 25
180
CURRENT PROGRAM LEVEL NOT AS EXPECTED
(SHOULD HAVE BEEN 6)
RAM DIAG CONTROLLER HAS FULL CONTROL
Progression code.
181ñ
182
Exchange the FRU group 25
If permanently displayed, exchange
the FRU group 25
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
183 to 187
188
Unused
CONTROL LOST DURING INSTRUCTION TEST PART
2
MOSS PROCESSOR INSTRUCTION TEST PART 2
NOT OK
MOSS PROCESSOR INSTRUCTION TEST PART 2
SUCCESSFULLY RUN Progression code.
Exchange the FRU group 25
189ñ
18A
If permanently displayed, exchange
the FRU group 25
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Exchange the FRU group 6
If permanently displayed, exchange
the FRU group 2
18B
18C
18D
Unused
CONTROL LOST DURING TOD ADAPTER TEST
END OF TOD TEST (SUCCESSFUL OR NOT)
Progression code.
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
If permanently displayed, exchange
the FRU group 9
18E to 18F
190
Unused
START OF MCC TEST Progression code.
HARDWIRED CONDITIONS IMPOSSIBLE TO GET IN
PCA 1
ERROR IN PCA 1 TEST ASYNCHRONOUS
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 0 INTERRUPT DURING PCA1
TEST
191ñ
192ñ
193ñ
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 26
Exchange the FRU group 5
ERROR IN PCA 1 INTERNAL WRAP ASYNCHRO-
NOUS TEST.
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 0 INTERRUPT DURING PCA1
TEST
HARDWIRED CONDITIONS IMPOSSIBLE TO GET IN
PCA 2
194ñ
195ñ
196ñ
Exchange the FRU group 26
Exchange the FRU group 6
Exchange the FRU group 5
197ñ
198ñ
ERROR IN PCA 2 TEST ASYNCHRONOUS
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 0 INT. DURING PCA2 TEST
Exchange the FRU group 26
Exchange the FRU group 5
ERROR IN PCA 2 INTERNAL WRAP ASYNCHRO-
NOUS TEST.
UNEXPECTED INT. (<> LEVEL 0) IN PCA2 TEST
HARDWIRED CONDITIONS IMPOSSIBLE TO GET IN
PCA 3
199ñ
19Añ
19Bñ
Exchange the FRU group 26
Exchange the FRU group 6
Exchange the FRU group 5
19Cñ
19Dñ
ERROR IN PCA 3 TEST SYNCHRONOUS
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 0 INT. DURING PCA3 TEST
Exchange the FRU group 26
Exchange the FRU group 5
ERROR IN PCA 3 INTERNAL WRAP SYNCHRONOUS
TEST.
UNEXPECTED INT. (<> LEVEL 0) IN PCA3 TEST
19Eñ
19Fñ
Exchange the FRU group 26
Exchange the FRU group 5
WRAP BLOCK DOES NOT SEEM TO BE PRESENT
ON LOCAL PORT , OR SIGNALS TESTED ARE NOT
OK.
1A0
Exchange the FRU group 27
LOCAL CONSOLE CABLE DOWN (WHEN WRAP
BLOCK INSTALLED)
LOCAL CONSOLE PCA ERROR
1A1
1A2
Exchange the FRU group 28
Exchange the FRU group 26
WRAP BLOCK DOES NOT SEEM TO BE PRESENT
ON REMOTE PORT , OR SIGNALS TESTED ARE
NOT OK.
1A3
Exchange the FRU group 27
1-24 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 11 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
REMOTE/ALTERNATE CONSOLE CABLE DOWN
(WHEN WRAP BLOCK INSTALLED)
REMOTE/ALTERNATE CONSOLE PCA ERROR
1A4
1A5
Exchange the FRU group 29
Exchange the FRU group 26
WRAP BLOCK DOES NOT SEEM TO BE PRESENT
ON RSF PORT , OR SIGNALS TESTED ARE NOT
OK.
1A6
Exchange the FRU group 27
RSF CONSOLE CABLE DOWN (WHEN WRAP BLOCK
INSTALLED)
RSF CONSOLE PCA ERROR
1A7
1A8
Exchange the FRU group 30
Exchange the FRU group 26
1A9 TO
1AF
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Unused
If permanently displayed, exchange
the FRU group 2
1B0
COMPLETION OF MCC TEST Progression code.
1B1
1B2
1B3
1B4
1B5
1B6
START OF LOCAL CONSOLE LINK TEST
SUCCESSFUL LOCAL CONSOLE LINK TEST
START OF REMOTE/ALT CONSOLE LINK TEST
SUCCESSFUL REMOTE /ALT CONSOLE LINK TEST
START OF RSF CONSOLE LINK TEST
INFORMATION ONLY
INFORMATION ONLY
SUCCESSFUL RSF CONSOLE LINK TEST
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
If permanently displayed, exchange
the FRU group 2
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
1B7 to 1B9
1D0
Unused
START OF MCAC TEST.Progression code.
Unused
1D1
1D2ñ
1D3ñ
1D4ñ
1D5ñ
SOLID ERROR IN MCAD REGISTERS (1 FRU )
100 MS TIMER OF MCAD KO
PERMANENT IR 1 IN IOIRV
PERMANENT IR 4 IN IOIRV
IR LEVEL 1 OF MCAD NOT REPORTED TO MOSS
PROCESSOR.
Exchange the FRU group 26
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 26
1D6ñ
1D7ñ
1D8ñ
'MOSS INOP BIT' NOT ON AFTER RESET BY THE
RESET LINE IN MCCU
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Unused
1D9ñ
1DAñ
1DBñ
PERMANENT IR 0 IN IOIRV
SOLID ERROR IN MCCU REGISTERS
SOLID ERROR IN MCCU REGISTERS
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 26
1DC to
1DF
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Unused
Go to “MAP 0100: IOC Bus Trouble
Shooting” on page 2-1
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
1E0ñ
1E1ñ
IOC TAG RESET FUNCTION KO
Unused
1E2ñ
1E3ñ
WATCHDOG INTERRUPT BIT ON IN MCCU
MOSS INOP BIT NOT SETTABLE IN MCCU
Exchange the FRU group 26
Exchange the FRU group 5
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Exchange the FRU group 26
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
1E4 to 1E6
1E7ñ
Unused
NO INTERRUPT REPORTING POSSIBLE IN MCCU
Unused
1E8 to 1EE
If permanently displayed, exchange
the FRU group 2
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
1EF
END OF MCAC TEST Progression code.
Unused
1F0 to 1FD
1FEñ
1FF
Control lost during return to RAM IML processor
Completion of MOSS diagnostics RAM part
Exchange the FRU group 25
Exchange the FRU group 2
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 12 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
200 to 9FF
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A or SWAD
Adapter is 'down'; Excess spurious errors
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA1; Adapter is 'down'
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA1; PIO Bus Check;
Inbound parity
A00ñ
A01ñ
A02ñ
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 5
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA1; PIO Bus Check;
Adapter not detected
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA1; PIO Timeout; Out-
bound; Address parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA1; PIO Timeout; Out-
bound; Command/data parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA2; Adapter is 'down'
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA2; PIO Bus Check;
Inbound parity
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA2; PIO Bus Check;
Adapter not detected
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA2; PIO Timeout; Out-
bound; Address parity check
A03ñ
A04ñ
A05ñ
A06ñ
A07ñ
A08ñ
A09ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA2; PIO Timeout; Out-
bound; Command/data parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA3; Adapter is 'down'
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA3; PIO Bus Check;
Inbound parity
A0Añ
A0Bñ
A0Cñ
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA3; PIO Bus Check;
Adapter not detected
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA3; PIO Timeout; Out-
bound; Address parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA3; PIO Timeout; Out-
bound; Command/data parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Adapter is
'down'
A0Dñ
A0Eñ
A0Fñ
A10ñ
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 5
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Adapter is
'down'; Excess
spurious errors
A11ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Adapter check;
1 usec counter parity
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Adapter check;
MIOC/CCU timeout parity
A12ñ
A13ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO Bus
check
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO Timeout
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Storage
ECC error;
Register space parity during main store.
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Storage
ECC error;
Multiple bits in DIV Register
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Storage
ECC error; No bits active in DIV Register
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Excep-
tion; Address
exception on main store data access
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Excep-
tion; Operation exception; CHCV Register invalid
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Excep-
tion; Register
precision; CHP Register bits 0-7 are not zero
Exchange the FRU group 20
Exchange the FRU group 42
A14ñ
A15ñ
A16ñ
A17ñ
A18ñ
A19ñ
A1Añ
A1Bñ
Exchange the FRU group 5. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
1-26 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 13 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Excep-
tion; Specification exception with invalid address on
main store data access
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Excep-
tion; Multiple bits in DIV Register
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Excep-
tion; No bits active in DIV Register
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Internal
check; Cache parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Internal
check; Invalid address on CHP Register access
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Internal
check; Multiple bits in DIV Register
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter
check; Step counter parity
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter
check; Half word/burst counter parity
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter
check; CCU busy; Time out
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter
check; MIOC time out
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter
check; MIOC parity check - in
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter
check; MIOC parity check - out
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter
check; Adapter failure
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter
check; Multiple bits detected in Stat reg
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter
check; No CHIO in progress in Adapter Control Block
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Multiple
bits detected in EIRV reg
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; No CHIO
in progress in Adapter Control Block
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter
check; Step counter parity
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter
check; MIOC timeout
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter
check; MIOC parity check - in
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter
check; MIOC parity check - out
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter
check; Adapter failure
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter
check; Multiple bits detected in Stat reg
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter
check; No Common Adapter Code running
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Bus check;
Inbound parity
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Bus check;
Adapter failure
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Bus check;
Adapter not detected
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Timeout;
Invalid command
Exchange the FRU group 5. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
A1Cñ
A1Dñ
A1Eñ
A1Fñ
A20ñ
A21ñ
A22ñ
A23ñ
A24ñ
A25ñ
A26ñ
A27ñ
A28ñ
A29ñ
A2Añ
A2Bñ
A2Cñ
A2Dñ
A2Eñ
A2Fñ
A30ñ
A31ñ
A32ñ
A33ñ
A34ñ
A35ñ
A36ñ
A37ñ
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 20
Exchange the FRU group 9
Exchange the FRU group 9
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 20
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 20
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 14 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Panel
Definition
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Code
A38ñ
A39ñ
A3Añ
A3Bñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Timeout;
Outbound address parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Timeout;
Adapter not detected
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Timeout;
Adapter failure
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Timeout;
Multiple bits detected in Stat reg
Exchange the FRU group 20
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
A3C to A67
A68ñ
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Adapter is 'down'
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Adapter is 'down';
Excess spurious errors
A69ñ
Exchange the FRU group 5
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Adapter check;
Internal clock check 1
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Adapter check;
Internal clock check 2
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Adapter check;
Multiple bits detected in Disconnect reg
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter
check; State counter parity
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter
check; Shift pulse counter parity
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter
check; Ground fault detected on a driver line
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter
check; Interface check
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter
check; Interface timeout
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter
check; Interface parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter
check; Multiple bits detected in EB Stat reg
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter
check; Switch interface error
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter
check; Switch driver fault
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter
check; Switch serial link parity
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter
check; Switch invalid command
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter
check; Multiple bits detected in Device stat reg
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter
check; Adapter failure
A6Añ
A6Bñ
A6Cñ
A6Dñ
A6Eñ
A6Fñ
A70ñ
A71ñ
A72ñ
A73ñ
A74ñ
A75ñ
A76ñ
A77ñ
A78ñ
A79ñ
A7Añ
A7Bñ
A7Cñ
A7Dñ
A7Eñ
A7Fñ
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 5
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter
check; No Common Adapter Code running
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Bus check;
Inbound parity
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Bus check;
Adapter failure
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Bus check;
Adapter not detected
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Timeout;
Invalid command
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Timeout;
Outbound address parity check
1-28 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 15 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Timeout;
Overrun
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Timeout;
Adapter not detected
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Timeout;
Adapter failure
A80ñ
A81ñ
A82ñ
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 5
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; time out;
Multiple bits detected in Stat register
Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; Adapter is 'down'
Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; Bus check;
Inbound parity
Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; Bus check;
Adapter failure
Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; Bus check;
Adapter not detected
Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; time out;
Invalid command
Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; time out; Out-
bound parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; time out;
Adapter not detected
A83ñ
A84ñ
A85ñ
A86ñ
A87ñ
A88ñ
A89ñ
A8Añ
A8Bñ
A8Cñ
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 5
Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; time out;
Adapter failure
Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; time out; Mul-
tiple bits detected in Stat reg
A8Dñ
A8Eñ
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; Adapter is 'down'
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO Bus check
If loading from diskette (function 9
from the control panel) then exchange
the FRU group 45; if loading from
HDD then exchange the FRU group
46
A8Fñ
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO time out
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Storage ECC
error; Register space parity during main store.
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Storage ECC
error; Multiple bits in DIV Register
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Storage ECC
error; No bits active in DIV Register
A90ñ
A91ñ
A92ñ
Exchange the FRU group 43
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Exception;
Operation
Exchange the FRU group 15. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
A93ñ
A94ñ
A95ñ
exception; CHCV Reg invalid
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Exception;
Register
precision; CHP Reg bits 0-7 are not zero
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Exception;
Specification exception with invalid address on main
store data access
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Exception;
Address exception on main store data access
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Exception;
Multiple bits in DIV Register
Exchange the FRU group 15. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
A96ñ
A97ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Exception; No
bits active in DIV Register
A98ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Internal
check; Cache parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Internal
check; Invalid address on CHP Reg access
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Internal
check; Multiple bits in DIV Register
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Multiple bits
detected in EIRV reg
A99ñ
A9Añ
A9Bñ
A9Cñ
If loading from diskette (function 9
from the control panel) then exchange
the FRU group 45; if loading from
HDD then exchange the FRU group
46
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 16 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Panel
Definition
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Code
A9Dñ
A9Eñ
A9Fñ
AA0ñ
AA1ñ
AA2ñ
AA3ñ
AA4ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; No CHIO in
progress in Adapter Control Block
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; Bus check;
Inbound parity
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; Bus check;
Adapter failure
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; Bus check;
Adapter not detected
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; time out; Invalid
command
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; time out; Out-
bound address parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; time out; Out-
bound command/data parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; time out;
Adapter failure
If loading from diskette (function 9
from the control panel) then exchange
the FRU group 45; if loading from
HDD then exchange the FRU group
46
If loading from diskette (function 9
from the control panel) then exchange
the FRU group 45; if loading from
HDD then exchange the FRU group
46
If loading from diskette (function 9
from the control panel) then exchange
the FRU group 45; if loading from
HDD then exchange the FRU group
46
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; time out; Mul-
tiple bits detected in Stat reg
AA5ñ
AA6ñ
AA7ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; TOD; Adapter is 'down'
Moss level 0 error detection; TOD; PIO; Bus check;
Inbound parity
Exchange the FRU group 2
Moss level 0 error detection; TOD; PIO; Bus check;
Adapter not detected
Moss level 0 error detection; TOD; PIO; time out; Out-
bound address parity check
AA8ñ
AA9ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; TOD; PIO; time out; Out-
bound command/data parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; PLC; Adapter is 'down'
AAAñ
AABñ
Exchange the FRU group 2
Exchange the FRU group 12
AAC to
AAD
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Unused
exchange the FRU group 12. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; PLC; MMIO Interface error
OR Invalid address during main store data access ( ON
level 2)
AAEñ
AAFñ
Moss level 0 error detection; PLC; MMIO Parity error
OR Memory storage; Storage ECC; Data parity ( ON
level 2)
Exchange the FRU group 12
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
AB0
Unused
AB1ñ
AB2ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; UC Bus; Bus is 'down'
Moss level 0 error detection; Register Storage; PIO
Storage ECC; Data parity whilst accessing MPC
Moss level 0 error detection; Register Storage; PIO
Storage ECC; Data parity whilst accessing MSC
Moss level 0 error detection; Register Storage; PIO
Storage ECC; Unresolved problem
Moss level 0 error detection; Register Storage; Storage
ECC; Check during PSV swap
Moss level 0 error detection; Memory Storage; CHIO
Storage ECC; Data parity
Moss level 0 error detection; Memory Storage; Storage
ECC; Data parity ( NOT ON level 2)
Exchange the FRU group 1
Exchange the FRU group 11. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
AB3ñ
AB4ñ
AB5ñ
AB6ñ
AB7ñ
Exchange the FRU group 11. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; Memory Storage; Storage
ECC; Instruction fetch parity
AB8ñ
1-30 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 17 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
Moss level 0 error detection; Loop; Excessive MOSS
IML loop is detected via a TOD interrupt
Moss level 0 error detection; Erroneous MOSS code;
Program error; IO address is not authorized Record the
following action for use if the problem is not corrected
by
AB9ñ
ABAñ
Exchange the FRU group 13 the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; Diag code; Program error;
Power on reset / start; Unresolved
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program
error; Invalid BER set during Checkpoint Retry
Recovery
ABBñ
ABCñ
ABDñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program
error; Invalid BER set during Postponed Retry Recovery
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program
error; Invalid BER set during Transparent Retry
Recovery your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program
error; Program request dispatcher - module
CHGH0PGM - is in an unexpected state
Exchange the FRU group 13. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
ABEñ
ABFñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program
error; Invalid adaptor ID present in module CHGH0BUS
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program
error; Ram processor is in an unexpected state
AC0ñ
AC1ñ
Exchange the FRU group 13. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program
error; Ros processor is in an unexpected state your
support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program
error; Call address stack table is full
AC2ñ
AC3ñ
AC4ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program
error; Return address stack table is empty
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program
error; The type of BER created does not exist in the
BER table
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program
error; Moss already IML'd routine before the IML routine
your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious inter-
rupt; CHIO error detected
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious inter-
rupt; Level 0 interrupt detected
AC5ñ
AC6ñ
Exchange the FRU group 13. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
AC7ñ
AC8ñ
Exchange the FRU group 5. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious inter-
rupt; Level 0 interrupt in IOIRV detected
AC9ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious inter-
rupt; PIO Bus check; No adaptor found with Last Pri-
ority Level
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious inter-
rupt; PIO Bus check; Instruction was not an IO type
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious inter-
rupt; PIO Bus check; Detected on level 2
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious inter-
rupt; PIO Bus check; Detected on level 6
ACAñ
Exchange the FRU group 9. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
ACBñ
ACCñ
ACDñ
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 18 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious inter-
rupt; PIO time out; No adaptor found with Last Priority
Level
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious inter-
rupt; PIO time out; Instruction was not an IO type
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious inter-
rupt; PIO time out; Detected on level 2
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious inter-
rupt; PIO time out; Detected on level 6
ACEñ
Exchange the FRU group 9. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
ACFñ
AD0ñ
AD1ñ
Exchange the FRU group 9. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious inter-
rupt; Program request detected in PIRV
AD2ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception
error; Addressing exception during Instruction fetch
Exchange the FRU group 11. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
AD3ñ
AD4ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception
error; Addressing exception during Main store data
access
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception
error; Fixed point overflow exception
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception
error; Invalid address exception during non main store
access
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception
error; Multiple bits detected in DIV
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception
error; Multiple bits detected in EIRV
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception
error; Operation exception; Invalid opcode detected
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception
error; Register precision exception
AD5ñ
AD6ñ
Exchange the FRU group 11. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
AD7ñ
AD8ñ
AD9ñ
ADAñ
Exchange the FRU group 11. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception
error;
ADBñ
ADCñ
Specification exception; Invalid address during Instruc-
tion fetch
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception
error;
Specification exception; Invalid address during Main
store data access
( NOT ON level 2)
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception
error;
ADDñ
ADEñ
Specification exception; Invalid address during non
GPR access
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception
Exchange the FRU group 11. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
error;
Specification exception; Invalid execution of KI instruc-
tion
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception
error;
ADFñ
AE0ñ
Specification exception; PSV bits (40-44-47) are not
zero
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Internal
Check; Cache
register parity check
1-32 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 19 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Internal
Check; Invalid address during GPR access
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Internal
Check; Invalid address during PSV swap
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Internal
Check; Multiple bits detected in DIV
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Internal
Check; Multiple bits detected in EIRV
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Storage/ECC
Check; Multiple bits detected in DIV
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Storage/ECC
Check; Multiple bits detected in EIRV
AE1ñ
AE2ñ
AE3ñ
AE4ñ
AE5ñ
AE6ñ
Exchange the FRU group 11. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Exchange the FRU group 11. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Storage/ECC
Check; No bits detected in DIV
AE7ñ
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
AE8 to BFE
Unused
B01
B02
B03
MLA internal diagnostic error
Error during MPC-MLA interface test
MOSS LAN adapter (MLA) hardware initialization error
Exchange the FRU group 55.
Exchange the FRU group 56.
Exchange the FRU group 57.
Exchange the FRU group 55. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange. A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Contact your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
B8D to B8E
Hardware MMIO error
B8F
B90
Lan adapter check
MOSS LAN adapter (MLA) hardware initialization error
Exchange the FRU group 55.
Exchange the FRU group 55.
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Check LAN cable connections, if
problem persists: Exchange the FRU
group 55.
A LAN ring problem is suspected.
Use the Token-Ring Network,
Problem Determination Guide
SX27-3710.
B91
B92
B93
MOSS microcode error
Ring lobe media test failure
Ring signal lost while opening
Check the LAN cable connections, if
the problem persists: A LAN ring
problem is suspected. Use the
Token-Ring Network, Problem Deter-
mination Guide SX27-3710.
B94
Ring wire fault while opening
B95
B96
B97
B98
Ring open frequency error
Ring time out while opening
Ring failure while opening
Ring beaconing while opening
A LAN ring problem is suspected.
Use the Token-Ring Network,
Problem Determination Guide
SX27-3710.
Duplicate Node address. Exchange
the FRU group 55. Record the fol-
lowing action for use if the problem is
not corrected by the FRU exchange.
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
B99
Ring duplicate node address
B9A
B9B
B9C
B9D
Ring open request parameters
Ring open remove received
Ring open IMPL force received
Ring no monitor for RPL at open
A LAN ring problem is suspected.
Use the Token-Ring Network,
Problem Determination Guide
SX27-3710.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 20 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
Check the LAN cable connections, if
the problem persists: Exchange the
FRU group 55.
B9E
Ring lobe wire fault at open
Check that the service processor is
powered On, if yes: there was a LAN
time out or a LAN problem or a
service processor problem is sus-
pected. Go to Service Processor
Installation and Maintenance manual,
chapter "Service Processor Problem
Determination".
B9F
Remote station connection time out
Communication lost between MOSS
and MOSS-E.
Ÿ Check the physical connection
between the 3745 and the service
processor.
Ÿ Check that the service processor
is powered ON.
Ÿ Review the configuration of
stations connected to the LAN.
The MOSS-to-MOSS-E con-
nection will be automatically
recovered when the number of
broadcast frames goes under 200
per second.
BB0
Ring link lost
If the problem continues a Service
Processor problem is suspected, go
to Service Processor Installation and
Maintenance manual, chapter
"Service Processor Problem Determi-
nation" or a MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Contact your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
BB1
BB2
BB3
BB4
BB5
Ring DM/DISC received/acked
Ring FRMR received
Ring SABME received
Ring TI timer expired
Ring FRMR sent
A Service Processor problem is sus-
pected, go to Service Processor
Installation and Maintenance manual,
chapter "Service Processor Problem
Determination" or a MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Contact your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
BB6
Ring unexpected SABME received
A LAN ring problem is suspected.
Use the Token-Ring Network,
Problem Determination Guide
SX27-3710.
BC0
Permanent ring beaconing
Check the LAN cable connections, if
the problem persists: Exchange the
FRU group 55.
BC1
BC2
BC3
Ring lobe wire fault
Auto removal while beaconing
Ring remove received
Exchange the FRU group 55.
A LAN problem is suspected. Use
the Token-Ring Network, Problem
Determination Guide SX27-3710.
Check the LAN cable connections, if
the problem persists: Exchange the
FRU group 55.
A Service Processor problem is sus-
pected. Go to Service Processor
Installation and Maintenance manual,
chapter "Service Processor Problem
Determination".
BC4
BD0
Ring auto removal
FSM time out
BE0
Watchdog time out
1-34 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 21 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
Exchange the FRU group 2. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Moss level 0 Incoherence; Problem within the level 0
code
BFFñ
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
C00 to C03
C04ñ
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Super-
visor; Invalid SVTTRC
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Super-
visor; More than one request
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Super-
visor; Invalid SVTDRC
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
C05ñ
C06ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Super-
visor; Invalid TCB ID
C07ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Super-
visor; Invalid Adapter ID
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Super-
visor; Invalid Timer request
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
C08ñ
C09ñ
Refer to logged BERs leading to over-
flow, or: exchange the FRU group
46.
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Super-
visor; Lost BER counter is full
C0Añ
C0Bñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Super-
visor; BER length null
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Super-
visor; Invalid macro ID in CHGSUBEM
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Super-
visor; Invalid adaptor ID in CHGSUBEA
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Keyboard/Display Support; Invalid function request
C0Cñ
C0Dñ
C0Eñ
C0Fñ
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Keyboard/Display Support; End I/O without FRB
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Keyboard/Display Support; Program interrupt without
FRB
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Keyboard/Display Support; Invalid interrupt
C10ñ
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
C11ñ
C12ñ
C13
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid function request
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Unused
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid header label
C14ñ
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
C15 to C16
C17ñ
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid LM elements
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
C18
Unused
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid completion status with
preemptive request
C19ñ
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
C1A
Unused
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 22 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Control record found
C1Bñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid completion status with
exception detected
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Program problem detected by
CAC
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid completion status with
error detected
C1Cñ
C1Dñ
C1Eñ
C1Fñ
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid completion status with
complete but with neither exception nor error detected
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Unexpected completion status or
interrupt.
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Bad disk IOCS initialize
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Threshold exceeded on unex-
pected interrupt
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
C20ñ
C21ñ
C22ñ
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Support; No action for Scanner AC hit
C23ñ
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
C24
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Support; Undefined interrupt
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Support; Unexpected Mailbox IN rejected
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Support; Invalid ID from scanner selected
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Support; Invalid adaptor address
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Support; Undefined CHIO request
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Support; Switch adaptor CAC requests an ABEND
C25ñ
C26ñ
C27ñ
C28ñ
C29ñ
C2Añ
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
C2B to
C2D
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Unused
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Support; Invalid PCW command
C2Eñ
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
C2F to C30
C31ñ
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Operator
Control; Load module not found
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Operator
Control; Logical Disk error
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Operator
Control; Invalid cancel request
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
C32ñ
C33ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Operator
Control; Moss IML request by operator
C34ñ
1-36 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 23 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Operator
Control; Data stream out is greater than 1024 bytes
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Functions; End of DCF application
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Functions; Incorrect load module identified
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Functions; Logical disk error
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Functions; Unknown operator control return code
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient
Tasks; Load module not found
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient
Tasks; Logical disk error
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient
Tasks; Unknown operator control return code
C35ñ
C36ñ
C37ñ
C38ñ
C39ñ
C3Añ
C3Bñ
C3Cñ
C3Dñ
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient
Tasks; Conflicting dump file information
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient
Tasks; Scanner not installed or SCB not flagged "auto
dump"
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient
Tasks; Control program invalid answer
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient
Tasks; Disconnect not allowed
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient
Tasks; Buffer limit reached
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Box Error
Logging; Invalid BER stack
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Mail Box
Support; Load module not found
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Mail Box
Support; Mail box request rejected
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
C3Eñ
C3Fñ
C40ñ
C41ñ
C42ñ
C43ñ
C44ñ
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Mail Box
C45ñ
Support;
Unsolicited call
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Mail Box
Support; Invalid RU
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Macro
Invocation; Started bit in request
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; System
IPL; Start IPL refused
C46ñ
C47ñ
C48ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Disk
Functions; Disk
unusable
C49ñ
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Disk
Functions; Unable to load CHGDFINT
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Power
Functions; Incorrect access to PCST
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Power
Functions; Invalid data - threshold
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Power
Functions; Next request received before RP
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Level 1;
Permanent HLIR - kill MOSS
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Level 1;
Excess amount of spurious errors
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Level 1;
Soft checker - snapshot
C4Añ
C4Bñ
C4Cñ
C4Dñ
C4Eñ
C4Fñ
C50ñ
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 24 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Panel
Definition
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Code
C51ñ
C52ñ
C53ñ
C54ñ
C55ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; MSD;
Invalid frame number
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; IMIN2; No
timer IMIN2
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; TRSS;
NCP pointer not found
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; TRSS;
Invalid field format received
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; TRSS;
Invalid TIC storage
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; TRSS;
TRA/TIC not installed or ASB not flagged "Auto TIC
Dump"
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
C56ñ
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
C57 to C61
Unused
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
C62 to C7A
MOSS microcode error
Unused
C7B to D00
D01ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; Adapter busy - attn
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; FRB busy
Exchange the FRU group 44
D02ñ
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
D03 to D04
D05ñ
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; Adapter busy - CHIO
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; Adapter busy - reset
Exchange the FRU group 44
D06ñ
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
D07
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; SCA 1 not open
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; SCA 2 not open
D08
Exchange the FRU group 45
Exchange the FRU group 46
D09ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; Adapter not open
D0Añ
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump;
D0Bñ
D0Cñ
Pre-emptive request complete
Exchange the FRU group 44
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump;
Pre-emptive request rejected
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; SCA 1 already open
D0Dñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; SCA 2 already open
D0Eñ
Exchange the FRU group 44
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
D0F to D10
D11ñ
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; FRB Program check
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; BCL Program check
Exchange the FRU group 44
Exchange the FRU group 44
D12ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; Invalid PIO command (hardware & equip-
ment checks)
D13ñ
Exchange the FRU group 44
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
D14to D1F
Unused
1-38 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 25 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump;
D20ñ
Exchange the FRU group 44
Indeterminate equipment check (hardware error in
adapt.)
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
D21
Unused
If loading from diskette (function 9
from the control panel) then exchange
the FRU group 45; if loading from
HDD then exchange the FRU group
46
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; Device (SCA) ready (hardware error in
adaptor)
D22ñ
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
D23 to D27
D28ñ
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; Seek check (DATA transmission problems)
Exchange the FRU group 44
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
D29 to D2F
Unused
If loading from diskette (function 9
from the control panel) then ensure
the diskette is correctly inserted and
that the diskette drive operator handle
is closed. If no problem in this area,
then exchange the FRU group 45
If loading from HDD then exchange
the FRU group 46
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; Device (SCA) not ready (no error)
D30ñ
If loading from diskette (function 9
from the control panel) then exchange
the FRU group 45; if loading from
HDD then exchange the FRU group
46
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; Control record found (error/not successful
class. sequence errors)
D31ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; Sector Buffer Parity error
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump;
Termination error with no specific error
D32ñ
D33ñ
D34ñ
D35ñ
Exchange the FRU group 44
If loading from diskette (function 9
from the control panel) then exchange
the FRU group 45
if loading from HDD then exchange
the FRU group 46
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; Cylinder overrun
The installed diskette is 'Write pro-
tected'. Replace the diskette with an
equivalent which permits writing.
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; Write/Protect fault with FDD
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; Write fault with HDD
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; Halt during a CHIO operation
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; I/O bus parity error
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; CCB with no active CSB
D36ñ
D37ñ
D38ñ
D39ñ
D3Añ
Go to IBM 3745 Service Functions
Exchange the FRU group 7
Exchange the FRU group 44
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; Invalid command in CCB or SSB
If loading from diskette (function 9
from the control panel) then exchange
the FRU group 45; if loading from
HDD then exchange the FRU group
46
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; ERP invoked by DFA
D3Bñ
D3Cñ
D3Dñ
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; internal parity error
Exchange the FRU group 44
If loading from diskette (function 9
from the control panel) then exchange
the FRU group 21 If loading from
HDD then go to IBM 3745 Service
Functions
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; data error (SSB byte 1)
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 26 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
If loading from diskette (function 9
from the control panel) then exchange
the FRU group 45; if loading from
HDD then exchange the FRU group
46
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; record not found (L/operator intervention
required)
D3Eñ
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
D3F
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; CRC/ECC error on ID
D40ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; CRC/ECC error on data
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; bad track detected
D41ñ
Go to IBM 3745 Service Functions
D42ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; format error detected
D43ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; unable to find ID
Moss level 0 error detection; diskette errors during
IML/dump; format error detected
D44ñ
Go to IBM 3745 Service Functions
Exchange the FRU group 47
D45ñ
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
D46 to D4F
Unused
If loading from diskette (function 9
from the control panel) then ensure
the diskette is correctly inserted and
that the diskette drive operator handle
is closed. If no problem in this area,
then exchange the FRU group 45
If loading from HDD then exchange
the FRU group 46
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; disk change information
D50ñ
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
D51 to D75
D76ñ
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; PIO MCK (non-recursive)
Exchange the FRU group 7
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
D77 to DF5
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; PIO MCK (recursive) - (preemptive request
class.)
DF6ñ
Exchange the FRU group 7
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
DF7
Unused
If loading from diskette (function 9
from the control panel) then the
problem may be a possible incorrect
diskette in the drive. If OK then try
the backup diskette. If problem still
exists then exchange the FRU group
18
OR
Moss level 0 error detection; device errors during
IML/dump; dump directory entry not found
If loading is from the disk then restore
the disk. Refer to IBM 3745 Service
Functions If problem still exists then
exchange the FRU group 48. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Contact your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
DF8ñ
1-40 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 27 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during
IML/dump; hard disk not initialized
Restore the disk. Refer to IBM 3745
Service Functions If problem still
exists then exchange the FRU group
48 go to page 1-49. Record the fol-
lowing action for use if the problem is
not corrected by the FRU exchange;
A MOSS microcode problem is sus-
pected. Contact your support struc-
ture, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
DF9ñ
DFAñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during
IML/dump; hard disk not formatted
Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during
IML/dump; invalid IML request
Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during
IML/dump; volume IML check
If loading from diskette (function 9
from the control panel) then the
problem may be a possible incorrect
diskette in the drive. If OK then try
the backup diskette. If problem still
exists then exchange the FRU group
18
DFBñ
DFCñ
OR
If loading is from the disk then restore
the disk. Refer to IBM 3745 Service
Functions If problem still exists then
exchange the FRU group 48. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Contact your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during
IML/dump; data compare check
DFDñ
Exchange the FRU group 46. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Exchange the FRU group 45. Record
the following action for use if the
problem is not corrected by the FRU
exchange; A MOSS microcode
problem is suspected. Call your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during
IML/dump; disk time out
DFEñ
DFFñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during
IML/dump; diskette time out
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
E00 to EFF
F00
Unused
Normal progression code. If this code
is displayed for more than 2 minutes,
then a MOSS microcode problem is
suspected. Contact your support
structure, refer to “Contacting
Status/progression step; Start of MOSS dump
Support” on page A-1.
Status/progression step; MOSS dump has been com-
pleted without error
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML
sequence; IML Initialization
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML
sequence; open adaptor
F01
F02
F03
n/a
Normal progression code. If this code
is displayed for more than 2 minutes,
then a MOSS microcode problem is
suspected. Contact your support
structure, refer to “Contacting
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML
sequence; open secondary component address (either
disk or diskette)
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML
sequence; check disk or diskette ID
F04
Support” on page A-1.
F05
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
F06 to F07
Unused
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 28 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Panel
Definition
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Code
F08
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML
sequence; find directory entry
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML
sequence; IML end - go to MOSS loader
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML
sequence; Ram entry (Start of MOSS Init step 1)
Normal progression code. If this code
is displayed for more than 2 minutes,
then a MOSS microcode problem is
suspected. Contact your support
structure, refer to “Contacting
F09
F0A
Support” on page A-1.
Normal progression code. If this code
is displayed during the 1st installation,
a manual intervention is required to
exchange the wrap block.
Normal progression code. If this code
is displayed for more than two
minutes, then suspect any adapters
attached to the MOSS, or microcode
problem is suspected. Contact your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML
sequence; end of MOSS init step 1
F0B
F0C
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML
sequence; start of MOSS init step 2 (Moss level 7)
MOSS diagnostics detected an error
during the IML.
Ÿ Normally a reference code will
have been produced on the 3745
console. Refer to “Using Refer-
ence Codes” on page 1-14.
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML
sequence; IML complete with errors detected during
MOSS diagnostics.
F0D
Ÿ This code may be caused by a
console problem which prevents
the display of the reference code.
If this is the case, go to “3745
Console Symptoms” on
page 1-10.
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML
sequence; IML complete - MOSS ALONE
F0E
F0F
N/A
If this code appear without requested
IML (MOSS become alone during
normal operations) look at the
console for messages and go to
“3745 Console Symptoms” on
page 1-10
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML
sequence; IML Complete - CCU connected - MOSS
OFFLINE
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; Solid error
during MIOC
operation
F10
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14.
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU
hardcheck during a CCU IPL in progress
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; Host IPL
request during CCU IPL in progress
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; Unidentified
IPL selection
F11
F12
F13
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14.
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14.
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CDS not cor-
rectly built by the CDF
F14
F15
F16
Unused
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU memory
test failed
If this code is displayed during IML:
1. Run IOC bus diagnostics to
ensure that there is no adapter
problem.
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU test
failed
F17
2. Run CCU diagnostics.
1-42 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 29 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IOC BUS test
failed
F18
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL port table
has been incorrectly built via the CDF
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CLDP not
accessible
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CLDP/SALT
abend. (output 70)
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CLDP/MOSS
interface error
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; NCP/EP init
abend
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CLDP time
out on 'IN MAILBOX' acknowledgement
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; MOSS time
out on waiting NCP/EP init MB out
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; MOSS time
out on waiting NCP/EP init MB in acknowledgement
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14.
F19
F1A
F1B
F1C
F1D
F1E
F1F
F20
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14.
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14.
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; NCP/EP
INIT/MOSS interface error acknowledgement
F21
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
F22 to F23
F24
Unused
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; no scanner
IMLed after scanner IML routine (Phase 3)
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; no valid
scanner in CDS
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; LSSD resi-
dual count > 7
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14.
F25
F26
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; LSSD string
select error during a read or write LSSD
F27
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 1A
load module not accessible
F28
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 1B
load module not accessible
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 2
load module not accessible
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 3
load module not accessible
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 4
load module not accessible
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; too many
CCU RE-IPL (PGM abend or hardcheck)
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; wrong CCU
LSSD initialization
F29
There is a defect with the hard disk.
Contact your support structure, refer
to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
F2A
F2B
F2C
F2D
F2E
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; no IPL port is
available (neither link nor channel) and no load module
on the disk is available
F2F
F30
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CPIT error:
Ÿ CPIT length different from CHGCONCP
Ÿ Some CPIT fields not initialized
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14.
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 1C
load module not accessible
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU check
occurred during phase 1C
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; SALT not
accessible
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU memory
failure
F31
F32
F33
F34
F35
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; Dispcrepancy
between CLDP and 3746-900 CDF information
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 30 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
F36 to F47
Unused
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14.
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU and
CACHE checkout failed SCTL checkout failed
F48
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
F49
F4A
F4B
F4C
F4D
F4E
F4F
F50
F51
F52
F53
F54
F55
Unused
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; SCTL initial-
ization failed
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; switch
checkout failed
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; permanent
level 1 in CCU, no need to load CLDP
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; channel moni-
toring failure in normal monitor mode, during FB or SB
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; reset
adapters can not be performed during FB or SB
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; problem
detected by the CDF
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CP not set
ONLINE by the fallback or switchback
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; bus switching
operation unsuccessful
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; problem
detected with the MCAD interface
Error detected during the IPL sequence; fallback func-
tion not supported
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; no buffer
available for NCP during fallback
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; NCP / MOSS
fallback interface error
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14.
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14.
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; interface
problem between fallback-switchback and channel mon-
itoring
F56
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU power
has dropped during the IPL
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; error during
SBK protocol
Error detected during MOSS IML diagnostics; IPL can
not be performed on the selected CCU
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CA configura-
tion from CDF does not match the actual configuration
F57
F58
F59
F5A
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14.
Error detected during MOSS IML Diagnostics; IPL can
not be performed on CCU
F60
F61
F62
IPL cancelled after IPL abort
Error detected during MOSS IML Diagnostics; IPL can-
celled after a stop in phase 1 diagnostic
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
F63 to FD5
FD6
Unused
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL
sequence; the control program loading is started from
the Disk
Status/progression step; dump control program on
MOSS disk in progress
If this code is displayed for more than
2 minutes, when the load/dump is via
the disk, then refer to “How to Run
MOSS Diagnostics” on page 3-4 to
aid problem isolation and refer to IBM
3745 Service Functions, "Hard Disk
Trouble Analysis".
FD7
Status / Progression step; save control program on
MOSS disk in progress
FD8
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
FD9 to FE0
Unused
1-44 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 31 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
Errors detected during IML sequence; disk initialization
failure
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14. Be aware that the IBM
3745 Service Functions, Chapter 11
may be used later during the investi-
gation.
FE1
Errors detected during IML sequence; disk load opera-
tion failure
FE2
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14.
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Errors detected during IML sequence; power error A -
get end of IML data
FE3
FE4
Unused
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14. Record “How to Run the
Control Panel Test” on page 3-8
which may assist problem isolation.
FE5
Errors detected during IML sequence; panel error
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14.
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Errors detected during IML sequence; MIOC error with
CCU operation
FE6
FE7
Unused
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14. Be aware that the IBM
3745 Service Functions, Chapter 11
may be used later during the investi-
gation.
Errors detected during IML sequence; disk error when
reading CDF
FE8
FE9
FEA
Errors detected during IML sequence; CDF not created
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14. Be aware that the IBM
3745 Service Function Chapter 9 and
11 may be used later during the
investigation.
Errors detected during IML sequence; CDF access
function(s) error
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14. Record whether this code
can be resolved by use of the
Problem Determination Guide,
SA33-0096. Perform a MOSS IML but
if problem occurs again Contact
your support structure.
Errors detected during IML sequence; NCP time out on
mailbox to CCU A
FEB
FEC to
FED
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Unused
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14. Record whether this code
can be resolved by use of the
Problem Determination Guide,
SA33-0096. Perform a MOSS IML but
if problem occurs again Contact
your support structure.
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14. Be aware that the IBM
3745 Service Functions, Chapter 11
may be used later during the investi-
gation.
Errors detected during IML sequence; MOSS data
saving error
FEE
FEF
Errors detected during IML sequence; disk error when
reading Port swap file.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 32 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Panel
Definition
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Code
FF0
FF1
FF2
FF3
Status/progression step which occur during the IPL
sequence; IPL entered
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL
sequence; IPL phase 1 started
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL
sequence; IPL phase 2 started
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL
sequence; IPL phase 3 entered
If this code is displayed for more than
2 minutes, then a MOSS microcode
problem is suspected.
Contact your support structure,
refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
If this code is displayed for more than
2 minutes when:
1. The load/dump is via a channel,
then go to “MAP 3500:
Activate/Deactivate Line Problem
or Line Errors on the TSS” on
page 2-7.
2. The load/dump is via the disk,
then run “How to Run MOSS
Diagnostics” on page 3-4 to aid
problem isolation and refer to IBM
3745 Service Functions, "Hard
Disk Trouble Analysis".
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL
sequence; IPL phase 4 entered
FF4
OR
if this code is displayed for more than
10 - 20 minutes (depending on IPL
link speed) when:
3. The load/dump is via a link, then
follow carefully the PD Guide.
If this code is displayed for more than
2 minutes, then go to “MAP 3500:
Activate/Deactivate Line Problem or
Line Errors on the TSS” on page 2-7.
If this code is displayed for more than
10 - 20 minutes (depending on IPL
link speed) then follow the PD guide.
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL
sequence; the control program load/dump is started on
a channel-attached 3745
FF5
FF6
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL
sequence; the control program load/dump is started on
a link-attached 3745
If this code is displayed for more than
2 minutes, then the CCU failed to ini-
tialize the control program. A control
program problem is suspected.
Contact your support structure, refer
to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL
sequence; control program is loaded and initialization
has started
FF7
Status/Progression step which occurs during the IPL
sequence; control program Load/Dump is started on a
ESCA attached 3756-900.
FF8
FF9
No action required
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Unused
Go to “How to Run the Console Link
Test for 3745 Models 130, 150, 160,
and 170” on page 3-6 and run the
local console link test. Record:
exchange the FRU group 26 for pos-
sible exchange if problem still exists.
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL
sequence; IPL has completed but has detected a PCA1
adapter error; local console may not be accessible
FFA
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL
sequence; IPL was cancelled by the 3745 console
operator
FFB
FFC
No action required
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Unused
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL
sequence; IPL has completed; The MOSS IML was per-
formed from the diskette; the control program is loaded
and MOSS is operational
FFD
FFE
No action required
A reference code will have been
produced on the 3745 console. Refer
to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14.
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL
sequence; IPL has been completed but has detected
some error during the sequence.
1-46 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 33 of 33). Panel Codes. An ñ following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49
or to MAP number
Panel
Code
Definition
FFF
Status/MOSS offline function is successfully ended.
No action required
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Group Table
Using the MIP FRU Group Table
Very important
The MIP FRU group table lists the FRU groups likely to be called in this manual.
This table covers MOSS/POWER FRU group for failures that prevent correct operation of the BRC
function.
Ÿ Each FRU group contains from one to three FRUs, listed by name and location.
Ÿ The “1st FRU” is the most likely to be failing. The “3rd FRU” is the least likely.
Ÿ Usually, only one FRU in an FRU group is failing, and you should try to reduce the FRU group
to the one failing FRU.
Ÿ If you can reproduce the 3745 failure, exchange FRUs one at a time until the failing FRUs are
isolated.
Ÿ As soon as you have recorded the FRU and location in the FRU Group, go to “3745 FRU
List” on page 1-53.
Always
1. Ensure that the failing area of the machine is available for service.
2. Consult the “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1 before removing any FRUs.
3. Check for loose cards, cables, and crossovers before exchanging FRUs.
4. Run diagnostics after any repair action.
5. Follow the 'CE leaving' procedure before returning the machine to the customer.
The FRU group table starts on the next page.
1-48 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Group Table
3745 FRU Group Table
Very important
Read the previous page before using this table.
Table 1-6 (Page 1 of 3). 3745 FRU Table
FRU
Group
1st FRU
Name Location
2nd FRU
Name Location
3rd FRU
Name Location
Cable Location
1
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
DFA
01A-X0G
2
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
3
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
DFA
01A-X0G
4
PCC
01A-X0B
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
5
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
6
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
DFA
01A-X0G
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
7
DFA
01A-X0G
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
8
DFA
01A-X0G
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
9
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
PCC
MSC
PCC
01A-X0B
CONTROL PANEL
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
01A-Y0D1 to
01C-A1J1
01A-X0F
01A-X0B
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MSC
01A-X0F
PCC
01A-X0B
DFA
01A-X0G
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
DFA
01A-X0G
HDD
01D
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
01A-Y0C4 to
01D-A1J2
01A-Y0D4 to
01D-A1J1
01F-A1J3 to
01D-A1J3 and
01B-A1J2
17
18
DFA
FDD
01A-X0G
01B
FDD
01B
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
01A-Y0C1 to
01B-A1J1
01F-A1J3 to
01D-A1J3 and
01B-A1J2
01A-Y0C1 to
01B-A1J1
01F-A1J3 to
01D-A1J3 and
01B-A1J2
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Group Table
Table 1-6 (Page 2 of 3). 3745 FRU Table
FRU
Group
1st FRU
Name Location
2nd FRU
Name Location
3rd FRU
Name Location
Cable Location
19
FDD
01B
DFA
01A-X0G
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
01A-Y0C1 to
01B-A1J1
01F-A1J3 to
01D-A1J3 and
01B-A1J2
20
21
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
Diskette
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
PUC
FDD
01G-V
01B
DFA
01A-X0G
01A-Y0C1 to
01B-A1J1
01F-A1J3 to
01D-A1J3 and
01B-A1J2
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
Local Console
Remote Console
RSF
PCC
MSC
DFA
MSC
01A-X0B
01A-X0F
01A-X0G
01A-X0F
MSC
PCC
MSC
DFA
01A-X0F
01A-X0B
01A-X0F
01A-X0G
Wrap Block
Console Cable
01A-Y0C5 to
01R-A1J3
01A-Y0B5 to
01R-A1J2
01A-Y0A5 to
01R-A1J1
Console Cable
PCC
PCC
01A-X0B
01A-X0B
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MOSS Power
MSC
01A-X0F
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
PUC
01G-V
01A-Y0A2 to
01G-A1YR
01A-Y0B2 to
01G-A1YQ
34
35
MSC
CONTROL PANEL
01A-X0F
PCC
01A-X0B
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
01A-Y0D1 to
01C-A1J1
36
37
PCC
CONTROL PANEL
PCC 01A-X0B
01A-X0B
CONTROL PANEL
01A-Y0D1 to
01C-A1J1
01A-Y0D1 to
01C-A1J1
PCC
01A-X0B
38
39
Battery 01C-D1
PCC
PCC
PCC
01A-X0B
01A-X0B
01A-X0B
01A-Y0B1 to
01C-D1J1 and
01C-B1J1
01A-Y0A1 to
01E-A0J1 and
01K-A0J1
01A-Y0A1 to
01E-A0J1 and
01K-A0J1
40
41
PS Fan 01K
Logic Fan 01E
42
43
44
MSC
MSC
DFA
01A-X0F
01A-X0F
01A-X0G
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
DFA
01A-X0G
1-50 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Group Table
Table 1-6 (Page 3 of 3). 3745 FRU Table
FRU
Group
1st FRU
Name Location
2nd FRU
Name Location
3rd FRU
Name Location
Cable Location
45
46
47
48
49
DFA
DFA
FDD
HDD
PUC
01A-X0G
01A-X0G
01B
FDD
HDD
DFA
01B
01A-Y0C1 to
01B-A1J1
01F-A1J3 to
01D-A1J3 and
01B-A1J2
01A-Y0C4 to
01D-A1J2
01F-A1J3 to
01D-A1J3 and
01B-A1J2
01A-Y0C1 to
01B-A1J1
01F-A1J3 to
01D-A1J3 and
01B-A1J2
01A-Y0C4 to
01D-A1J2
01F-A1J3 to
01D-A1J3 and
01B-A1J2
01D
01A-X0G
01D
01G-V
PCC
PCC
01A-X0B
01A-X0B
01A-Y0A2 to
01G-A1YR
01A-Y0B2 to
01G-A1YQ
50
51
PS1 01F
PCC
01A-X0B
PS2 in PPB 01H
01A-Y0D2 to
01H-B1J8
52
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
PCC 01A-X0B
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
53
54
PCC
DFA
01A-X0B
01A-X0G
EPO box 01S
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MSC
01A-X0F
55
56
57
58
MLA
MLA
MLA
MLA
01A-X0D
01A-X0D
01A-X0D
01A-X0D
MPC2
MPC2
MPC2
01A-X0E
01A-X0E
01A-X0E
MOSS Board
PCC 01A-X0B
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Group Table
3745 Cable Location
Table 1-7. 3745 Cable Location
From
To
Name
01A-Y0A1
01A-Y0A2
01A-Y0A3
01A-Y0A5
01A-Y0B1
01A-Y0B2
01A-Y0B3
01A-Y0B5
01A-Y0C1
01A-Y0C3
01A-Y0C4
01A-Y0C5
01A-Y0D1
01A-Y0D2
01A-Y0D4
01A-Y0E3
01E-A0J1 01K-A0J1
01G-A1YR
01G-A1YP
01R-A1J1
01C-D1J1 01C-B1J1
01G-A1YQ
01G-A1YN
01R-A1J2
01B-A1J1
01L-B1J1 01L-B2J1
01D-A1J2
01R-A1J3
01C-A1J1
AFD CCU/Power. Sense to PCC
CCU from/to MCC, PUC (cable 1)
POR PCC to CCU, LA, CA
RSF console from/to MCC
Panel: Battery/Ready LED
CCU from/to MCC, PUC (cable 2)
Channel from/to MCC, CAs
Remote console from/to MCC
Diskette data/control from/to DFA
ac FAIL / POR
Disk data from/to DFA
Local console from/to MCC
Panel display from/to PCC
5 Volts to PCC from PPB
Disk control from/to DFA
PS2 power Control.
01H-B1J8
01D-A1J1
01H-B1J9
01A-Y0E4
01F-A1J3
01H-B1J8
01H-B1J6
01H-B1J7
01F-A1J5
01F-A1J6
01F-A1J8 via 01L-B1
01F-A1J7 via 01L-B2
01H-A1J11
01F-A1J4
01F-A1J2
01D-A1J3 01B-A1J2
01C-C1
01E-A0J2
01K-A0J2
01M-A1A3
01M-A2A3
01L-A1A3
01L-A2A3
01S-A0J5/6/7/8
01G-A1YE
PWR ENT/Control from PS1 to PCC
Disk / Diskette power from PS1
EPO switch from panel to PPB
CCU fan box (Power) from PS2
Power fan box (Power) from PS2
LIB1
LIB1 or LIB3
LIB2
LIB1 or LIB2
Customer EPO
Multi voltage to CCU
1-52 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU List
3745 FRU List
FRU Code
Type
FRU Name
Text
BATT
04C
Battery
It is not necessary to disable any part of the machine or run diagnos-
tics. Go to “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.
CADR
CAL6
CAL7
CBSP
06C
07C
08C
850
CADR
CAL
Channel adapter driver receiver card. Go to “Disabling Procedure
0110: Preparing a CA for Maintenance” on page 1-61
Channel adapter logic card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0110: Pre-
paring a CA for Maintenance” on page 1-61.
Channel adapter logic card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0110: Pre-
paring a CA for Maintenance” on page 1-61.
Controller bus and service processor. Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways
Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
CAL
CBSP
CBSP2
CBSP3
CBC
CSC
CSP
8A0
430
CBC
CSC
CSP
Controller bus coupler. Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol
Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Scanner for medium low speed. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120:
Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.
Communication scanner processor (associated with FESH card for
high high speed lines. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a
TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.
70C
0EC
DCRG
DFA
73C
0FC
DCREG
DFA
DC regulator card Go to “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.
Disk file adapter card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put
the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on
page 1-65.
DSKTE
DMUX
10C
12C
Diskette
DMUX
Remove the diskette from the FDD and exchange it.
Double multiplex card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a
TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.
EAC
14C
EAC
Ethernet adapter card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a
TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.
Fan1
Fan2
FDD
7EC
7FC
17C
Fan1
Fan2
FDD
“Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.
“Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.
Flexible disk drive. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the
MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65.
FESH
HDD
LIC1
LIC3
LIC4
LIC5
LIC6
MAC
18C
1AC
20C
22C
23C
24C
25C
84C
FESH
HDD
LIC1
LIC3
LIC4
LIC5
LIC6
MAC
Front-end scanner (high speed). Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120:
Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.
Hard disk drive. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the
MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65.
Line interface coupler type 1 card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0150:
Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on page 1-69.
Line interface coupler type 3 card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0150:
Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on page 1-69.
Line interface coupler type 4 card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0150:
Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on page 1-69.
Line interface coupler type 5 card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0150:
Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on page 1-69.
Line interface coupler type 6 card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0150:
Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on page 1-69.
MOSS adapter card for 3745 Model 17A. Go to “Disabling Procedure
0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for
Maintenance” on page 1-65.
MCC
MLA
7BC
44C
2BC
2CC
MCC
MLA
MOSS control card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put
the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on
page 1-65.
MOSS LAN adapter card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to
Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on
page 1-65.
MOSS processor card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put
the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on
page 1-65.
MOSS processor card (specific for Model 17A). Go to “Disabling Pro-
cedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for
Maintenance” on page 1-65.
MPC
MPC2
MPC
MPC2
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU List
FRU Code
Type
FRU Name
Text
MSC
2DC
2EC
7AC
079C
MSC
MOSS storage card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put
the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on
page 1-65
MOSS storage card (specific for Model 17A). Go to “Disabling Proce-
dure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for
Maintenance” on page 1-65.
Power control card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put
the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on
page 1-65.
Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Pre-
paring the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65.
MSC2
PCC
MSC2
PCC
PNLC
Control Panel
PS1
PS2
PUC
71C
72C
87C
PS1
PS2
PUC
Power supply number 1. Go to “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.
Power supply number 2. Go to “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.
CCU card. Go to “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60 and
follow 'CCU/IOC bus' requirements.
SALC
SCTL
75C
3AC
3DC
76C
77C
46C
47C
85C
SALC
SCTL
Scanner ALC. Refer to Airline Line Control Scanner RPQ 7L1148
Supplement to Service Documentation SY33-2077.
Storage control card. Go to “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on
page 1-60 and follow 'CCU/IOC bus' requirements.
Single multiplex card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a
TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.
Storage card. Go to “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60
and follow 'CCU/IOC bus' requirements.
Storage card. Go to “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60
and follow 'CCU/IOC bus' requirements.
Token-ring interface coupler type 2. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0140:
Preparing a TRSS for Maintenance” on page 1-66.
Token-ring multiplexer card; Go to “Disabling Procedure 0140: Pre-
paring a TRSS for Maintenance” on page 1-66.
Channel adapter IOC terminator card (specific for Model 17A). Go to
“3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60 and follow 'CCU/IOC
bus' requirements.
SMUXA/B
STO4
STO8
TIC2
SMUXA/B
STO4
STO8
TIC2
TRM
TRM
TERMC
TERMC
TERMD
TERMI
TERMR
7CC
7DC
86C
TERMD
TERMI
TERMR
DMA terminator card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a
TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62
IOC terminator card. Go to “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on
page 1-60 and follow 'CCU/IOC bus' requirements.
IOC terminator card (specific for Model 17A). Go to “3745 Diagnostic
Requirement” on page 1-60 and follow 'CCU/IOC bus' requirements.
1-54 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 and Service Processor Maintenance
3745 and Service Processor Maintenance Using a CPN
The service processor console should be logged ON. If it is not go to “Console Use for Maintenance” on
page 1-1 for logging ON and return here.
1. On the MOSS-E View window, click on Program (in the action bar).
2. Click on Search CPN.
3. Enter the CPN.
4. The controller icon corresponding to the CPN is highlighted. On the bottom line of the MOSS-E View
window the type of controller (3745 or 3746-900) and its serial number are displayed.
5. Note the type of controller and double-click on the highlighted controller icon.
001
Was a 3745 Controller icon highlighted?
Yes No
002
Was a 3746-900 Controller icon highlighted?
Yes No
003
Go to Step 008.
004
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
005
The selected machine is a 3745.
Are you here for a hardware problem (with FRU)?
Yes No
006
For a 3745 microcode problem refer to the Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual.
Use the "Handling the Microcode Change Levels" procedure in the "Maintaining the Code Loaded
on the Service Processor" chapter.
007
Ÿ The 3745 Menu window is displayed.
Ÿ Click on the Problem Management option.
Ÿ Double-click on the Display Alarms option.
Ÿ On the next window, double-click on the alarm which has the CPN corresponding to your call.
Ÿ You obtain a FRU or a list of FRUs with the FRU location.
Ÿ Note this information and go to “3745 FRU List” on page 1-53 for FRU replacement.
008
The service processor icon is highlighted.
Are you here for a hardware problem (with FRU)?
Yes No
009
For a service processor microcode problem, refer to the Service Processor Installation and Mainte-
nance manual. Use the "Handling the Microcode Change Levels" procedure in the "Maintaining the
Code Loaded on the Service Processor" chapter.
010
Ÿ On the MOSS-E View window, double click on the service processor icon.
(Step 010 continues)
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 and Service Processor Maintenance
010 (continued)
Ÿ The Service Processor Menu window is displayed.
Ÿ Click on the Problem management option.
Ÿ Double-click on the Display Alarms option.
Ÿ The Display Alarms window is displayed.
Ÿ Record the SRC number of the alarm which has the CPN corresponding to your call.
Ÿ Return to the Problem management window.
Ÿ Double-click on the Manage Alarms/Errors/Events (SRCs).
Ÿ Select Alarms then click on OK.
Ÿ Double-click on the alarm which has the SRC number previously recorded.
Ÿ A FRU or a list of FRUs with the FRU location is displayed.
Ÿ Record this FRU list with each card fault probability.
Ÿ Go to "Service Processor Problem Determination" in the corresponding Service Processor Installation
and Maintenance manual.
1-56 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 and Service Processor Maintenance
Service Processor Maintenance Using an SRC Sequence Number
The service processor console should be logged ON. If it is not, go to “Console Use for Maintenance” on
page 1-1 for logging ON and return here.
1. On the MOSS-E View window, double click on the service processor icon.
2. The Service Processor Menu window is displayed.
3. Click on the Problem management option.
4. Double-click on the Manage Alarms/Errors/Events (SRCs) option.
5. Select the Alarm option then click on OK.
6. On the next window, double-click on the alarm which has the SRC number that you want.
7. A FRU or a list of FRUs with the FRU location is displayed.
8. Record this FRU list with each card fault probability.
9. Go to "Service Processor Problem Determination" in the corresponding Service Processor Installation
and Maintenance manual.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 and Service Processor Maintenance
Engineering Data Transfer
Overview
The engineering data can be transferred in two main ways:
Ÿ Optical disk or diskettes
Ÿ DCAF (Distributed Console Access Facility) via LAN, or SDLC.
The transfer can be done from:
Ÿ The local service processor using optical disk or diskettes
Ÿ The remote service processor using DCAF.
Transferring Engineering Data from the Local Service Processor
Ÿ You should be logged ON.
Ÿ On the MOSS-E View window, double-click on the service processor icon.
Ÿ On the Service Processor Menu, click on the Operation Management option.
Ÿ Double-click on the Retrieve Engineering Data option.
Ÿ The Retrieve Engineering Data window is displayed, askin g if you have transferred the 3745 engi-
neering data.
– If you click on YES:
The Engineering Data Retrieval window is displayed with a wait message. The
Save/Transfer Engineering Data window becomes available for selection.
- Click on your Copy to Diskette or Copy to Optical Disk option. Then follow the information
displayed.
- At the end of the copy, double click on the Delete Engineering data window to delete the
engineering data file on MOSS-E.
– If you click on NO you are directed to the MIP: Start page - 3745/3746-900 Maintenance
Actions. See “Transferring 3745 Engineering Data to MOSS-E.”
Transferring 3745 Engineering Data to MOSS-E
Ÿ From the MOSS-E View window, double-click on the 3745 icon.
Ÿ On the 3745 Menu window, click on the MOSS Console option.
Ÿ A MOSS window is displayed. Enter the PEM command on this window, and press Enter.
Ÿ On the same window enter the SD (Super Diagnostic) function and press Enter.
Ÿ On the Super Diagnostic window, select function 5 (transfer file to MOSS-E).
Ÿ Enter the file names to be transferred as specified hereafter and press Enter.
– CHGCDF for CDF
– CHGCIL for BERs
For other dump files, type DDD in menu 3 to check their availability :
– CHGDMP
– CHHDMPA
– CHHDMPB
– CHGTRSSA
– CHGTRSSB
– CHGCADSA
– CHGCADSB
Ÿ Enter PEM and press Enter to end.
Logon on the Remote Service Processor
Note
Before continuing, establish the physical connection with the local service processor.
Ÿ On the desk top screen, double-click on the Distributed Console Access Facility icon.
Ÿ A Distributed Console Access Facility-Icon View is displayed.
Ÿ Double-click on the Controlling for the DCAF option.
Ÿ On the Product Information window, click on OK.
Ÿ On the Distributed Console Access Facility, click on Services in the action bar.
1-58 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 and Service Processor Maintenance
Ÿ Click on the Select a link Record option.
Ÿ On the DCAF Link Record Directory window, double-click on the desired link (LAN, SDLC)
Ÿ On the DCAF Target Password window, enter the password and click on OK.
Ÿ The DCAF Target/Monitoring/ALT+T is displayed.
Ÿ Return to the SDLC State Monitoring and click on Session in the action bar.
Ÿ Click on Active.
Transferring Engineering Data to the Remote Service Processor
Ÿ On the SDLC State Active-Key Stroke Remote window, click on Services in the action bar.
Ÿ Click on Start File Transfer.
Ÿ The DCAF - File Transfer Utilities window is displayed.
Ÿ On this window:
– Enter the source file name:
K:|pedat|xxxxxxxx.zip (Note)
– Enter the destination file name (which can be the same).
– Do not select the compress option.
– Click on Receive.
Ÿ A DCAF - File Transfer Utility window is displayed showing the status.
Ÿ When the transfer is done, the message File Transfer Performed successfully is displayed. Click
on OK.
Ÿ Click on the Delete Engineering Data to delete engineering data file on MOSS-E.
Note: xxxxxxxx = Manufacturing plant and serial number of service processor.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling Procedures
3745 Diagnostic Requirement
If all of the machine is available and the MOSS is running alone, go to “How to Run Internal Func-
tion Tests” on page 3-9 and run the appropriate diagnostic or perform other maintenance as
required.
Table 1-8. 3745 Diagnostic Requirements
Diagnostic
CA
Go to
“Disabling Procedure 0110: Preparing a CA for Maintenance” on page 1-61.
“Disabling Procedure 0110: Preparing a CA for Maintenance” on page 1-61.
CA wrap tests
ESS
“Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on
page 1-62.
HPTSS
MOSS
“Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on
page 1-62.
“Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for
Maintenance” on page 1-65.
TRSS
TSS
“Disabling Procedure 0140: Preparing a TRSS for Maintenance” on page 1-66.
“Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on
page 1-62.
LIC wrap test (IFT)
“Disabling Procedure 0150: Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on
page 1-69.
LIC wrap test (WTT)
CCU/IOC bus/CBA
“How to Run the Wrap Test (WTT) for TSS, HPTSS, or 3746-900” on page 3-15.
The entire machine is required. Notify the operator to deactivate all the lines
attached to the 3745 and to deactivate NCP. Run the requested diagnostics. If
necessary refer to “How to Run Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9. Then go to
“Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99. For CBA diag-
nostic you need the whole 3745 powered ON and in Offline mode, while the
3746-900 must be powered ON, error free, setted in Online mode with the CBC and
its CBSP available in the CDF-E and not in concurrent mode.
To run the requested diagnostics, refer to “How to Run Internal Function Tests” on
page 3-9 then go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on
page 4-99.
1-60 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling Procedures
Disabling Procedure 0110: Preparing a CA for Maintenance
Important
7. Type SHT for shutdown in the command ===>
field.
Before using this procedure, ensure that the
MOSS is online. Refer to “How to Put the
MOSS Online” on page 4-105 for more infor-
mation.
8. Press SEND.
9. Follow the instructions on the screen, then
press SEND.
10. After the COMMAND COMPLETED has been
displayed, press PF6 twice (in order to go
back two screens) and enter the channel
adapter number corresponding to the associ-
ated CA if required in the CA number ===>
field.
Note: For information about any specific console
message, refer to the IBM 3745 Service Functions
Guide.
1. Ask the customer to disable the channel
adapter and the associated channel adapter, if
applicable.
11. Press SEND.
12. Type SHT for shutdown in the command
Associated CAs:
Ÿ CA5 and CA6
Ÿ CA7 and CA8
===> field.
13. Press SEND.
14. Follow the instructions on the screen, then
2. At the 3745 console, select MENU 3 and type
press SEND.
CAS for channel adapter services.
15. Wait for COMMAND COMPLETED.
3. Press SEND.
16. Referring to “How to Run Internal Function
Tests” on page 3-9, run the diagnostics on
the suspected channel adapter.
4. Type 4 for concurrent mode commands.
5. Press SEND and type the channel adapter
number corresponding to the suspected CA
(in the CA number ===> field).
17. Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Anal-
ysis 0000” on page 4-99.
6. Press SEND.
.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling Procedures
Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for
Maintenance
Important
next Step 2f
f. On Mode Control screen, enter DS
to disconnect the line adapter. See
Figure 1-4 on page 1-64.
Before using this procedure, ensure that the
MOSS is online. If at this time MOSS is
offline, set MOSS online to perform this proce-
dure. Refer to “How to Put the MOSS Online”
on page 4-105 for more information.
If deactivation of all the lines driven
by this line adapter was not done, a
screen showing the still active lines
will be displayed. If the customer is
unable to deactivate these lines,
request his approval to force deacti-
vation for these lines.
To force deactivation, enter F on the
displayed screen.
Continue with the next step only
when all lines have been deacti-
vated and the line adapter has been
disconnected.
If you are coming from MAP 2100 or MAP 2130,
go to Step 002.
001
Is the FRU a CSP card (CSP is one of the 2
HPTSS/ESS cards) ?
Yes No
002
g. Enter 1 in the selection area to
choose select/release. See
Figure 1-2 on page 1-63.
1. Ask the customer to deactivate all the
lines attached to the line adapter
(recorded as affected lines).
h. Enter REL in the input area to
release the disabled line adapter.
See Figure 1-3 on page 1-63.
Wait until the customer has completed
deactivating the lines.
2. Using the 3745 console, disconnect the
line adapter from the NCP as follows:
Run the requested diagnostics (TSS,
HPTSS, or ESS).
Refer to Figure 1-5 on page 1-64. If nec-
essary, refer to “How to Run Internal Func-
tion Tests” on page 3-9. Then go to
“Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis
0000” on page 4-99
a. From menu 3, select TSS Services
by entering TSS in the selection
area.
b. From the TSS Services screen,
choose select/release by entering 1
in the selection area. See
003
Figure 1-2 on page 1-63.
The entire machine is required. Ask the customer
to deactivate all the lines attached to the 3745
and to deactivate NCP. Then refer to “How to
Run Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9.
c. In the input area, enter an S fol-
lowed by the line adapter number.
See Figure 1-3 on page 1-63.
d. Enter 3 in the selection area to
choose Mode Control.
Note: You must never run the HPTSS/ESS diag-
nostics under concurrent maintenance
before exchanging a probably defective
CSP card. This would cause other line
adapters to go down.
e. If, in the MSA display (upper part of
the screen), the status of the
scanner is Unknown Mode, then
enter RT on the Mode Control
screen enter and continue with the
1-62 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling Procedures
à
ð
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð2/14/87 ðð:15
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TSS SERVICES
1 SELECT/RELEASE :
2 DUMP/IML
:
:
3 MODE CONTROL
4 DPLY/ALT STORE :
5 DPLY/ALT BLOCKS:
6 DPLY/ALT LSR
:
7 DPLY/ALT XREG :
8 ADDRESS COMPARE:
9 CHK-POINT TRACE:
1ð D/ALT HPTSS/ESS:
:
:
:
===>
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
ð
Figure 1-2. TSS Service Screen
à
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð4/13/87 ð5:2ð
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TSS SERVICES
1 SELECT/RELEASE :
2 DUMP/IML
: - TO SELECT A SCANNER, ENTER:
:
3 MODE CONTROL
4 DPLY/ALT STORE :
5 DPLY/ALT BLOCKS:
THE LINE ADAPTER NUMBER PRECEDED BY S (S1 TO S32)
OR
6 DPLY/ALT LSR
:
THE LINE ADDRESS
7 DPLY/ALT XREG :
8 ADDRESS COMPARE:
(TSS: ð TO 895, HPTSS: 1ð24 TO 1ð39)
(ESS: 1ð56 TO 1ð71
)
==>
9 CHK-POINT TRACE: - TO RELEASE SELECTED SCANNER, ENTER REL
1ð D/ALT HPTSS/ESS:
:
:
:
===>
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
Figure 1-3. Select/Release Screen
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling Procedures
à
ð
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:22
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TSS SERVICES
1 SELECT/RELEASE :
2 DUMP/IML
:
3 MODE CONTROL
: - SELECT SCANNER CONTROL COMMAND(SP, ST, CT, DS, RT) ==>
4 DPLY/ALT STORE :
5 DPLY/ALT BLOCKS:
SP = STOP
ST = START
CT = CONNECT
DS = DELAYED DISCONNECT
RT = RESET
6 DPLY/ALT LSR
:
7 DPLY/ALT XREG :
8 ADDRESS COMPARE:
9 CHK-POINT TRACE:
1ð D/ALT HPTSS/ESS:
:
:
:
===>
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
ð
Figure 1-4. Mode Control Screen
à
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:22
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: OFFLINE DIAGS
GROUP : ADP#: LINE:
1 ALL :
2 CCU :
:
:
:
:
:
:
3 IOCB: 1- 4:
4 CA : 1- 8:
5 TSS : 1-32: ð-31:
6 TRSS: 1- 2: 1- 2:
7 HTSS: 1- 8:
8 OLT : 1- 8:
9 ESS : 1- 8:
:
:
:
OPT= Y IF MODIFY :
OPTION REQUIRED
:
: ENTER REQUEST ACCORDING TO THE DIAG MENU
: DIAG==>(A)
ADP#==>(B)
LINE==>
OPT==>
===>
F6:QUIT
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
(A) Enter 5 here for TSS diagnostics or 7 for HPTSS/ESS.
(B) Enter the number of the suspected adapter here.
Figure 1-5. TSS/HPTSS/ESS Diagnostic Selection Screen
1-64 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling Procedures
Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing
the MOSS for Maintenance
The MOSS can be disabled via the 3745 console or via the control panel. It is recommanded to use the
console to put MOSS offline. If this is not possible, the control panel can be used.
Using the 3745 Console
Using the Control Panel
1. Ensure that the customer is not using any of
the 3745 consoles or the control panel.
1. Ensure that the customer is not using any of
the 3745 consoles or the control panel.
2. On the control panel, check if the MOSS Inop
indicator is ON or B is displayed. If so, it is
not necessary to take the MOSS offline. Go
to 6.
2. MOSS IML
a. Ensure that the service mode is either 0
or 1.
b. Select function 1 on the control panel.
c. Press Valid.
3. Select MENU 2.
4. Enter MOF to put the MOSS offline.
5. Press SEND.
When the MOSS IML starts, the MOSS will
automatically become disabled and MOSS
diagnostics will be run.
(MOSS OFFLINE will be displayed on the
console screen).
3. Then :
6. Then :
a. If you were sent to this procedure from
another procedure, return there now.
a. If you were sent to this procedure from
another procedure, return there now.
b. If the panel test or console link test was
used to detect the FRU to be exchanged,
go to “Exchange Precautions” on
page 4-1.
b. If the panel test or console link test was
used to detect the FRU to be exchanged,
go to “Exchange Precautions” on
page 4-1.
c. If not, using the table Table 1-9, run the
appropriate diagnostics. Refer to
Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
c. If not, using the table Table 1-9 run the
appropriate diagnostics. Refer to
Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1. (MOSS diag-
nostics will have been started if a MOSS
IML was done). Then go to “Diagnostic
and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on
page 4-99.
Diagnostics” on page 3-1. Go to “Diag-
nostic and Exchange Result Analysis
0000” on page 4-99.
Table 1-9. Diagnostic Selection
FRU Location
Diagnostic to be Run
Suspected
Area
Associated
Area
DFA
FDD
HDD
01A-X0G
01B
MOSS
MOSS
MOSS
MOSS
MOSS
MOSS
MOSS
PCSS
PCSS
N/A
MOSS (load from diskette)
MOSS
N/A
01D
N/A
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
01A-X0E
MOSS and console link test
MOSS
N/A
MPC/MPC2
N/A
MSC
PCC
01A-X0F
01A-X0B
MOSS
N/A
MOSS and panel test
Panel test
MOSS
MOSS
CONTROL PANEL
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling Procedures
Disabling Procedure 0140: Preparing a TRSS for Maintenance
Important
c. In the input area, enter the number of the
TRA. See Figure 1-7 on page 1-67.
Before using this procedure, ensure that the
MOSS is online. Refer to “How to Put the
MOSS Online” on page 4-105 for more infor-
mation.
d. Enter 2 in the selection area to choose
'Connect/Disc'. See Figure 1-6 on
page 1-67.
e. On Connect/Disc screen, enter DS to dis-
connect the TRA. See Figure 1-8 on
page 1-68.
1. Ask the customer to deactivate all the lines
attached to this adapter.
If the TRSS can not successfully be dis-
connected (msg:function not performed),
contact your support structure. Refer to
“Contacting Support” on page A-1.
Ÿ Wait until the customer has completed
deactivating the rings.
2. Using the 3745 console, disconnect the TRA
from the NCP as follows:
3. Run the concurrent TRSS diagnostics using
the adapter number. Refer to Figure 1-9 on
page 1-68. If necessary, refer to “How to Run
Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9. Go to
“Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis
0000” on page 4-99.
a. From Menu 3, select TRSS Services by
entering TRS in the selection area.
b. From the TRSS Services screen, choose
select by entering 1 in the selection area.
See Figure 1-6 on page 1-67.
1-66 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling Procedures
à
ð
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:22
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TRSS SERVICES
1 SELECT
:
:
:
:
:
:
2 CONNECT/DISC
3 TRM REGS
4 TIC INTR REG
5 DPLY STORAGE
6 DUMP
7 DPLY SCB, SSB :
8 DPLY PARM BLK :
9 TIC ERR STAT
:
:
:
:
:
===>1
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
ð
Figure 1-6. TRSS Service Screen
à
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð2/1ð/87 ð3:3ð
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TRSS SERVICES
1 SELECT
:
TRA SELECTION
2 CONNECT/DISC
3 TRM REGS
4 TIC INTR REG
5 DPLY STORAGE
6 DUMP
:
: ENTER THE TRA # ==>2
TRA#
LINE ADDRESS TIC CCU
1ð88 1ð89
1ð9ð 1ð9ð
:
:
:
1
2
YY
YN
B
B
7 DPLY SCB, SSB :
8 DPLY PARM BLK :
9 TIC ERR STAT
:
:
:
: PRESS SEND TO CONFIRM
:
===>
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
Figure 1-7. Select Screen
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling Procedures
à
ð
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- 1ð/19/9ð ð9:32
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TRSS SERVICES
1 SELECT
:
:
:
:
:
:
TRA CONNECT/DISCONNECT
2 CONNECT/DISC
3 TRM REGS
4 TIC INTR REG
5 DPLY STORAGE
6 DUMP
TYPE CT TO CONNECT
DS TO DISCONNECT ==>
7 DPLY SCB, SSB :
8 DPLY PARM BLK :
9 TIC ERR STAT
:
:
:
:
:
PRESS SEND TO CONFIRM
===>
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
ð
Figure 1-8. Connect/Disconnect Screen
à
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:22
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: ONLINE DIAGS
GROUP : ADP#: LINE:
1 ALL
:
:
:
:
2 CCU :
:
3 IOCB: 1- 4:
4 CA : 1- 8:
5 TSS : 1-32: ð-31:
6 TRSS: 1- 2: 1- 2:
7 HTSS: 1- 8:
8 OLT : 1- 8:
9 ESS : 1- 8:
:
:
:
OPT= Y IF MODIFY :
OPTION REQUIRED
:
: ENTER REQUEST ACCORDING TO THE DIAG MENU
: DIAG==>(A)
ADP#==>(B)
LINE==>
OPT==>
===>
F6:QUIT
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
(A) Enter 6 here for TRSS diagnostics.
(B) Enter the number of the suspected adapter here.
Figure 1-9. TRSS Diagnostic Selection Screen
1-68 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling Procedures
Disabling Procedure 0150: Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for
Maintenance
Important
Wait until the customer has completed
deactivating the lines.
Before using this procedure, ensure that the
MOSS is online. Refer to “How to Put the
MOSS Online” on page 4-105 for more infor-
mation.
Using the 3745 console, disconnect the line
adapter from the NCP as follows:
a. From Menu 3, select TSS Services
by entering TSS in the selection
area.
You should have recorded the following informa-
tion from the reference code and from the addi-
tional information (PF6) for use during this service
call.
b. From the TSS Services screen,
choose select/release by entering 1
in the selection area. See
Figure 1-11 on page 1-74.
Ÿ FRU and location
Ÿ Suspected adapter
Ÿ Affected lines.
c. In the input area, enter an S fol-
lowed by the suspected adapter
number. See Figure 1-12 on
page 1-74.
If necessary, use the LIC/Line address tables to
find the affected lines. Refer to “LIC/Line Address
Table” on page 1-73.
d. Enter 3 in the selection area to
choose Mode Control. See
Figure 1-11 on page 1-74.
e. On the Mode Control screen, enter
DS to disconnect the line adapter.
See Figure 1-13 on page 1-75.
What you should do next:
001
If deactivation of all the lines driven
by this line adapter was not done, a
screen showing active lines will be
displayed. If the customer is unable
to deactivate these lines, request
his approval to force deactivation for
these lines.
To force deactivation, enter F on the
displayed screen.
Continue with the next action only
when all lines have been deacti-
vated and the line adapter has been
disconnected.
– Ask the customer to stop the lines connected to
the suspected LIC or pair of LICs for LIC type 5
and 6. A LIC pair is an odd numbered LIC plus
an even numbered LIC. Refer to the IBM 3745
Connection and Integration Guide.
– Run the automatic wrap test on the LIC unit
(option 1) and the wrap test at tailgate level
(option 2). Refer to “How to Run the Wrap Test
(WTT) for TSS, HPTSS, or 3746-900” on
page 3-15.
Did you get the message: 'Wrap test com-
pleted. The LIC is OK'?
Yes No
f. Enter 1 in the selection area to
choose select/release. See
Figure 1-11 on page 1-74.
002
g. Enter REL in the input area to
release the disconnected line
adapter. See Figure 1-13 on
page 1-75.
Go to Chapter 4, “3745 FRU Exchange” on
page 4-1, then exchange the LIC card.
003
Continue with Step 005.
Has “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a
TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on
page 1-62 already been performed, or is the
3745 fully available?
005
– Run the concurrent TSS diagnostics using the
number of the suspected adapter. Refer to
Figure 1-10 on page 1-72.
Yes No
If necessary, refer to “How to Run Internal
Function Tests” on page 3-9.
(Step 005 continues)
004
Ask the customer to deactivate all the lines
attached to the suspected adapter.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling Procedures
005 (continued)
010 (continued)
Did the diagnostics run without error?
Yes No
Did the diagnostics run without error?
Yes No
006
011
Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result
Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange
Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
007
012
– Note their positions and remove the modem or
line cables from the LIC.
No trouble was found with this LIC.
– Remove the wrap plug.
– If the LIC is type 1 or 4, install the wrap plug
(PN 65X8927) on the uppermost socket. See
Figure 1-17 on page 1-76 and Figure 1-14 on
page 1-75.
Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result
Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
013
– If the LIC is type 3, install the LIC wrap cable
(PN 65X8928) between the two sockets. See
Figure 1-17 on page 1-76 and Figure 1-15 on
page 1-75.
– Using the LID function, enter the line address in
the input area of the displayed screen and
record the line number displayed on the next
screen.
– If the LIC is type 5 or 6, unplug the line cable at
the customer wall frame and install the wrap
plug (PN 11F4815) on the uppermost socket of
the cassette. See Figure 1-18 on page 1-77
and Figure 1-16 on page 1-76.
– Run only the RC01 routine of the concurrent
TSS diagnostics, using the number of the sus-
pected adapter, and the line number recorded
above. Refer to Figure 1-10 on page 1-72.
If necessary, refer to “How to Run Internal
Function Tests” on page 3-9.
Is the LIC type 1, 3, or 4?
Yes No
Did the diagnostics run without error?
Yes No
008
– Using the LID function, enter the line
address in the input area of the displayed
screen and record the line number dis-
played on the next sceen.
014
Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result
Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
– Run only the RH59 routine of the concur-
rent TSS diagnostics using the number of
the suspected adapter, and the line
number recorded above, refer to
015
Is the LIC type other than 3?
Yes No
Figure 1-10 on page 1-72.
If necessary, refer to “How to Run Internal
Function Tests” on page 3-9.
016
Go to Step 024 on page 1-71.
Did the diagnostics run without error?
Yes No
017
009
Is the LIC type 1 or 4A?
Yes No
Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange
Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
018
010
No trouble was found with this LIC.
– Change the wrap plug to the other socket,
if any (LIC type 5).
– Remove the wrap plug and reconnect the
modem cable.
– Rerun the RH59 routine of the TSS diag-
nostics.
(Step 010 continues)
Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result
Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
1-70 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling Procedures
026 (continued)
019
Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis
0000” on page 4-99.
– Change the wrap plug to the next downward
socket of the LIC.
– Rerun the RC01 routine of the concurrent TSS
diagnostics using the number of the suspected
adapter. Refer to Figure 1-10 on page 1-72.
If necessary, refer to “How to Run Internal
Function Tests” on page 3-9.
Did the diagnostics run without error?
Yes No
020
Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result
Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
021
Have you tested all the ports of this LIC with
the wrap plug on?
Yes No
022
Go to Step 019.
023
No trouble was found with this LIC.
– Remove the wrap plug.
Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis
0000” on page 4-99.
024
– Turn the wrap cable around between the LIC
sockets.
– Rerun the RC01 routine of the concurrent TSS
diagnostics using the number of the suspected
adapter. Refer to Figure 1-10 on page 1-72.
If necessary, refer to “How to Run Internal
Function Tests” on page 3-9.
Did the diagnostics run without error?
Yes No
025
– Remove the wrap cable.
Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result
Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
026
No trouble was found with this LIC.
– Remove the Wrap cable.
(Step 026 continues)
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling Procedures
à
ð
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:22
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: ONLINE DIAGS
GROUP :ADP# :LINE :
1 ALL
:
:
:
:
2 CCU :
:
3 IOCB: 1- 4:
4 CA : 1- 8:
5 TSS : 1-32: ð-31:
6 TRSS: 1- 2: 1- 2:
7 HTSS: 1- 8:
8 OLT : 1- 8:
9 ESS : 1- 8:
:
:
:
OPT= Y IF MODIFY :
OPTION REQUIRED
:
: ENTER REQUEST ACCORDING TO THE DIAG MENU
: DIAG==>(A)
ADP#==>(B)
LINE==>(C)
===>
F6:QUIT
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
(A) Enter 5 here for TSS diagnostics or 7 for HPTSS.
(B) Enter the number of the suspected adapter here.
(C) Enter the number of the line (00-15) or (00-31) here.
Figure 1-10. TSS/HPTSS Diagnostic Selection Screen
1-72 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling Procedures
LIC/Line Address Table
┌───────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│
│
Line Address for LIC Type
│
│ Location ├─────────────┬───────┬───────────┬────────────┬───────────┤
1 - 4 │ 3 │ 6 LS │ 6 HS
├───────────┼─────────────┼───────┼───────────┼────────────┼───────────┤
│
│
5
│
│
│ ð1M-A1-C1 │ ð32-ð35 │ ð32 │
│ ð1M-A1-D1 │ ð36-ð39 │ ð36 │
│ ð1M-A1-E1 │ ð4ð-ð43 │ ð4ð │
│ ð1M-A1-F1 │ ð44-ð47 │ ð44 │
│ ð1M-A1-G1 │ ð48-ð51 │ ð48 │
│ ð1M-A1-H1 │ ð52-ð55 │ ð52 │
│ ð1M-A1-J1 │ ð56-ð59 │ ð56 │
│ ð1M-A1-K1 │ ð6ð-ð63 │ ð6ð │
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
├───────────┼─────────────┼───────┼───────────┼────────────┼───────────┤
│ ð1M-A2-C1 │ ððð-ðð3 │ ððð │
│ ð1M-A2-D1 │ ðð4-ðð7 │ ðð4 │
│ ð1M-A2-E1 │ ðð8-ð11 │ ðð8 │
│ ð1M-A2-F1 │ ð12-ð15 │ ð12 │
│ ð1M-A2-G1 │ ð16-ð19 │ ð16 │
│ ð1M-A2-H1 │ ð2ð-ð23 │ ð2ð │
│ ð1M-A2-J1 │ ð24-ð27 │ ð24 │
│ ð1M-A2-K1 │ ð28-ð31 │ ð28 │
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
├───────────┼─────────────┼───────┼───────────┼────────────┼───────────┤
│ ð1L-A1-C1 │
│ ð1L-A1-D1 │
│ ð1L-A1-E1 │
│ ð1L-A1-F1 │
│ ð1L-A1-G1 │
│ ð1L-A1-H1 │
│ ð1L-A1-J1 │
│ ð1L-A1-K1 │
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
│ N/A │ ð8ð-ð81 │
│ N/A │ ð82-ð83 │
│ N/A │ ð84-ð85 │
│ N/A │ ð86-ð87 │
│ N/A │ ð88-ð89 │
│ N/A │ ð9ð-ð91 │
│ N/A │ ð92-ð93 │
│ N/A │ ð94-ð95 │
ð8ð
ð82
ð84
ð86
ð88
ð9ð
ð92
ð94
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
ð8ð
ð8ð
ð84
ð84
ð88
ð88
ð92
ð92
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
├───────────┼─────────────┼───────┼───────────┼────────────┼───────────┤
│ ð1L-A2-C1 │ 128-131 │ 128 │ ð64-ð65 │
│ ð1L-A2-D1 │ 132-135 │ 132 │ ð66-ð67 │
│ ð1L-A2-E1 │ 136-139 │ 136 │ ð68-ð69 │
│ ð1L-A2-F1 │ 14ð-143 │ 14ð │ ð7ð-ð71 │
│ ð1L-A2-G1 │ 144-147 │ 144 │ ð72-ð73 │
│ ð1L-A2-H1 │ 148-151 │ 148 │ ð74-ð75 │
│ ð1L-A2-J1 │ 152-155 │ 152 │ ð76-ð77 │
│ ð1L-A2-K1 │ 156-159 │ 156 │ ð78-ð79 │
ð64
ð66
ð68
ð7ð
ð72
ð74
ð76
ð78
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
ð64
ð64
ð68
ð68
ð72
ð72
ð76
ð76
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
└───────────┴─────────────┴───────┴───────────┴────────────┴───────────┘
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling Procedures
à
ð
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð2/14/87 ðð:15
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TSS SERVICES
1 SELECT/RELEASE :
2 DUMP/IML
:
:
3 MODE CONTROL
4 DPLY/ALT STORE :
5 DPLY/ALT BLOCKS:
6 DPLY/ALT LSR
:
7 DPLY/ALT XREG :
8 ADDRESS COMPARE:
9 CHK-POINT TRACE:
1ð D/ALT HPTSS/ESS:
:
:
:
===>
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
ð
Figure 1-11. TSS Service Screen
à
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð4/13/87 ð5:2ð
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TSS SERVICES
1 SELECT/RELEASE :
2 DUMP/IML
: - TO SELECT A SCANNER, ENTER:
:
3 MODE CONTROL
4 DPLY/ALT STORE :
5 DPLY/ALT BLOCKS:
THE LINE ADAPTER NUMBER PRECEDED BY S (S1 TO S32)
OR
6 DPLY/ALT LSR
:
THE LINE ADDRESS
7 DPLY/ALT XREG :
8 ADDRESS COMPARE:
(TSS: ð TO 895, HPTSS: 1ð24 TO 1ð39)
(ESS: 1ð56 TO 1ð71
)
==>
9 CHK-POINT TRACE: - TO RELEASE SELECTED SCANNER, ENTER REL
1ð D/ALT HPTSS/ESS:
:
:
:
===>
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
Figure 1-12. Select/Release Screen
1-74 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling Procedures
à
ð
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:22
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TSS SERVICES
1 SELECT/RELEASE :
2 DUMP/IML
:
3 MODE CONTROL
: - SELECT SCANNER CONTROL COMMAND(SP, ST, CT, DS, RT) ==>
4 DPLY/ALT STORE :
5 DPLY/ALT BLOCKS:
SP = STOP
ST = START
CT = CONNECT
DS = DELAYED DISCONNECT
RT = RESET
6 DPLY/ALT LSR
:
7 DPLY/ALT XREG :
8 ADDRESS COMPARE:
9 CHK-POINT TRACE:
1ð D/ALT HPTSS/ESS:
:
:
:
===>
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
Figure 1-13. Mode Control Screen
Figure 1-14. LIC Types 1 and 4 Wrap Plug
(PN 65X8927)
Figure 1-15. LIC Type 3 Wrap Cable (PN 65X8928)
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling Procedures
Figure 1-16. LIC Types 5 and 6 Wrap Plug
(PN 11F4815)
Note: LIC 4B uses only port 0.
Figure 1-17. LIC Types 1, 3, and 4
1-76 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Port 0
Port 0
W
W
X
Y
X
Y
Lever
Switch
Z
Port 1
TYPE
LIC5
Knob Color
Black
TYPE
LIC6
Knob Color
Black
Figure 1-18. LIC Types 5 and 6
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Control Panel
3745 Control Panel Use
Attention: Providing that the UEPO switch has
not been activated, the control panel always
has power and will display information on
power control and service even though the
3745 is powered OFF.
– MOSS dump
– Request local console
– Force local console
– Panel test
– Remote/Alternate console link test
– RSF console link test
– Local console link test
– Load from diskette
Purpose of the Control Panel
The control panel allows the execution of functions
which:
1. Are not possible via the console.
– Loop on MOSS diagnostics
– Display stacked errors
2. Must to be operational before the MOSS is
IMLed.
Ÿ Indicate the machine status via indicators
which show:
Uses of the Control Panel
– Function selected
The control panel is used to:
Ÿ Control the power
– Hex code displayed
– Current service mode
– Power control mode
– Console in use
Operations from the panel for power are:
– Set Power Control Mode to Network,
Local, or Remote
– All channel adapters disabled
– MOSS inoperative
– Power On/Power On reset
– Power Off
– MOSS message waiting
– Power On Indicator ON
– Unit Emergency Power Off
Ÿ Perform basic functions which are:
– General IPL from disk
– MOSS IML from disk
Ÿ Sound an audible alarm if an invalid action is
attempted.
1-78 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Control Panel
Power On/Reset Key: When the function
digit is '0' and service mode is '0' or '1', this key
will start a power on reset sequence followed by a
general IPL. Power On should not be pressed
until after a 10-second delay from Power Off.
Explanation of 3745 Panel Keys,
LEDs, and Switches
Refer to Figure 1-19 on page 1-80 for the location
of the keys and switches.
The following three keys allow the customer to
scroll the different options available.
Power Off Key: This key initiates a 'power
down' sequence.
1. Function
Unit Emergency Power Off (UEPO)
2. Service Mode.
3. Power Control
Switch: When this switch is switched down-
wards, power is removed from the machine and a
mechanical interlock locks the switch in the OFF
position. The machine can not be powered ON
until a CE resets the interlock and sets the switch
upwards which enables power ON.
Each scrolled digit is set blinking on the panel
display.
Validate Key: After pressing this key, the
selected digit stops blinking and the chosen option
is performed.
Power On Indicator
This indicator is a green LED. It turns ON when
the 3745 starts to power ON and turns OFF as
soon as the machine powers down. Refer to
Figure 1-19 on page 1-80. It is located to the
right of the Power On/Reset key.
Any options not validated disappear after a time
out of 60 seconds.
Exit Key: Pressing this key will cancel the
scrolled option.
Control Panel Display Description
The control panel display is a gaz panel with
various fields that can have different values. The
meaning of each value is given in Table 1-10 on
page 1-81.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Control Panel
Function
Power On
Reset
Service Mode
Power Control
Code
MOSS MSG
MOSS Inop
Function
Power Off
Power Control
Service Mode
Power Control
All CAs Disabled
Console In Use
Validate
Exit
Unit
Emergency
Only
OFF
Figure 1-19. 3745 Control Panel Layout
1-80 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Control Panel
Table 1-10. Panel Display Values
Indicator
Display
Description
Function
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
General IPL.
MOSS IML.
MOSS dump.
Request local console.
Force local console.
Panel test.
Remote/Alternate console link test.
RSF console link test.
Local console link test.
IML from diskette.
This function must not be used with service function mode
2.
A
B
Loop on MOSS diagnostics.
Display stacked errors.
Code
000 to FFF
A 3 hex character code which shows function progress
codes and error codes. A code which blinks indicates an
error condition has been detected. For more information
on the meaning of these codes, refer to the “3745 Control
Panel Codes” on page 1-15.
Service Mode
0
1
2
Normal: the functions from 0 to 9 are available.
Maintenance 1: the functions from 0 to B are available.
Maintenance 2: for functions 1, 2, MOSS diagnostics will
be bypassed.
3
Maintenance 3: used for installation. Allows function 9
only.
A to D
1
Used with the Display Stacked Error function.
Power Control
Host: the 3745 is powered ON or OFF from the host
systems. If ac power is lost then restored, an Auto Restart
will be performed.
2
Network: the 3745 is powered ON by either a scheduled
power ON or Power On Reset on the control panel. If ac
power is lost then restored, an Auto Restart will be per-
formed. The 3745 is powered OFF by a command
received via NCP.
3
Local: the 3745 is powered ON from Power On Reset
and powered OFF from Power Off on the control panel.
Console in Use
All CAs Disabled
1
2
3
The remote or alternate console is in use.
The RSF modem-to-console connection is in use.
The local console is in use.
Indicator ON: indicates all channel adapters are disabled.
Blank
Indicator OFF: indicates that at least one channel adapter
is enabled.
MOSS Inoperative
MOSS Message
Indicator ON: the MOSS is not available for the CCU.
Blank
Blank
Indicator OFF: the MOSS is powered ON and available.
Indicator ON: a message is displayed on the 3745 console.
Indicator OFF: no messages are waiting to be displayed on
the 3745 console.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Control Panel
How to Perform 3745 Control Panel Operations
Important
x x x x
0FF4
x 3
Before working on non-customer access areas
of the 3745, power control should be set to
Local Mode. This can be done as follows:
Or, when NCP is IPLed from the hard disk:
1. Using Power Control, scroll till the value
is 3, Local Mode.
x x x x
0000
x 3
2. Press Validate.
x = variable values.
MOSS IML
1. Using Function, scroll till the value is 1,
Power On Reset
MOSS IML.
To perform this function:
2. Press Validate.
Start from machine power OFF with Service
Mode either 0 or 1 and the default value for Func-
tion digit at 0.
3. This initiates a MOSS reset followed by a
MOSS IML.
At successful completion of the operation, the
display will be as follows:
When MOSS was alone prior to the IML:
1. Allow a 10-second delay from power OFF.
2. Press Power On Reset.
A power ON reset sequence will be executed fol-
lowed by a general IPL. At successful completion
of the operation, the display will be as follows:
x x x x
1F0E
x 3
Or, when MOSS was not alone prior to the IML:
x x x x
0FF4
x 3
x x x x
1F0F
x 3
Or, when NCP is IPLed from the hard disk:
x = variable values.
x x x x
0000
x 3
x = variable values.
MOSS Dump
1. Using Function, scroll till the value is 2,
MOSS DUMP.
2. Press Validate. A MOSS reset and dump of
MOSS microcode onto disk will be executed.
At successful conclusion of the operation, the
display will be as follows:
General IPL
1. Using Function, scroll till the value is 0,
General IPL.
2. Press Validate.
2F01
x 3
x x x x
A general reset, MOSS IML, CCU IPL, and a
scanner IML is executed and the CLDP is loaded.
x = variable values.
At successful completion of the operation, the
display will be as follows:
3. Perform a MOSS IML to return to normal
mode (see preceding procedure).
1-82 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 Control Panel
Option B:
Request Local Console
1. Using Service Mode, scroll till the value is 1,
1. Using Function, scroll till the value is 3,
Maintenance 1 mode.
Request local console.
2. Press Validate.
2. Press Validate.
3. Using Function, scroll till the value is 9, Load
A message is sent to inform the remote/alternate
or RSF console customer that the local console
customer wants to log on at the local console.
from diskette.
4. Press Validate.
A MOSS reset followed by a MOSS IML will be
executed.
Force Local Console
1. Using Function, scroll till the value is 4, Force
Loop on MOSS Diagnostics
local console.
1. Using Service Mode, scroll till the value is 1,
2. Press Validate.
Maintenance 1 mode.
The link to the remote/alternate or RSF console is
disconnected to allow the local console customer
to log on.
2. Press Validate.
3. Using Function, scroll till the value is A, Loop
on MOSS diagnostics.
4. Press Validate.
Panel Test and Console Link
Tests
The diagnostic MOSS code loops until an error is
detected and the error code is displayed.
See the separate detailed procedures in
Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745 Diagnostics” on
page 3-1.
Press Exit to terminate the diagnostic loop.
Display Stacked Errors
1. Using Service Mode, scroll till the value is 1,
Load from Diskette
Maintenance 1 mode.
1. Insert diskette 1 into the diskette drive.
2. Press Validate.
2. Close the diskette drive (by turning or pulling
the door latch).
3. Using Function, scroll till the value is B,
Display stacked errors
3. Two options are available:
4. Press Validate.
Option A:
5. Using Service Mode, scroll till the value is A,
Display the First Stacked Error
1. Using Service Mode, scroll till the value is 0,
Normal mode.
6. Press Validate.
2. Press Validate.
7. Using Service Mode, scroll till the value is B,
Display the Second Stacked Error
3. Using Function, scroll till the value is 9, Load
from diskette.
8. Press Validate.
4. Press Validate.
9. Similary stacked errors 3 and 4 are displayed
by selecting Service Mode C and D.
A general reset, MOSS IML, CCU IPL, and a
scanner IML is executed and the CLDP is loaded.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting 1-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
1-84 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
IOC Bus MAPs
MAP 0100: IOC Bus Trouble Shooting
Symptom Explanation
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
IOC bus error detected but not
fixed by diagnostics or autoBER.
Ÿ PUC
Ÿ TERMI
Ÿ TERMC
Ÿ TERMR
Ÿ LAs ( TRM/CSP/CSC )
Ÿ CAL
Ÿ Basic board
If you have an intermittent problem, consider that
any of the conditions given in the above table can
cause the problem.
005 (continued)
– Change the TERMI and/or PUC accordingly.
– See “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
001
– And/or “TERMD/TERMI Exchange Procedure”
on page 4-62.
Are the FRUs: PUC, TERMI, TREMC, or TERMR
indicated by the diagnostics or reference
– Change the TERMC and/or TERMR accord-
ingly. See “TERMC/TERMR Exchange
Procedure” on page 4-61.
code?
Yes No
– Press Power On Reset.
002
– Run the diagnostics.
The problem origin can be the channel
adapter or line adapter
Are they running error free?
Yes No
– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:
006
Ÿ Put the power control in local mode:
– Using Power Control, scroll till
the value is 3.
Go to Step 002.
007
– Press Validate.
Ÿ Press Power Off.
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
– Remove all line adapters
– Press Power On Reset.
– Run the channel adapter diagnostics
008
– Press Power Off.
– Replug all line adapters.
– Unplug all channel adapters.
– Press Power On Reset.
– Run the line adapter diagnostics.
Are they running error free?
Yes No
003
Go to Step 008.
004
Are they running error free?
Yes No
One line adapter may be failing. Go to Step
017 on page 2-2.
009
Change the basic board. Go to “Exchange
Precautions” on page 4-1.
005
010
– Press Power Off.
(Step 005 continues)
(Step 010 continues)
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
010 (continued)
018 (continued)
– Press Power Off.
– Press Power Off.
– Replug the first channel adapter.
– Press Power On Reset.
– Change the line adapter you have just
replugged.
– Press Power On Reset.
– Run the channel adapter diagnostics on this
channel.
– Run the line adapter diagnostics.
Are they running error free?
Yes No
Are they running error free?
Yes No
011
019
– Press Power Off.
Change the basic board. Go to
“Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.
– Change the channel adapter you have
just replugged.
020
– Press Power On Reset.
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
– Run channel adapter diagnostics on this
channel.
021
Are they running error free?
Yes No
– Press Power Off.
012
– Replug the next line adapter.
– Press Power On Reset.
– Run the line adapter diagnostics.
Change the basic board. Go to
“Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.
Are they running error free?
Yes No
013
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
022
Change the line adapter you have just
replugged.
014
– Press Power Off.
023
– Replug next channel adapter.
– Press Power On Reset.
Go to Step 021.
– Run the channel adapter diagnostics on this
channel.
Are they running error free?
Yes No
015
Change the channel adapter you have just
replugged.
016
Go to Step 014.
017
– Press Power Off.
– Replug first line adapter.
– Press Power On Reset.
– Run the line adapter diagnostics.
Are they running error free?
Yes No
018
(Step 018 continues)
2-2 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
3745 MOSS MAPs
MAP 3200: MOSS Control Panel Code 001
Symptom Explanation
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
001 displayed on control panel
Ÿ PCC
Ÿ MPC
Ÿ MSC
Ÿ PS1
If the problem is intermittent, consider that any of
the conditions given in the above box can be
involved.
If the nature of the fault does not allow control
panel actions, exchange the FRU group 36 on
page 1-51.
001
There is a LED mounted on the MPC card
(01A-X0E).
Is the MPC LED permanently ON or blinking?
Yes No
002
Was the MPC LED ON during the reset
function execution?
Yes No
003
Exchange the FRU group 32. Go to
“3745 FRU Group Table” on
page 1-49.
004
Exchange the FRU group 22. Go to “3745
FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
005
Is the MPC LED permanently ON?
Yes No
006
Exchange the FRU group 31. Go to “3745
FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
007
Exchange the FRU group 22. Go to “3745 FRU
Group Table” on page 1-49.
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
MAP 3210: MOSS Control Panel Code 059
Symptom Explanation
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Code 059 displayed on control
panel
Ÿ MPC
Ÿ MCC
Ÿ DFA
003 (continued)
001
Is code 072 displayed?
Yes No
This MAP should be used only if the problem can
be reproduced.
If you have an intermittent problem, exchange the
FRU group 1. Go to “3745 FRU Group Table” on
page 1-49.
004
– Press Power Off.
– Switch the CB1 OFF.
– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:
- Put the power control in local mode:
– Remove the cable which is attached
to the MCC card (01A-X0H).
Ÿ Using Power Control, scroll till
the value is 3.
Exchange the MCC card, install the cable
on the MCC card. Go to Step 006.
Ÿ Press Validate.
- Press Power Off.
005
– Press Power Off.
– Switch the CB1 OFF. Refer to
Figure 4-40 on page 4-34
– Switch the CB1 OFF.
– Attention: Use the ESD kit and
Exchange the DFA card (01A-X0G). Continue
with Step 006.
procedures.
– Refer to Figure 4-9 on page 4-11.
– Unplug the DFA card (01A-X0G).
006
– Attention: The following sequence
– Reinstall any remaining unplugged cards.
– Press Power On Reset.
should always be observed.
– Remove the cable which is attached to the
MCC card (01A-X0H).
– Switch the CB1 ON.
Is an error detected during IML?
Yes No
– Unplug the MCC card (01A-X0H).
– Press Power On Reset.
– Switch the CB1 ON.
007
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
Is code 07E displayed?
Yes No
008
002
Is the panel code displaying the same code as
when you started this MAP?
Yes No
– Press Power Off.
– Switch the CB1 OFF.
– Replug all cards and reinstall the
cable on the MCC card.
009
Exchange the MPC card. Go to Step 006.
Go to “3745 Control Panel Codes” on
page 1-15 and follow the procedure given
by the table.
003
– Press Power Off.
010
– Switch the CB1 OFF.
– Replug the MCC card (01A-X0H).
Go to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
– Install the cable to the MCC card
(01A-X0H).
– Press Power On Reset.
– Switch the CB1 ON.
(Step 003 continues)
2-4 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
MAP 3220: Undefined Panel Message
Symptom Explanation
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
The message on the control panel
is undefined
Ÿ Loose cables/cards
Ÿ PCC card failing
Ÿ Control panel failing
Ÿ MPC card failing
Ÿ Microcode update
004 (continued)
001
– If no errors are detected, consult the
Support Center for any microcode update
which may not be reflected in the MIP.
You may have loose cables and/or cards.
If the nature of the fault does not allow control
panel actions, exchange the FRU group 37. Go to
page “3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
Have you received more information
from support?
Yes No
– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:
Ÿ Put the power control in local mode:
005
– Using Power Control, scroll till the
value is 3.
– Exchange the FRU group 22. Go to
“3745 FRU Group Table” on
page 1-49.
– Press Validate.
Ÿ Press Power Off.
– Switch the CB1 OFF.
006
– Take action as directed.
– Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
– Refer to Figure 4-9 on page 4-11.
Is the problem solved?
Yes No
– Carefully check and reseat any loose cables or
cards (especially the MPC, PCC, and MSC).
007
– Switch the CB1 ON.
– Exchange the FRU group 22. Go
to “3745 FRU Group Table” on
page 1-49.
Are Power Control and Service Mode indica-
tors displayed on the control panel?
Yes No
008
002
– In the CE Leaving Procedure you will be
instructed to set the time of day clock,
and set any required scheduled power
ON time.
The initial power checkouts on the PLC card
did not complete successfully.
– Exchange the FRU group 37. Go to “3745
FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
Go to page “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
003
009
– Press Function on the control panel until the
MOSS IML function 1 is displayed.
Did the unexpected hex code occur while you
were using the MIP for another reason?
Yes No
– Press Validate.
– Press Power On Reset.
010
Go to Step 008.
011
– When the IML is complete, retry the operation
that displayed the unexpected hex display code.
Is the unexpected hex display code problem
resolved?
Yes No
Restart with Chapter 1, “START: How to Begin
Troubleshooting” on page 1-1.
004
Referring to “How to Run the Control Panel
Test” on page 3-8, run the diagnostic. If an
FRU group is called, go to “3745 FRU
Group Table” on page 1-49.
(Step 004 continues)
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
MAP 3230: Console Link Procedure
The display code that sent you to this procedure
defines the connector or cable referred to in this
procedure.
006 (continued)
– or –
If any other code is displayed, go to “3745
Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15 and
follow the instructions.
Ÿ 1A0 or 1A1 local
Ÿ 1A3 or 1A4 remote
Ÿ 1A6 or 1A7 RSF.
007
001
The console wrap plug could be faulty.
– A console wrap plug should be installed at the
3745 console connector (see Figure 2-1), or at
the far end of the cable which should be discon-
nected from the relevant console/modem. See
Table 2-1 for the wrapplug part number to be
used.
Change the console wrap plug and go to step 7
on page 3-6, or exchange the FRU group 26 on
page 1-51. Go to page 1-49.
Table 2-1. Wrap plug PN
PN
6398697
2667737
26f0320
R
Console Type
31XX
3727
Personal computer or
PS/2*
E
M
O
T
L
O
C
A
L
R
S
F
E
Was a console wrap plug installed?
Yes No
002
Install the console wrap plug and go to Step
7 of “How to Run the Console Link Test for
3745 Models 130, 150, 160, and 170” on
page 3-6.
J1
J2
J3
003
Was the console wrap plug installed on the
Location: 01R
cable?
Figure 2-1. Console Outputs
Yes No
004
The console wrap plug could be faulty.
Change it and go to Step 7 on page 3-6, or
exchange the FRU group 26 on page 1-51
(see page 1-49).
005
– Install a console wrap plug at the 3745 console
connector (see Figure 2-1) and refer to Step 7
on page 3-6 to repeat the test.
Is the code displayed the same as the one with
which you entered this procedure?
Yes No
006
If 1A1, 1A4, or 1A7 is displayed, the cable
from the 3745 is faulty.
– Repair or exchange the cable.
– Verify the repair by re-running the console
link test with the console wrap plug
installed on the cable.
(Step 006 continues)
2-6 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
3745 Line Adapter MAPs
MAP 3500: Activate/Deactivate Line Problem or Line Errors on the
TSS
Symptom Explanation
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
You are unable to activate or deac-
tivate a line, or errors are occurring
while lines are running.
Ÿ See below
006 (continued)
001
Diagnostics have detected an error. With
the diagnostic reference code, go to “Diag-
nostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000”
on page 4-99.
– Ensure that the customer has completed his
Problem Determination guide procedure.
If not done, follow this problem determination
procedure yourself before continuing this map.
007
Does the problem still exist?
Yes No
– Go to “Disabling Procedure 0150: Preparing
LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on
page 1-69 for LIC type 1-6.
002
– Problem is solved.
003
– Follow the procedure until you have run the
RC01 (for LIC type 1-4) or RH59 (for LIC type
5, 6) routine of the TSS diagnostics with the
appropriate wrap plug/cable installed.
– Using the 3745 console, determine the number
of the line adapter driving the suspected line as
follows:
– Then return here.
Did the diagnostics run error free?
Yes No
1. From Menu 3, select the TSS services by
entering TSS in the selection area.
008
2. From the TSS services screen, choose
select/release by entering 1 in the selection
area.
Diagnostics have detected an error. With
the diagnostic reference code, go to “Diag-
nostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000”
on page 4-99.
3. On the displayed select/release screen,
enter the address of the suspected line.
The line adapter number will be displayed in
the machine status area (MSA) and in the
selection area.
009
The problem has not been resolved.
4. Enter REL in the input area to release the
– Collect any related RECMS (MDR) records and
contact your support structure for assistance.
Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
line adapter
Does the operator accept to deactivate all the
lines attached to this line adapter?
Yes No
004
Go to Step 009.
005
Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a
TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62
and follow the procedure until you have run the
TSS diagnostics for this line adapter (scanner).
Then return here.
Did the diagnostics run error free?
Yes No
006
(Step 006 continues)
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
MAP 3520: Activate/Deactivate Ring Problems or Ring Errors on the
TRSS
Symptom Explanation
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
You are unable to activate or deac-
tivate a ring, or errors are occurring
while rings are running.
Ÿ See below
001
– Ensure that the customer has completed his
Problem Determination guide procedure.
If not done, follow this problem determination
procedure yourself before continuing this map.
Does the problem still exist?
Yes No
002
– Problem is solved.
003
– Using the 3745 console, determine the number
of the TRA driving the suspected ring as
follows:
1. From Menu 3, select the TRSS services by
entering TRS in the selection area.
2. From the TRSS services screen, choose
select/release by entering 1 in the selection
area.
The TRA numbers will be displayed with the ring
addresses connected to.
Does the operator accept to deactivate all the
lines attached to this adapter?
Yes No
004
Go to Step 007.
005
– Go to Step 2c on page 1-66 and follow the dis-
abling procedure until you have run the TRSS
diagnostics for this line adapter (TRA).
– Then return here.
Did the diagnostics run error free?
Yes No
006
Diagnostics have detected an error. With
the diagnostic reference code, go to “Diag-
nostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000”
on page 4-99.
007
The problem has not been resolved. Collect any
related RECMS (MDR) records and call your
support structure for assistance. Refer to “Con-
tacting Support” on page A-1.
2-8 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
MAP 3530: Activate/Deactivate Line Problems or Line Errors on the
HPTSS/ESS
Symptom Explanation
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
You are unable to activate or deac-
tivate a line, or errors are occurring
while lines are running.
Ÿ See below
001
007
– Ensure that the customer has completed his
Problem Determination guide procedure.
– Replace the modem cable on the failing port by
the wrap plug (PN 58X9349 for V.35, PN
58X9354 for X.21, or PN 70X8670 for ESS).
If not done, follow this problem determination
procedure yourself before continuing this map.
– Update the CDF. Run the VI and VK for V.35,
VJ and VK for X.21, or UF02 and UF03 for ESS
routines of the HPTSS or ESS diagnostics.
Does the problem still exist?
Yes No
– Return here.
002
Did the diagnostics run error free?
Yes No
– Problem is solved.
003
008
– Using the 3745 console, determine the number
of the line adapter driving the suspected line as
follows:
Diagnostics have detected an error. With
the diagnostic reference code, go to “Diag-
nostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000”
on page 4-99.
1. From Menu 3, select the TSS services by
entering TSS in the selection area.
009
2. From the TSS services screen, choose
select/release by entering 1 in the selection
area.
The problem has not been resolved, collect any
related RECMS (MDR) records and contact your
support structure for assistance. Refer to “Con-
tacting Support” on page A-1.
3. On the displayed select/release screen,
enter the address of the suspected line.
The line adapter number will be displayed in
the machine status area (MSA) and in the
selection area.
4. Enter REL in the input area to release the
line adapter.
Does the operator accept to deactivate all the
lines attached to this adapter?
Yes No
004
Go to Step 009.
005
– Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a
TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on
page 1-62 and follow the procedure until you
have run the HPTSS/ESS diagnostics for this
line adapter. Then return here.
Did the diagnostics run error free?
Yes No
006
Diagnostics have detected an error. With
the diagnostic reference code, go to “Diag-
nostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000”
on page 4-99.
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
3745 Channel MAPs
MAP 3700: CA Isolation Procedure
You are here for a channel reported problem at
the host console or you are unable to load or
dump the control program for a channel-attached
3745.
Symptom Explanation
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Condition code 3 (CC3)
Interface control check
Channel data check
CPU hang
Load/dump CP problem
CA enable not possible
Ÿ Channel disabled
Ÿ CADR card
Ÿ CAL card
Ÿ External conditions:
– Channel
– Channel cables
– Other Control Units
– Switch unit
If you have an intermittent problem, consider that
any of the conditions given in the above table can
cause the problem.
006 (continued)
Is everything OK?
Yes No
If the 3745 is stopped in IPL phase 4 and a U is
displayed in the MSA: exchange the CAL card of
the channel.
007
Correct the problem and re-initiate unit
initialization.
001
Is an interface control check or channel data
check reported?
Yes No
008
– Select the CAS function with option 1 (display
CA statuses).
002
Is INIT status displayed in the Internal Status
field?
On the 3745 console select, the CID func-
tion (from Menu 2) and check at the E/D
request field for the involved channel
adapter.
Yes No
009
Is ERRXXX or *** displayed?
Yes No
Is E displayed?
Yes No
010
003
For any other status displayed, see
IBM 3745 Service Functions and
contact your support structure if the
problem can not be corrected.
– Enter E in the CHANGE E/D
REQUEST ==> area.
– Press SEND and re-initiate the
operation.
011
004
– Ask the customer to disable the channel
adapter.
Go to Step 006.
Is NCP loaded?
Yes No
005
Go to Step 011.
012
006
Referring to "“How to Run Internal
Function Tests” on page 3-9", run the
diagnostics on the channel adapter.
(Step 012 continues)
– Check the physical path (channel switch, host
channel, and channel cables).
(Step 006 continues)
2-10 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
012 (continued)
down in the command ===> field.
Did the diagnostics run error free?
Yes No
– Press SEND twice.
– Go to Step 012 on page 2-10.
013
020
Go to “Action to Take After a
Diagnostic Run or an FRU
Exchange” on page 4-99.
– Refer to the IBM 3745 Communication Con-
troller Service Function (CDF chapter) and
check the CDF for a correct configuration.
014
Is the CDF OK?
Yes No
– Ask the operator to put the channel
offline from the host.
021
– Interface cables must be removed
from the 3745.
Correct the CDF and re-initiate the opera-
tion.
– Run routines LG02, LI03, LI04,
LJ03, LK02 and LO01 which need
manual intervention. Refer to “How
to Run Internal Function Tests” on
page 3-9
022
Go to Step 011 on page 2-10
Did the routines run error free?
Yes No
015
Go to “Action to Take After a
Diagnostic Run or an FRU
Exchange” on page 4-99
016
Reconnect the interface cables on the
3745.
If you are here for an interface control
check, determine if the channel works
properly from the host when you set
the Select out bypass switch to the
bypass position. Refer to Figure 4-28
on page 4-25.
Is the channel working properly?
Yes No
017
You probably have an external
problem. Check the interface
cables and the other control
units, if any.
018
– Exchange CADR and CAL. Go to
“Exchange Precautions” on
page 4-1 and refer to “Basic Board,
Cards, Connectors, and
Crossovers” on page 4-5 for the
failing channel CADR location.
019
– At the 3745 console select Menu 3 and
enter CAS for channel adapter services.
– Enter 4 for concurrent mode commands.
– Enter the channel adapter number corre-
sponding to the suspected CA, in the CA
number ===> field. Enter SHT for shut-
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
3745 Power MAPs
MAP 3900: Overcurrent on Power Supply 1
Symptom Explanation
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Overcurrent on power supply 1.
Ÿ Short circuit in:
– - MOSS Board
or cable from 01A-Y0E4 to 01F-A1J2
– - Basic Board
or flat cable from 01F-A1TB1/3 to 01G-A1YF/H
or flat cable from 01F-A1TB2/4 to 01G-A1YA/D
or cable from 01F-A1J4 to 01G-A1YE
– - any LIB1 or LIB2
or cable from 01F-A1J5 to 01M-A1A3
or cable from 01F-A1J6 to 01M-A2A3
or cable from 01F-A1J8 via 01L-B1 to 01L-A1A3
or cable from 01F-A1J7 via 01L-B2 to 01L-A2A3
– - HDD or FDD
or cable from 01F-A1J3 to 01D-A1J3 and
01B-A1J2
Ÿ PCC
Ÿ PS1
Power ON executed less than 10
seconds after a power OFF. This is
a normal operation.
001 (continued)
001
– Press Validate.
– Press Power On reset.
Notes:
1. Panel codes 00B and 00C can occur if the
3745 is powered ON less than 10 seconds
after a power OFF. This is a normal operation.
Wait at least 10 seconds after a power OFF
before you try to power ON again.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
002
2. You will have to disconnect (area by area) the
elements connected to PS1. Depending on
the configuration of your 3745, the panel code
00C (overvoltage, undervoltage) can be dis-
played at power ON when one board is dis-
connected. During this MAP consider only
panel code 00B (overcurrent).
– Press Power Off.
– Replug the basic board power cables.
– Unplug the basic board card by card from
01G-A1A2 to 01G-A1X2 and try to power
the 3745 ON after each one.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
Power ON the machine. Wait at least 10
seconds then power ON. If the trouble
remains, continue with this step. If not, gather
all information from the BER file and contact
your support group.
003
– Press Power Off.
– Exchange the faulty card you have
just unplugged when 00B (oc) dis-
appeared.
– Unplug the Basic board power cable 01F-J4
from PS1.
– Unscrew the Basic board 5V laminar bus
01F-A1TB1/2/3 and 4. Refer to Figure 4-36 on
page 4-31.
004
– Exchange the basic board. Go to “Basic
Board Exchange Procedure” on
page 4-77.
– Power ON the 3745 as follows:
Ÿ Set the power control in local mode:
– Using Power Control scroll till the
value is 3, local mode.
(Step 001 continues)
005
(Step 005 continues)
2-12 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
005 (continued)
012 (continued)
– Replug the basic board power cables.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
– Unplug the HDD/FDD power cable 01F-A1J3
from PS1.
013
– Press Power On Reset.
– Exchange the DMUX. Go to
“DMUX Exchange Procedure” on
page 4-39.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
006
014
– Press Power Off.
– Exchange the LIB1 01M-A2. Go to “LIC
Board Type 1 and 3 Exchange
Procedure” on page 4-84.
– Replug the HDD/FDD power cable.
– Unplug the FDD power cable 01B-A1J2.
Refer to Figure 4-33 on page 4-29.
015
– Press Power On Reset.
– Replug the LIB1 power cable.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
– Unplug the LIB1 power cable (01F-A1J5) from
the PS1, if any. If there is no cable, go to Step
021.
007
Press Power On Reset.
– Exchange the FDD. Go to “FDD
Exchange Procedure” on
page 4-52.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
008
016
– Exchange the HDD. Go to “HDD
Exchange Procedure” on page 4-56.
– Replug the LIB1 power cable.
– Unplug all LICs of LIB1 from 01M-A1C2
to 01M-A1K2 with their cables.
009
– Press Power On Reset.
– Replug the HDD/FDD power cable.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
– Unplug the LIB1 power cable (01F-A1J6) from
PS1, if any. If there is no cable, go to Step 015.
017
Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
– replug the LICs one by one and
exchange the faulty one. Go to
“LIC Exchange Procedure” on
page 4-44.
010
018
– Replug the LIB1 power cable.
– Unplug all LICs of LIB1 from 01M-A2C2
to 01M-A2K2 with their cable.
– Unplug the DMUX 01M-A1B2 with its
cables.
– Press Power On Reset.
– Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
011
019
– Relug the LICs, one by one, and
exchange the faulty one. Go to
“LIC Exchange Procedure” on
page 4-44.
– Exchange the DMUX. Go to “DMUX
Exchange Procedure” on
page 4-39.
020
012
– Exchange the LIB1 01M-A1. Go to “LIC
Board Type 1 and 3 Exchange
Procedure” on page 4-84.
– Unplug the DMUX (01M-A2B2) with its
cables.
– Press Power On Reset.
(Step 012 continues)
021
(Step 021 continues)
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
021 (continued)
028 (continued)
– Replug the LIB1 power cable.
– Replug the LIB2 power cable.
– Unplug the LIB2 or LIB1 power cable 01F-A1J7
from PS1. if any. If there is no cable go to Step
027.
– Unplug all LICs from LIB2 from 01L-A1C2
to 01L-A1K2 with their cables.
– Press Power On Reset.
– Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
029
022
– replug the LICs one by one and
exchange the faulty one. Go to
“LIC Exchange Procedure” on
page 4-44.
– Replug the LIB2 or LIB1 power cable.
– Unplug all LICs of LIB1 or LIB2 from
01L-A2C2 to 01L-A2K2 with their cables.
030
– Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
– Unplug the SMUX (01L-A1B2) with its
cables.
– Press Power On Reset.
023
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
– Replug the LICs one by one and
exchange the faulty one. Go to
“LIC Exchange Procedure” on
page 4-44.
031
– Exchange the SMUX. Go to
“SMUXA/B Exchange Procedure”
on page 4-41.
024
– Unplug the SMUX or DMUX (01L-A2B2)
with its cables.
032
– Press Power On Reset.
– Exchange the LIB2 (01L-A1). Go to “LIC
Board Type 2 Exchange Procedure” on
page 4-88.
Is panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
025
033
– Exchange the SMUX. Go to
“SMUXA/B Exchange Procedure”
on page 4-41.
– Replug the LB1 power cable
– Unplug the MOSS cards (from 01A-X0E to
01A-X0H). Do not remove the PCC card
(01A-X0B).
– For the DMUX go to “DMUX
Exchange Procedure” on
page 4-39.
– Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
026
– Exchange the LIB1 (01M-A1). Go to “LIC
Board Type 1 and 3 Exchange
Procedure” on page 4-84.
034
– Press Power Off.
– or exhange the LIB2. Go to “LIC Board
Type 2 Exchange Procedure” on
page 4-88.
– Replug the MOSS card by card and try to
power 3745 ON after each one.
– Exchange the faulty card you replugged
when the over current appeared.
027
035
– Replug LIB2 or LIB1 power cable.
– Unplug LIB1 power cable 01F-A1J8 from PS1.
– Press Power On Reset.
– Exchange the PCC card (01A-X0B). Go to
“Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
036
028
(Step 028 continues)
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
2-14 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
037
– Exchange the PS1. Go to “PS1 Exchange
Procedure” on page 4-67.
– Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
038
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
039
– Exchange the MOSS board. Go to “MOSS
Board Exchange Procedure” on page 4-92.
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
MAP 3905: Power ON Problem in Host Mode or Host Power Sequence
Problem
Symptom Explanation
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Ÿ The Power Control is not in host mode
Ÿ Host or host cable problem
Ÿ Remote power control box (EPO)
Ÿ PCC card
Power ON is not possible in host
mode.
The host system detects errors
during the power ON sequence.
Attention
Pin 1
Pin 4
Power may be present when nothing is dis-
played on the control panel.
001
When the power control is in host mode, a 1 is
displayed on the control panel.
Is the power control in host mode?
Yes No
Pin 3
J7
Pin 6
002
J5
J6
J8
– If the panel is blank; go to “Power MAP
3930: Power Control Subsystem
Problems” on page 2-21.
Figure 2-2. EPO Location 01S
007 (continued)
– If not, put the power control in host mode:
Is 28 V present on pin 4?
Yes No
Ÿ Using Power Control, scroll till the
value is 1.
008
Ÿ Press Validate.
Ÿ Re-initiate the command.
Continue with Step 003.
– Exchange the FRU group 53 “3745 FRU
Group Table” on page 1-49
009
003
There is a Host problem, or an external host cable
problem.
Is the 3745 powered ON?
Yes No
If no problem was found, contact your support
structure. Refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
004
Go to Step 010.
005
010
– Try to power ON in local mode:
– Check for 28 V between the frame ground and
the back of the host connector which initiated
the command at EPO 01S, pins 3 and 4. Refer
to Figure 2-2 and to Figure 4-2 on page 4-4.
Ÿ Using Power Control scroll till the value is
3.
Ÿ Press Validate.
Is Power ON possible in local mode?
Yes No
Is 28 V present on pin 3?
Yes No
006
011
There is a host problem, or an external host
cable problem.
Go to “Power MAP 3930: Power Control
Subsystem Problems” on page 2-21.
If no problem was found, contact your
support structure. Refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
012
– Press Power Off.
007
– Put the power control in host mode:
(Step 012 continues)
(Step 007 continues)
2-16 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
012 (continued)
Ÿ Using Power Control scroll, till the value is
1.
Ÿ Press Validate.
Ÿ Re-initiate the command.
Is the 3745 powered ON?
Yes No
013
– Check for the 28 V between frame ground
and Power Hold/Power Pick on EPO
01S on:
Ÿ Any J Connector pin 5 if one is free
(J5/6/7/8)
or
Ÿ The back of any host connector if the
four are used.
Pin 1
Pin 4
Pin 3
J7
Pin 6
J5
J6
J8
Are the two lines ON?
Yes No
014
There is a host problem, or an
external host cable problem.
If no problem was found, contact your
support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
015
– Exchange the PCC card. Go to
“Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.
016
– Intermittent problem. The host, host cable, or
PCC card can be suspected.
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
MAP 3910: Overcurrent on Power Supply 2
Symptom Explanation
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Overcurrent on power supply 2.
Ÿ Short circuit in:
Ÿ Fan1
Ÿ Fan2
Ÿ PCC
Ÿ Panel
Ÿ PS2
005 (continued)
001
Is the panel code 00E still displayed?
Yes No
– Unplug the FAN1 power cable 01H-B1-J7 from
PS2.
– Power the 3745 ON as follows:
006
Ÿ put the power control in local mode:
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
– Using Power Control, scroll till the
value is 3.
007
– Press Validate.
– Exchange the control panel. Go to “Control
Panel Exchange Procedure” on page 4-46.
Ÿ Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00E still displayed?
Yes No
– Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00E still displayed?
Yes No
002
– Press Power Off.
008
– Exchange the Fan1. Go to “Fan 1
Exchange Procedure” on page 4-50.
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
003
009
– Replug the Fan1 power cable.
– Exchange the PS2. Go to “PS2 and Primary
Power Box Exchange Procedure” on page 4-69.
– Unplug the Fan2 power cable (01H-B1-J6) from
PS2.
– Power the 3745 ON as follow:
Ÿ Put the power control in local mode:
– Using Power Control, scroll till the
value is 3.
– Press Validate.
Ÿ Press Power On reset.
Is the panel code 00E still displayed?
Yes No
004
– Press Power Off.
– Exchange the Fan2. Go to “Fan 2
Exchange Procedure” on page 4-51.
005
– Replug the Fan2 power cable.
– Exchange the PCC card (01A-X0B). Go to
“Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
– Press Power On Reset.
(Step 005 continues)
2-18 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
Power MAP 3920: Air Flow Detector Fault
Symptom Explanation
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Air flow detector fault for Fan1 or
Fan2
Ÿ Fan1 or Fan2
Ÿ PCC
Ÿ PS2
Ÿ Tripped CP3
005 (continued)
001
– Check for the presence of -38V dc between
pins 1 and 2 of the power supply 2 (connector
J7) while attempting to power ON the machine,
(Pin 1 ground and pin 2 -38 V).
If the problem is intermittent, consider that any of
the conditions given in the above table can cause
the problem.
Panel code 030 indicates Fan1.
J7
J6
Panel codes 031 or 032 indicate Fan2.
Is the code 030 displayed?
Yes No
1 2
1 2
002
Is voltage present and within
tolerence ± 10%?
Yes No
– Disconnect the Fan2 power cable from
the front side of the power supply 2,
(location 01H-J6). Refer to Figure 4-37
on page 4-32.
006
– Check for the presence of -38 V dc
between pins 1 and 2 of the power supply
2 (PS2) connector J6 while attempting to
power ON the machine.
– Reconnect the Fan1 power cable to
01H-J7.
– Exchange PS2. Go to “PS2 and Primary
Power Box Exchange Procedure” on
page 4-69.
(Pin 1 ground and pin 2 -38 V.)
J7
J6
007
– Reconnect the Fan1 power cable to 01H-J7.
1 2
1 2
– Check the cable from 01A-Y0A1 to 01K-J1 for
correct setting.
Is voltage present and within
tolerence ± 10%?
Yes No
If this cable is correctly fitted, exchange the
FRU group 40 “3745 FRU Group Table” on
page 1-49.
003
– Reconnect the Fan2 power cable to
01H-J6.
– Exchange the PS2. Go to “PS2
and Primary Power Box Exchange
Procedure” on page 4-69.
004
– Reconnect the Fan2 power cable to
01H-J6.
– Check cable from 01A-Y0A1 to 01E-J1 for
correct setting. If this cable is correctly
fitted, exchange the FRU group 41 “3745
FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
005
– Disconnect the Fan1 power cable from the front
side of the power supply 2, (location 01H-J7).
Refer to Figure 4-37 on page 4-32.
(Step 005 continues)
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
Power MAP 3925: Scheduled Power on Problems
Symptom Explanation
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
The machine will not power On as
scheduled
Ÿ Wrong setting of scheduled time
Ÿ Wrong setting of power control (should be 2)
Ÿ Battery
Ÿ PCC card
Attention
007 (continued)
You have a dead battery.
Power may be present when nothing is dis-
played on the control panel.
– Exchange it and record this action. Go to
“Battery Exchange Procedure” on page 4-48.
Note: Before starting maintenance, check the
control panel to ensure that the Power Control
display is set to 3 (Local).
If yes, proceed with Step 001.
If not, perform the following:
1. Press Power Control until 3 is displayed in
the power control window.
2. Press Validate.
001
– Press Power On.
– Check at the ac present lamp to the right of the
Power On pushbutton.
Is the ac present lamp ON?
Yes No
002
You have a power ON problem. Go to
“Power MAP 3930: Power Control Sub-
system Problems” on page 2-21.
003
Is the code 007 displayed at the control panel?
Yes No
004
– Check with the operator that the data
entered matches the actual day and time:
– Select the time services screen, and
display Scheduled Power On data.
Is the data correct?
Yes No
005
With the right scheduled information,
re-initiate the command.
006
Exchange the FRU group 38. Go to “3745
FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
007
(Step 007 continues)
2-20 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
Power MAP 3930: Power Control Subsystem Problems
Symptom Explanation
Panel display or power indicator
not lit.
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Ÿ UEPO
Ÿ CB1 or any CP tripped
Ÿ PS2
Machine will not Power ON.
Ÿ PCC card or Control Panel
Attention
Power may be present when nothing is dis-
played on the control panel.
Power supplies are sealed replaceable
units.
B1
001
A1
– Check at the control panel.
Are all indicators OFF or **** displayed?
Yes No
C1
J1
002
Go to Step 024 on page 2-23.
003
– Check for the presence of 28 V at the UEPO
switch (see Figure 2-3). Use a CE meter and
check for 28 V between:
Battery
Ÿ Position 5 and the ground of the switch on
Rear View
the 3745 Models 130-170
Or
Ÿ Positions A2 and the ground of the switch
on the 3745 Model 17A.
EPO
Are 28 volts present?
Yes No
1
4
5
1
2
2
6
3
004
3
D
C
B
A
Wiring Side
– Check the position of CP2 on the primary
power box.
Is CP2 ON?
Yes No
Detail C 01C-C1SW1
Figure 2-3. UEPO Switch
005
007 (continued)
– Switch CB1 OFF.
– Switch CP2 ON.
– Switch CB1 ON.
– Check that the voltage select switch
(01H-B1/SW1) is correct for the
input voltage. Refer to Figure 4-37
on page 4-32.
Does CP2 drop again?
Yes No
Is it correct?
Yes No
006
008
Power ON the 3745.
Set the voltage select switch
(SW1) to the correct position.
Go to Step 005.
007
(Step 007 continues)
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
009
016
Exchange the PS2. Go to “PS2 and
Primary Power Box Exchange
Procedure” on page 4-69.
Exchange the PS2. Go to “PS2 and
Primary Power Box Exchange Procedure”
on page 4-69.
010
017
– Check the position of the CB1 on the
primary power box. Refer to Figure 4-1
on page 4-3 for location.
– Check Fuse 1. Refer to Figure 4-37 on
page 4-32 for location.
Is the fuse OK?
Yes No
Is the CB1 in the ON position?
Yes No
018
011
– Switch CB1 OFF.
– Exchange the fuse.
– Switch CB1 ON.
– Switch the CB1 ON.
– Power ON the 3745.
Is the 3745 powering ON now?
Yes No
– If the fuse blows again, exchange the
FRU group 37.
Go to “3745 FRU Group Table” on
page 1-49.
012
If not, re-initiate the operation.
Go to Step 001 on page 2-21
019
013
– Measure the dc voltages at 01A-A1-J3 (Location
: 01b, refer to Figure 4-1 on page 4-3.)
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
VDC
Vmin
Vmax
Test Point
014
+ 5.00
+28.00
+ 4.75
+24.90
+ 5.25
+29.50
pin 22
pin 21
– Check the ac main voltage:
Ÿ Power the 3745 OFF as follows:
01A-A1-J3
01A-Y0
– Put the power control in local
mode:
C
A B
D E
- Using Power Control, scroll
till the value is 3.
- Press Validate.
– Press Power Off.
Refer to Figure 4-35 on page 4-30
and do the following:
Ÿ Remove the PS1 input power cord at
the Primary power box connector J1.
Ÿ Connect a voltmeter to J1.
Ÿ Press Power On Reset.
13
Ÿ You have approximately two seconds
1
to read the ac voltage.
Is the voltage correct?
Yes No
25
28 V
5 V
14
015
– Check for one of the following:
Ÿ If the machine is correctly wired
for the customer's input voltage.
Ÿ If you have a short circuit in the
primary control box.
Ÿ If the customer's supply is
defective.
Are both voltages present and within toler-
ance?
Yes No
020
(Step 020 continues)
2-22 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
020 (continued)
If it does not, go to “MAP 3905: Power ON
Problem in Host Mode or Host Power
Sequence Problem” on page 2-16.
Is only +5 V present and within toler-
ance?
Yes No
030
021
Is the UEPO switch (on the control panel), in
the Power Enable position?
Yes No
– Exchange the Primary Power Box.
Go to “PS2 and Primary Power Box
Exchange Procedure” on
page 4-69.
031
.
022
– Put the UEPO switch in Power Enable
position as follows (see Figure 2-3 on
page 2-21):
– Exchange the PS2. Go to “PS2 and
Primary Power Box Exchange Procedure”
on page 4-69.
Ÿ Loosen the two screws.
Ÿ Move the metal slider completely to
023
the left.
Ÿ Set the switch to I.
Ÿ Move the metal slider to the right.
Ÿ Secure the screws.
Exchange the FRU group 37. Go to “3745 FRU
Group Table” on page 1-49.
024
Retry the operation that brought you here.
.
– At the power control window, check the mode
validity.
032
Is Power On indicator ON?
Yes No
Ÿ 1 = Host
Ÿ 2 = Network
Ÿ 3 = Local
033
Does the control panel display a
hexadecimal code?
Yes No
Is the power mode in accordance with cus-
tomer requirements?
Yes No
034
025
– Exchange the FRU group 37. Go
to “3745 FRU Group Table” on
page 1-49.
Correct the power mode and try again.
026
Is the power mode in local 3 displayed in the
power window?
Yes No
035
– Record the value of the hexadecimal
code at the control panel.
027
Go to “3745 Control Panel Codes” on
page 1-15 and follow the action to be taken.
– Press Power Control until the correct
mode is displayed in the power control
window.
036
– Press Validate.
Normally (when the Power ON Indicator is lit),
relay K1 in the primary control box is closed and
the ac voltage is distributed to the rest of the
machine.
Continue with Step 028.
028
Nevertheless, in case of a severe under voltage of
the ac mains, the Power ON command may be
memorized but not fully executed.
.
– Press Power On.
Is the 3745 failing to power ON?
Yes No
The Power On lamp is turned ON but the K1
remains OFF.
Consequently, all power supplies and blowers
remain OFF.
029
– You may have an intermittent problem.
Before you continue, perform another
Power OFF/ON to check that the problem
still exists in that mode.
– Using a CE meter, check for 28 volts between
position 2 and ground on the UEPO switch (see
Figure 2-3 on page 2-21).
(Step 036 continues)
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
036 (continued)
Is 28 V within tolerance between 24.9 V and
29.5 V?
Yes No
037
Exchange the PS2. Go to “PS2 and Primary
Power Box Exchange Procedure” on
page 4-69.
038
Exchange the FRU group 37, go to “3745 FRU
Group Table” on page 1-49.
2-24 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
Power MAP 3935: Power OFF not Possible in Host Mode
Symptom Explanation
Power OFF is not possible in host
mode
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Ÿ Another connected host is still power ON.
Ÿ The power control is not in host mode.
Ÿ Host or host cable problem.
Ÿ PCC card.
Attention
007 (continued)
Does the Power On Indicator now go OFF?
Yes No
Power may be present when nothing is dis-
played on the control panel.
008
001
Go to “Power MAP 3945: Power OFF not
Possible in Local Mode” on page 2-26.
Is the host (that which initiated the command)
the last host connected to be power ON?
Yes No
009
– Check for 24 V between the frame ground and
Power Hold line on EPO 01S on:
002
Ÿ Any J Connector pin 5 if one is free
– The 3745 will be powered OFF only by
the last connected host.
(J5/6/7/8)
or
003
Ÿ The back of any host connector if the four
When the power control is in host mode, a 1 is
are used.
displayed on the control panel.
Refer to Figure 2-4 and Figure 4-2 on
page 4-4.
Is the power control in host mode?
Yes No
004
Pin 1
Pin 4
– Set the power control to host mode.
– Using Power Control, scroll till the
value is 1.
– Press Validate.
– Power OFF in host mode.
Is power OFF now possible in host
mode?
Yes No
Pin 3
J7
Pin 6
005
Go to Step 007.
006
J5
J6
J8
Figure 2-4. EPO Location 01S
Is the power hold dropped?
Yes No
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
010
007
There is a host problem or an external host
cable problem.
– Set the power control to local mode.
– Using power control, scroll till the value
is 3.
If no problem is found, contact your support
structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on
page A-1.
– Press Validate.
– Power OFF.
(Step 007 continues)
011
– Exchange the PCC card. Go to “Exchange
Precautions” on page 4-1
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
Power MAP 3945: Power OFF not Possible in Local Mode
Symptom Explanation
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Power OFF is not possible in local
mode
Ÿ The power control is not in local mode
Ÿ Relay K1
Ÿ Control Panel
Ÿ PCC
Attention
Power may be present when nothing is dis-
played on the control panel.
001
When the power control is in local mode, a 3 is
displayed at the control panel.
Is the power control in local mode?
Yes No
002
– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:
Ÿ Set the power control to local mode:
– Using Power Control, scroll till
the value is 3.
– Press Validate.
Ÿ Press Power Off.
– Continue whit Step 003.
003
Is the 3745 still powered ON?
Yes No
004
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
005
Are the blowers stopped?
Yes No
006
– Suspect relay K1 located in primary
power box 01H-A2.
Refer to the YZ pages for wiring.
– Repair and re-initiate the command.
– If correct, go to “CE Leaving Procedure”
on page 4-102.
007
– Exchange the FRU group 37 on page 1-51. Go
to “3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
2-26 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
Power MAP 3950: PCC-Detected Error on MOSS Reset
Symptom Explanation
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Incorrect states/sequencing in
MOSS reset signals.
Ÿ MPC
Ÿ MCC
Ÿ DFA
Ÿ PCC
Ÿ PS1
006 (continued)
001
– Press Power Off.
– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:
– Exchange the MPC card (01A-X0E)
Ÿ Set the power control to local mode:
– Exchange the MCC card (01A-X0H)
– Using Power Control, scroll till the
value is 3.
– Press Power On Reset.
Does the same error appear?
Yes No
– Press Validate.
Ÿ Press Power Off.
– Unplug the:
007
Ÿ MCC card (01A-X0H)
Ÿ MPC card (01A-X0E)
Ÿ DFA card (01A-X0G)
– Press Power On Reset.
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
008
Suspect the MOSS board 01A.
Does the same error appear?
Yes No
009
– Press Power Off.
002
– Exchange the PCC card (01A-X0B).
– Replug the:
Ÿ MCC card (01A-X0H)
Ÿ MPC card (01A-X0E)
– Exchange the DFA card (01A-X0G).
– Press Power On Reset.
Does the same error appear?
Yes No
003
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
004
– Press Power Off.
– Exchange the DFA card (01A-X0G).
– Exchange the MPC card (01A-X0E).
– Press Power On Reset.
Does the same error appear?
Yes No
005
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
006
(Step 006 continues)
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
Power MAP 3960: Power OFF not Possible in Network Mode
Symptom Explanation
Power OFF is not possible in
network mode
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Ÿ The power control is not in network mode
Ÿ The Power Off command is not received from the host
Ÿ PUC
Ÿ PCC
Ÿ Host Cable problem
Ÿ 3745 not able to power OFF in local mode
Attention
006 (continued)
Continue at “Power MAP 3945: Power OFF
not Possible in Local Mode” on page 2-26.
Power may be present when nothing is dis-
played on the control panel.
007
– Set the power control to network mode.
001
Ÿ Using Power Control scroll till the value is
2.
To enter this MAP: The NCP must be running
and a network Power Off command must have
been issued.
Ÿ Press Validate.
When the power control is in network mode, a 2 is
displayed at the control panel.
– Power the 3745 On by pressing Power
On/Reset.
Is the power control in network mode?
Yes No
– Select the IFT diagnostics routine AT05.
Is the Power On indicator still lit?
Yes No
002
008
– Set the power control to network mode.
Ÿ Using Power Control scroll till the
value is 2.
You have an NCP or network problem.
Contact your support structure if additional
assistance is required.
Ÿ Press Validate.
009
– Re-initiate the Power OFF command from
the host.
– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:
Continue with Step 003.
Ÿ Set the power control to local mode:
003
– Using Power Control, scroll till the
value is 3.
Is the Power On indicator lit?
Yes No
– Press Validate.
Ÿ Press Power Off.
– Turn the CB1 OFF.
004
– The Power OFF command was suc-
cessful.
– Exchange the PCC card (01A-X0B). Refer to
Figure 4-9 on page 4-11.
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
– Turn the CB1 ON.
– Press Power On Reset.
005
– Set the power control to network mode.
Set the power control in local mode.
Ÿ Using Power Control scroll till the value is 3.
Ÿ Press validate.
Ÿ Using Power Control scroll till the value is
2.
Ÿ Press Validate.
Press Power Off.
– Select the IFT diagnostics and run routine
AT05.
Does the Power On indicator go OFF?
Yes No
(Step 009 continues)
006
(Step 006 continues)
2-28 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
009 (continued)
013 (continued)
Is the 3745 still powered ON?
Yes No
Is the 3745 still powered ON?
Yes No
010
014
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
011
015
– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:
– Re-install the PUC card (01G-V).
Ÿ Set the power control to local mode:
You have gone through the entire procedure and
the problem is still present. Contact your support
structure for further assistance.
– Using Power Control, scroll till the
value is 3.
– Press Validate.
Ÿ Press Power Off.
– Turn the CB1 OFF.
– Re-install the PCC card.
– Exchange the MCC card (01A-X0H). Refer to
Figure 4-9 on page 4-11.
– Turn the CB1 ON.
– Press Power On Reset.
– Set the power control to network mode.
Ÿ Using Power Control, scroll till the value is
2.
Ÿ Press Validate.
– Select the IFT diagnostics and run routine
AT05.
Is the 3745 still powered ON?
Yes No
012
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
013
– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:
Ÿ Set the power control to local mode:
– Using Power Control, scroll till the
value is 3.
– Press Validate.
Ÿ Press Power Off.
– Re-install the MCC card (01A-X0H).
– Exchange the PUC card (01G-V).
– Set the power control to network mode.
Ÿ Using Power Control, scroll till the value is
2.
Ÿ Press Validate.
– Select the IFT diagnostics and run routine
AT05.
(Step 013 continues)
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
Power MAP 3970: PCC-Detected Error on CCU Reset or on Remote
Power OFF
Symptom Explanation
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Incorrect states/sequencing in CCU
reset signals.
Ÿ SCTL
Ÿ PUC
Ÿ PCC
Ÿ PS1
Ÿ Cable from 01A-Y0A3 to 01G-A1YP on page 1-52
Ÿ Cable from 01A-Y0A2 to 01G-A1YR on page 1-52
Basic board.
001
– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:
007
Ÿ Set the power control to local mode:
– Reconnect the cable connector.
– Using Power Control, scroll till the
value is 3.
– Disconnect cable connector 01A-Y0-A2 from the
MOSS board. Refer to Figure 4-9 on
page 4-11.
– Press Validate.
Ÿ Press Power Off.
– Press Power On Reset.
does the same error appear?
Yes No
– Disconnect cable connector 01A-Y0A3 from the
MOSS board. Refer to Figure 4-9 on
page 4-11.
008
Go to Step 002
009
– Press Power On Reset.
does the same error appear?
Yes No
002
– Reconnect the cable connector.
– Press Power Off.
(From step 008)
– Reconnect the cable connector.
– Exchange the PUC card (01G-V)
– Press Power On Reset.
– Exchange the PCC card (01A-X0B)
Does the same error appear?
Yes No
003
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
004
– Press Power Off.
– Exchange the PUC card (01G-V)
– Exchange the SCTL card (01G-W)
– Press Power On Reset.
does the same error appear?
Yes No
005
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
006
Suspect the cable from 01A-Y0A3 to
01G-A1YP on page 1-52 or the cable
01A-Y0A2 to 01G-A1YR on page 1-52 or
2-30 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
3745 LAN MAP
MAP 4500: 3745 Models 17A Permanent Console Link Problem
Symptom Explanation
Console not accessible indicator
Console Message
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Ÿ Service processor
Ÿ Ring
Ÿ Service processor access unit
Ÿ MLA card
001
Is there a panel code displayed on the 3745 control panel?
Yes No
002
Go to “3745 Control Panel Symptoms” on page 1-11.
003
Go to “3745 Control Panel Code” on page 2-32 for control panel code interpretation.
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
3745 Control Panel Code
Table 2-2. 3745 Control Panel Code
3745 Control
Panel Code
Description
Action
B8F
LAN adapter check
Exchange the MLA card.
B90
B91
B92
B93
B94
Hardware init error
Suspect a hardware problem (see Note 1).
Contact your support structure for assistance.
Suspect a hardware problem (see Note 1).
Suspect a ring problem (see Note 1).
Microcode error
Lobe media test failure
Signal loss while opening
Wire fault while opening
Suspect a hardware problem (see Note 1).
B95
B96
B97
B98
B99
B9A
B9B
B9C
B9D
Open frequency error
Suspect a ring problem (see Note 1).
Time out while opening
Ring failure while opening
Ring beaconing while open
Duplicate node address
Open request parameters
Open remove received
Open IMPL force received
No monitor for RPL at open
B9E
B9F
Lobe wire fault at open
Suspect a hardware problem (see Note 1).
Remote station connected
Time out
Suspect a problem in the service processor
or ring problem (see Note 2).
BB0
BB1
BB2
BB3
BB4
BB5
BB6
Link lost
DM/DISC received /acked
FRMR received
SABME received
Ti Timer expired
FMMR sent
Unexpected SABME received
BC0
Permanent ring beaconing
Suspect a ring problem (see Note 1).
BC1
BC2
Lobe wire fault
Auto-removal while
beaconing
Suspect a hardware problem (see Note 1).
BC3
BC4
BD0
Remove received
Auto-removal
Suspect ring problem (see Note 1)
Suspect a hardware problem (see Note 1).
FSM time out
Suspect a problem in the service processor.
(see Note 2)
BE0
Watchdog time out
Notes:
1. Use the Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide, SX27-3710.
2. Check the ring and the service processor. Go to the Service Processor Installation and Maintenance
manual, chapter "Service Processor Problem Determination".
2-32 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
3745 RSF MAP
MAP 4510: 3745 Model 17A Manual Call
You are here because there was a problem in connecting the service processor to RETAIN or because
you want to test this facility.
Perform a manual call using the 3745 or the 3746-900 facilities to check this connection.
The service processor console must be logged ON. If it is not, go to “Console Use for Maintenance” on
page 1-1 (for logging ON) and return here.
Before starting this MAP check the Remote Support facility options using the following procedure:
Ÿ On the MOSS-E View window. Double-click on the service processor icon.
Ÿ The Service Processor Menu window is displayed.
Ÿ Click on Configuration Management.
Ÿ Double-click on Manage Remote Operations.
Ÿ Select Remote operations authorization in the Remote Operation Management window.
Ÿ Click on OK.
Ÿ Ensure that the two following options are selected in the Remote Support Facility window:
– Enable Remote Support Facility
– Generate alerts
Ÿ Select them, if not already done, and click on OK.
Ÿ Click on Cancel to return to the Service Processor Menu.
001
Is there a 3746-900 attached to your 3745?
Yes No
002
Go to Step 006.
003
Ÿ Return to the MOSS-E View window. Double-click on the 3746-900 icon.
Ÿ Click on Problem Management.
Ÿ Double-click on Report Problem Using Remote Support Facilities.
Ÿ Enter a short description in the Problem Analysis window. Testing the RSF link Click on OK.
Ÿ Click on OK, in the Report Problem Using RSF window.
Ÿ Wait for either the alarm Call to RETAIN successful (indicating the normal end of transmission), or
the message Call to RETAIN failed.
Ÿ Write down the alarm number.
Is the alarm Call to RETAIN successful displayed?
Yes No
004
Go to Step 009 on page 2-34.
005
Go top Step 008 on page 2-34.
006
Ÿ Return to the MOSS-E View window. Double-click on the 3745 icon.
Ÿ Click on Problem Management.
(Step 006 continues)
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
006 (continued)
Ÿ Double-click on Report Problem Using Remote Support Facilities.
Ÿ Enter a short description: in the Problem Analysis window, 'Testing the RSF link'.
Ÿ Click on OK.
Ÿ Click on OK in the Report Problem Using RSF window.
Ÿ Wait for either the alarm Call to RETAIN successful (indicating the normal end of transmission), or
the message Call to RETAIN failed.
Ÿ Write down the alarm number.
Is the alarm Call to RETAIN successful displayed?
Yes No
007
Go to Step 009.
008
The connection to RETAIN is successful. The following table contains the alarms generated by this con-
nection.
Select the Alarm
Number
Meaning
0641
0642
0649
Your microcode is up-to-date. Therefore no fix has been downloaded.
A fix has been downloaded automatically. Install the fix.
Call to RETAIN was successful but no downloaded., MCL is too large or there is not
enough disk space.
Active and accepts all MCL(s) already received to free space disk and retry the
normal call for the new MCL(s). If the problem persists call your support center.
There is a PE problem.
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
009
Locate the alarm number in the following table and perform the required action.
Select the Alarm
Number
Action
0643
0644
Go to Step 010 on page 2-35
Call to RETAIN is not authorized. Refer to the Service Processor Installation and
Maintenance, manual,( step on Recording the Customer Information).
064C
The call to RETAIN has been performed but RETAIN required a disconnection due
to a bad product setup. The following information is missing in the RETAIN cus-
tomer CCPF file or the system registration file.
Ÿ Customer number
Ÿ Machine Model xxA
Ÿ Branch office number
Ÿ Area number
Ÿ Warranty/Status
Provide this information to your support before he contacts the RETAIN coordinator
for updating.
068C
068D
Suspect a Communication Manager problem. Check the Communication Manager
configuration. Refer to the Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual,
(step on Setting Up Communication Parameters to Allow Remote and Netview
Operations). Re-boot the service processor. If the problem persits contact your
support center.
Check the connection between the modem and the line. Check that the telephone
number used is correct. Refer to the Service Processor Installation and Mainte-
nance manual (step on Recording the Customer Information).
2-34 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
010
Click on OK in the alarm window. A second alarm should be displayed. Locate this second alarm
number in the following table and perform the required action.
Select the Alarm
Number
Action
064A
064B
064D
There is a PE problem. Call your support center for assistance.
There is a PE problem. Call your support center for assistance.
The call to RETAIN has not been performed because:
Ÿ The associated data has not been tersed or
Ÿ The associated tersed data has not been written to the service processor disk
(the partition was full). To free space on the disk perform the following steps:
1. Return to the MOSS-E View window.
2. Double-click on the service processor icon.
3. Click on Operation Management in the Service Processor Menu.
4. Double-click on Delete Engineering Data.
5. A Deleting Engineering Data window is displayed, asking you to confirm
your choice.
6. Click on YES.
7. Follow the prompts.
8. When this operation is finished retry a call to RETAIN.
If the problem persists, contact your support center for assistance.
Suspect a multiprotocol adapter problem.
0681
Ÿ Run the multiprotocol diagnostic.
Refer to the Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual (chapter
How to Run the Service Processor Diagnostics).
Ÿ Check that the Communication Manager has been correctly initialized.
Ÿ If everything is correct, suspect a modem problem. Refer to the modem doc-
umentation to run diagnostics.
0682
0685
Suspect a Communication Manager problem. Re-start the Communication Manager
or if this fails re-boot the service processor.
The machine is not registered in the RETAIN data base. The following information
is missing in RETAIN CCPF.
Ÿ Machine type
Ÿ Serial number
Provide this information to your support center before he contacts the RETAIN coor-
dinator for updating.
0686
0687
Check the telephone number and prefix configuration. Refer to the Service
Processor Installation and Maintenance manual (step on Recording the Customer
Information).
Suspect an integrated modem problem.
Ÿ Run the integrated modem diagnostics using the wrap plug.
Refer to the Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual (chapter
on How to Run the service processor diagnostics).
Ÿ If the modem is error free and if the problem persists, contact your support
center for assistance.
0688
Suspect an integrated modem problem.
Ÿ Run the modem diagnostic using the wrap plug.
Refer to the Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual (chapter
on How to Run the Service Processor Diagnostics).
Ÿ If the modem is error free and if the problem persists, contact your support
center for assistance.
0689
068A
The local modem is already in use. Check that the remote console is not in use.
The integrated modem is already in use. Check that the remote console is not in
use.
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 MAPs
Select the Alarm
Number
Action
068B
Suspect a modem problem.
Ÿ If you have an integrated modem, run the modem diagnostic using the wrap
plug.
Refer to the Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual (chapter
on How to Run the Service Processor Diagnostics).
Ÿ If you have an external modem, refer to the modem documentation to run diag-
nostics.
Ÿ If the modem is error free, suspect a line problem. Call the appropriate service
representative.
2-36 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs
3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs
MAP 5200: 3745/3746-900/Service Processor/Network Node Processor
Icon Color Symptoms
Symptom Explanation
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
3745, 3746-900, or Network Node
Processor (NNP) problem
Ÿ 3745 scanner and/or a CCU has failed.
Ÿ 3745 NCP not loaded.
Ÿ 3746-900 one or more processors, CBC, or ESCC have
failed.
The 3745 icon, the 3746-900 icon,
and/or the NNP icon in the
MOSS-E View window are not
green.
Ÿ No link between 3745 and/or 3746-900 with the service
processor.
Ÿ No link between NNP and the service processor.
Ÿ No link between NNP and the 3746-900.
Ÿ NNP has failed.
001
Ÿ The service processor console must be logged ON. If it is not, go to “Console Use for Maintenance”
on page 1-1 (for logging ON) and return here.
Ÿ The color of the 3745, 3746-900, NNP, and the service processor icons reflects their status. For
example a green icon indicates that the machine is operational. The following table describes the icon
color selection.
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs
Table 2-3. Icons Color Selection Table
Machine
Icon Color
Go to
Service
White
Step 002 on page 2-38.
Processor
3745
White
Grey
Step 003 on page 2-38.
Step 004 on page 2-39.
Step 005 on page 2-39.
Step 006 on page 2-39.
Step 007 on page 2-39.
Pink
3746
Yellow
White
Grey
Ÿ The 3746-900 is not connected to the service processor.
Ÿ Go to “MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN Attached
to the Service Processor” on page 2-42.
Pink
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model
900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Red
Step 008 on page 2-39.
NNP-X
White
The control point is starting and the configuration is acti-
vating This is a normal state. However if this state stay a
too long time suspect a problem. Check if you have alarms
at the service processor
Grey
Ÿ There is no connection betweeen the service processor
and the network node processor.
Or
Ÿ The link is not ready between the 3746-9xx and the
control point of the network node processor.
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model
900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Pink
Blue
The control point is waiting for operator start, or no NDF
(Node Definition File). Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multi-
protocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
The connection between the service processor and the
network node processor is OK. The network node
processor is in standby mode. The control point must be
started. Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Con-
troller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
002
The service processor icon is white.
Ÿ Check if the yellow LED of the service processor (indicating disk access) is active.
Ÿ If the yellow LED is sometimes ON and sometimes OFF, wait a few more minutes. If the symptom
persists, contact your support center for assistance.
Ÿ If the yellow LED is always OFF, contact your support center for assistance.
003
The 3745 icon is white.
Ÿ Check the displayed 3745 control panel code or the 3745 status on the service processor:
– On the MOSS-E View window, double-click on the 3745 icon.
– Click on Program (in the action bar).
– Click on Status option.
– The 3745 Controller Status window indicates the CCU status and the associated control code.
Ÿ Note the control code displayed. Then go to “3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15 and follow the
procedure.
2-38 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs
004
The 3745 icon is grey.
Ÿ The 3745 is not connected to the service processor.
Ÿ Go to “MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN Attached to the Service Processor” on page 2-42.
005
The 3745 icon is pink.
Ÿ Click on the 3745 icon pink.
Ÿ Click on Program in the action bar.
Ÿ Click on Status.
Ÿ The 3745 Controller Status window indicates the CCU status and if some adapters are unavailable.
Ÿ The normal status of CCU is loaded. If a CCU is not in this state check:
1. If the CCU control program has been loaded.
2. If the control program has started to load but has not terminated successfully. Go to “General
Verbal Symptoms” on page 1-8 and follow the procedure.
Ÿ If an adapter address is displayed in the unavailable adapters part of the 3745 Controller Status, run
the diagnostic on the suspected adapter. Go to “3745 Maintenance Actions” on page 1-6 and follow
the procedure.
006
The 3746-900 yellow icon is a normal state. Its duration depends on the 3746-900 configuration.
Ÿ On the 3746-900 control panel, check if there is a character displayed on the Service processor not
accessible digit.
Ÿ If a character is displayed, go to “MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN Attached to the Service
Processor” on page 2-42. Otherwise check if the service processor yellow LED (indicating disk
access) is active.
Ÿ If the yellow LED is sometimes ON or sometimes OFF, wait a few more minutes. If the symptom
persists, contact your support center for assistance.
Ÿ If the yellow LED is always OFF, contact your support center for assistance.
007
The 3746-900 white icon is a normal state. Its duration depends on the 3746-900 configuration.
Ÿ Check either the displayed 3746-900 control panel code or the 3746-900 status on the service
processor:
– On the MOSS-E View window double-click on the 3746-900 icon.
– Click on Program (in the action bar)
– Click on Status.
– The 3746-900 Status window indicates the IML steps, the address of any processor, CBC or una-
vailable ESCC, and the control panel code.
Ÿ Note the control panel code displayed. Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model
900 Service Guide, SY33-2116 for investigation.
008
The 3746-900 icon is red when it is set to Offline mode.
Ÿ To set the 3746-900 to Online mode follow these steps:
– Double-click on the 3746-900 icon.
– On the 3746-9x0 Menu window, click on Problem management.
– Click on Set 3746-9x0 Online/Offline option.
– On the Set 3646-900 Online/Offline window, click on Yes.
– On the next Set 3746-9x0 Online/Offline window, click on YES or NO (according to the current
setting).
(Step 008 continues)
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs
008 (continued)
– On the next Set 3746-9x0 Online/Offline window, click on OK.
Ÿ Start a general IML in order to set the 3746-900 in Online mode.
Ÿ At IML completion, the 3746-900 icon must be green.
Ÿ Return to the MOSS-E View window.
Ÿ Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102 to return the machine to the customer. If the problem
persists contact your support center.
2-40 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs
MAP 5205: LAN Checking
You are here because you suspect the LAN cable (WLOB) or the service processor access unit (ACUN) to
be faulty.
001
Perform the following steps:
Ÿ Check that the service processor LAN cable is correctly connected to the rear of the service processor
and in the service processor access unit.
Ÿ Check that all the LAN cables are correctly connected to the service processor access unit.
Did you find the problem?
Yes No
002
Exchange the suspected FRU.
003
Problem solved. Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Processor MAPs
Service Processor MAPs
MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN Attached to the Service
Processor
Symptom Explanation
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Unable to activate or deactivate a
ring
Ÿ Service processor or network node processor LAN adapter
Ÿ Ring
Ÿ Service processor access unit
Ÿ 3746-900 TIC3 or CBSP
Ÿ 3745 MLA card
Errors occur while ring is running
No connection with the service
processor
Service
Processor
3745
(Note 3)
Service
MOSS-E LAN
Adapter
Processor
Access
Unit
3746-900
(Note 3)
(Note 2)
NNP-B
Network Node
Processor
NNP-A (Note 1)
3746-950
APPN
LAN
Adapter
Figure 2-5. LAN Attached to the Service Processor
Notes:
1. The network node processor is an optional feature which is present only when APPN is installed. Up
to four network node processors can be installed on the same LAN. A backup network node
processor can also be present.
2. The LAN can be made of two service processor access units (8228).
3. Only 37xx units can be connected to the LAN when APPN is installed.
001
You are here because there is a problem on the LAN that is attached to the service processor. The
following links can be impacted (one or more):
Ÿ 3745 MOSS/MOSS-E link
Ÿ 3746-900/MOSS-E link
Ÿ 3746-900/APPN link (if present)
Ÿ MOSS-E/APPN link (if present)
(Step 001 continues)
2-42 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Processor MAPs
001 (continued)
Is the problem permanent?
Yes No
002
Go to Step 016 on page 2-44.
003
Does the problem appear on all units connected to the service processor?
Yes No
004
Go to Step 011.
005
Is the service processor powered ON?
Yes No
006
Power ON the service processor.
Is the service processor powered ON?
Yes No
007
Go to Step 010.
008
Problem solved.
009
Ÿ Check that the service processor LAN cables are correctly connected to the rear of the service
processor
Ÿ Check that the LAN cables are correctly connected to the service processor access unit.
Ÿ If everything is correct continue with Step 010.
010
Go to Service Processor Problem Determination in the corresponding Service Processor Installation
and Maintenance manual.
011
Is the problem only on a 3745?
Yes No
012
In the following list, select the unit that has a problem:
Faulty Unit
3746-900
Action:
Restart the problem determination using the IBM 3746 Nways Multi-
protocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
3746-950
Restart the problem determination using the IBM 3746 Nways Multi-
protocol Controller Model 950 Service Guide, SY33-2108.
Network Node Processor
Perform the problem determination on the network node processor
using the Network Node Processor Problem Determination in the
corresponding Network Node Processor Installation and Maintenance
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Processor MAPs
manual.
Other unit
If you have a unit other than a 3745, 3746-900, or 3746-950 con-
nected to the LAN, refer to the specific documentation of this unit or
do the problem determination on the ring using, the Token-Ring
Network Problem Determination Guide, SX27-3710.
013
Is there a panel code displayed on the 3745 control panel?
Yes No
014
Go to “3745 Control Panel Symptoms” on page 1-11.
015
Go to “3745 Control Panel Code” on page 2-32 for control panel code interpretation.
016
You are here because you have transient errors on the service processor LAN .
Does the problem appear on all units connected to the service processor?
Yes No
017
Go to Step 019.
018
Ÿ Check that the service processor LAN cable is correctly connected to the rear of the service
processor.
Ÿ Check that all the LAN cables are correctly connected to the service processor access unit.
Ÿ Do the problem determination on the ring using, the Token-Ring Network Problem Determination
Guide, SX27-3710.
Ÿ If you do not identify the problem, contact your support center.
019
Is the problem only on a 3745?
Yes No
020
Faulty Unit
3746-900
Action:
Restart the problem determination using the IBM 3746 Nways Multi-
protocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
3746-950
Restart the problem determination using the IBM 3746 Nways Multi-
protocol Controller Model 950 Service Guide, SY33-2108.
Network Node Processor
Perform the problem determination on the network node processor
using the Network Node Processor Problem Determination in the
corresponding Network Node Processor Installation and Maintenance
manual.
Other unit
If you have a unit other than a 3745, 3746-900, or 3746-950 con-
nected on the LAN, refer to the specific documentation of this unit or
do the problem determination on the ring using, the Token-Ring
Network Problem Determination Guide, SX27-3710.
021
2-44 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Processor MAPs
Go to Step 022.
022
Ÿ If your are not already logged ON at service processor console, go to “Console Use for Maintenance”
on page 1-1 for log ON. Then return here.
Ÿ On the MOSS-E View window, double-click on the desired 3745 icon.
Ÿ Click on MOSS.
Ÿ On the MOSS screen, enter ELD (Event Log Display) and press Enter on the service processor key-
board.
Ÿ On the next MOSS screen, enter 7 (alarm) and press Enter on the service processor keyboard.
Ÿ In the list, check the presence of alarms type 11 (link lost) showing a problem on LAN.
Is there an alarm type 11?
Yes No
023
Perform the problem determination on the ring using the, Token-Ring Network Problem Determi-
nation Guide, SX27-3710.
024
Ÿ Record the selection number of each alarm 11. Enter this selection number and press the Enter key
on the service processor keyboard.
Ÿ On the next MOSS screen, record the panel code.
Ÿ Repeat the two preceding steps for each alarm type 11. Then go to “3745 Control Panel Code” on
page 2-32 to interpret the panel codes and continue the procedure.
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation 2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Processor MAPs
2-46 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics
Diagnostic Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3745 Diagnostics
Errors During Diagnostics
Diagnostic Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Checkout Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
CBA Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
CBA Diagnostics from 3745 MOSS Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Prerequisites to Run the CBA Test from the 3745 MOSS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
How to Run MOSS Diagnostics
From the 3745 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
From the Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
How to Loop MOSS Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
How to Run the Console Link Test for 3745 Models 130, 150, 160, and 170 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Local/Remote or Alternate/RSF Link Tests
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
How to Run the Control Panel Test
How to Run Internal Function Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
How to Invoke Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
How to Select Diagnostics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10
3-11
3-12
Error Menu
How to Run the LIC Wrap Test with IFTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Install the Wrap Plug
Start the Diagnostic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13
3-13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Run the Wrap Test (WTT) for TSS, HPTSS, or 3746-900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Wrap Test Initial Selection for TSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Wrap Test Initial Selection for HPTSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Wrap Test Initial Selection for 3746-900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Available Wrap Options
Available Wrap Plugs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20
3-22
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Run the Channel Wrap Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-1
Diagnostics
Diagnostic Description
3745 Diagnostics
Diagnostic Monitoring
Two groups of diagnostics run on the 3745:
The controlled diagnostics are monitored by the
diagnostic control monitor (DCM) and the
command processor (CP).
1. Automatic:
IML/IPL checkout diagnostics including MOSS
diagnostics.
The diagnostic control monitor is loaded when the
diagnostic utility program is selected from the
3745 function menu.
2. Controlled:
Ÿ Internal function tests (IFTs)
Ÿ Wrap tests
It automatically restricts the diagnostic testing to
the elements that are defined in the configuration
data file (CDF) and disconnected from the NCP.
Ÿ OLTs.
Checkout Diagnostics
Diagnostics are run during the installation proce-
dure and when a fault is detected to isolate a
field-replaceable unit that caused the failure. They
are also executed after a repair is performed, to
check that the hardware area is working correctly.
They must be run before and after an EC or MES
has been installed in the area concerned.
The checkout diagnostics are designed to test the
hardware of the CCU, IOC, Channel Adapter, CSP
part of the line adapter, TIC, and the PCC card.
For the CA, LA, and TIC, diagnostics are part of
the microcode and are located in the ROS of the
adapter itself. They run automatically at power
ON time before IML.
Diagnostics may be run in offline mode when the
3745 is fully available or in concurrent mode. In
concurrent mode, the diagnostic must be selected
in the specific area and will run only in configured
units. These units must be available at that time.
The cyclic PCC checkouts run when the machine
is powered ON and are successful when the
power control and service mode indicators are dis-
played.
Errors During Diagnostics
For the CCU and IOC, the diagnostics are located
on the disk and run during IPL.
When the MOSS diagnostic program detects a
failure, a three-digit code is displayed on the
control panel.
For the CA, TSS, HPTSS, and ESS, they are also
automatically run when the internal function tests
are started.
When the internal function tests detect an error, a
reference code is posted on the 3745 console.
For the TIC, the token-ring wrap test is automat-
ically run at each TIC Open command from the
NCP. This TIC Internal Lobe Media tests the ring
up to the local wiring concentrator (IBM 8228), or
up to the point where it is unplugged before the
8228.
If an error is detected, the MOSS analyzes the
problem and presents a control panel code or a
reference code.
3-2 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
CBA Diagnostic
The link between the 3745 and the 3746-900 is
checked via CBA routines invoked from the 3745
MOSS console.
– XA01: DMA test.
– XA02: Extended DMA test.
The run time is about 6 minutes per coupler.
CBA Diagnostics from 3745 MOSS
Console: New diagnostic sections are pro-
vided to test the 3745/3746-900 interface. These
sections must be run manually and offline.
Prerequisites to Run the CBA Test
from the 3745 MOSS
Ÿ The 3745 must be powered ON and in offline
mode.
Ÿ IOC interface is tested by the new section:
Ÿ The 3746-900 must be powered ON and in
The IDxx section tests the path between the
CCU and IOC Bus.
– ID01: Use of IOC test register.
– ID02: Test of bad parity
– ID03: Interrupt test.
online mode.
Ÿ The CBC and the CBSP must not be in con-
current mode.
Ÿ The CBC and the CBSP must be available in
the CDF-E.
Ÿ The 3746-900 must be error free.
The run time is about 1 minute and 30
seconds.
Refer to Figure 3-1 for the coverage of CBA diag-
nostics.
Ÿ DMA interface is tested by a new section
XAxx.
IOC/DMA Bus
CBC
CBA
: Tested by CBA Diagnostics
: Not Tested by CBA Diagnostics
Figure 3-1. CBA Diagnostic Coverage
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics 3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
How to Run MOSS Diagnostics
These tests can be run without stopping the cus-
tomer's application.
Enable/Disable screen which indicates that a
successful run of MOSS diagnostics and the
MOSS IML have been completed.
Ÿ Error conditions will result in a control panel
code being displayed. Actions for these
codes are defined in “3745 Control Panel
Codes” on page 1-15.
4. If the console has not been re-initialized, an
error was detected.
From the Control Panel
or
1. Set the function to MOSS IML:
Ÿ Some errors will result in a reference code at
IML completion. These types can also be
recognized by the panel code displaying F0D.
Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14 for action.
a. Press Service until the number 0 or 1 is
displayed in the service window. (No
bypass of MOSS diagnostics.)
b. Press Validate.
Ensure that the MOSS is offline or alone (look at
MOSS Status Area on the second line of the
console screen) and that service mode (panel) is
0 or 1.
c. Press Function until the number 1 is dis-
played in the function window.
d. Press Validate.
2. If after approximately 2 minutes the control
panel displays code F0F, the MOSS diagnos-
tics and a MOSS IML have been successfully
completed. Code F0E can be displayed if the
MOSS was previously alone (that is not in
offline mode).
From the 3745 Console
1. On the 3745 console, select Menu 1 (see PF
key line).
2. In Menu 1, type IML in the selection area for
IML MOSS.
3. If any other code is displayed, an error was
detected.
3. After approximately 2 minutes the console will
be re-initialized with the Channel
3-4 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
How to Loop MOSS Diagnostics
If an intermittent MOSS problem is suspected, the
loop MOSS diagnostics facility can be used as
follows:
minutes of error free operation are sufficient to
determine whether the MOSS is working satis-
factorily. If an error is detected, a panel code
will be permanently displayed. Therefore, go
to “3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15.
Gentle vibration of the MOSS cables and
cards (while the test is running), will locate
most loose connection problems.
Ensure that the MOSS is offline or alone
(check the MOSS Status Area, on the second
line of the console screen).
1. Set the service mode to Maintenance 1:
a. Press Service until the number 1 is dis-
If no error is detected:
played in the service window.
4. Set the function to MOSS IML:
b. Press Validate.
a. Press Function until 1 is displayed in the
2. Set the function to loop on MOSS diagnostics:
function window.
a. Press Function until the digit A is dis-
b. Press Validate.
played in the function window.
5. When the control panel displays F0F (or F0E
if the MOSS was previously alone), perform a
MOSS online. Refer to “How to Put the
MOSS Online” on page 4-105.
b. Press Validate.
3. The MOSS diagnostics will run continuously
unless an error is detected. Usually 5 to 10
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics 3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
How to Run the Console Link Test for 3745 Models 130, 150, 160, and
170
This function is available for 3745 Models 130,
150, 160, and 170 only.
Wrap plug to be used according to the DCE
interface cable and to the console:
Ÿ DCE interface cable between the 3745
and the console/modem without an inter-
mediate "adapter" (.A/ in Figure 3-3).
This function tests the customer's console ports
with wrap plugs which may be installed at the end
of the cable. They are attached to either the local
console, the remote console modem, or the RSF
link modem. The wrap plugs can also be installed
at the connectors for these cables in the 3745 (not
possible with the 3727 console cable).
Use wrap plug PN 6398697.
Ÿ DCE interface cable between the 3745
and the console/modem with an interme-
diate "adapter" (.B/ in Figure 3-3).
This test can be run without stopping the cus-
tomers application.
Use the wrap plug PN 2667737.
Ÿ DCE interface cable between the 3745
and the console switch (7427) (.C/ in
Figure 3-3).
Local/Remote or Alternate/RSF
Link Tests
Use the wrap plug PN 2667737.
Ÿ DCE interface cable between the console
with the (7427) and the console/modem
(.D/ in Figure 3-3).
1. Ensure that the customer is not using any of
the 3745 consoles and also confirm the avail-
ability of MOSS.
Use the wrap plug PN 6398697 for a
console 31XX or the wrap plug PN
2667737 for a 3727 console.
2. Set the power control to local:
a. Press Power Control until 3 is displayed
in the power control window.
Important:
b. Press Validate.
The cable connecting to the alternate console
must be tested on the Local output with the
test option 8.
3. Set Service mode to Maintenance 1:
a. Press Service until the number 1 is dis-
played in the service window.
OR
b. Press Validate.
Open the rear cover of the 3745 base frame.
Remove the appropriate cable (if installed)
from the output and connect the wrap plug PN
6398697. See Figure 3-2.
RSF
Remote
Local
7. Set the function to the link test required: either
remote/alternate, RSF, or local:
01R
a. Press Function until 6, 7 or 8 is displayed
in the function window.
J1
J2
J3
Ÿ 6 (remote/alternate)
Ÿ 7 (RSF)
Figure 3-2. Console Output
Ÿ 8 (Local).
4. We advise you to start the wrap plugging from
the far end of the DCE interface cable. Refer
to Figure 3-3 on page 3-7 for the different
cable configurations.
b. Press Validate.
8. After a partial MOSS IML the following panel
codes will be displayed:
5. Remove the DCE interface cable from the
console, modem, or console switch (the DCE
interface cable may be connected directly to
the DCE, or to an intermediate "adapter". In
the second case remove the the DCE inter-
face cable from the "adapter").
a. LOCAL.
1B1: Start of test
1B2: Successful completion of test.
b. REMOTE/ALTERNATE
1B3: Start of test
1B4: Successful completion of test.
6. Connect the appropriate wrap plug to the end
of the cable.
c. RSF
1B5: Start of test
1B6: Successful completion of test.
3-6 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
If any other panel code is displayed, discon-
nect the wrap plug. Go to “3745 Control
Panel Codes” on page 1-15 and follow the
instructions.
11. Set the function to MOSS IML:
a. Press Function until 1 is displayed in the
function window.
b. Press Validate.
9. Disconnect the wrap plug and reconnect the
cable.
12. When the control panel displays F0F or F0E if
the MOS was previously alone), perform a
MOSS online. Refer to “How to Put the
MOSS Online” on page 4-105.
10. Set service mode to NORMAL:
a. Press Service until 0 is displayed in the
function window.
13. The console link test has completed with no
error detected.
b. Press Validate.
External Cable
(DCE Interface Cable)
3745
Console
or
Modem
MOSS
Board
Tailgate
A
Internal Cable
External Cable
(DCE Interface Cable)
Adapter
3745
Console
or
Modem
MOSS
Board
Tailgate
Internal Cable
B
External Cable
(DCE Interface Cable)
External Cable
(DCE Interface Cable)
3745
Console
or
Modem
MOSS
Board
7427
Tailgate
C
D
Internal Cable
Figure 3-3. Cable Configurations
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics 3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
How to Run the Control Panel Test
This test can be run without stopping the cus-
tomers application.
control panel has detected its own failure.
Continue at Step 11.
4. Press Function.
This test is not a sequential test and can be can-
celled at any time by pressing Exit.
Observe the display: The Function window
special character will be displayed. Repeti-
tive action will scroll through the Code window
sequentially and wrap around.
Notes:
1. Any inactivity (during the panel test), of
approximately 60 seconds will result in the
test being automatically cancelled and the
panel will return to operational mode.
If this does not occur, go to Step 12.
5. Press Service.
Observe the display: The Service window
special character will be displayed. Repeti-
tive action will scroll through the Power
Control window and wrap around.
2. During this test, the control panel audible
alarm will sound for each action.
The special character can be described as when
every possible segment of the window is being lit:
If this does not occur, go to Step 12.
6. Press Power Control.
Observe the display: The Console in Use
window special character will be displayed.
Repetitive action will scroll through the All CA
Disabled MOSS Inop and the MOSS Msg
windows sequentially and wrap around.
1. Set the power to local:
If this does not occur, go to Step 12.
a. Press Power Control until 3 is displayed
7. Press Power On Reset.
in the power control window.
Observe the display: The digit 8 will be dis-
played in the Function window.
b. Press Validate.
If the above action cannot be performed,
go to Step 11.
If this does not occur, go to Step 12.
8. Press Power Off.
2. Set Service mode to Maintenance 1:
Observe the display: The display will be com-
pletely blank.
a. Press Service until the number 1 is dis-
played in the service window.
If this does not occur, go to Step 12.
b. Press Validate.
9. Press Exit.
If the above action can not be performed
go to Step 11.
Observe the display: The display will present
the Power Control and Service Mode indi-
cating that the test is complete, and the panel
has returned to operational mode.
3. Set Function to panel test:
a. Press Function until 5 is displayed in the
function window.
If this does not occur, go to Step 12.
b. Press Validate.
10. The control panel test has completed with
no error detected. Discard Steps 11 and
12 . Return to the procedure where you come
from.
If the above action can not be performed
go to Step 11.
Observe the display: All 10 special characters
will be displayed.
11. Exchange the FRU group 35. Go to “3745
FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
If the pattern is not identical for each figure,
go to Step 11.
12. Exchange the FRU group 10. Go to “3745
FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
Note: If during the following steps the func-
tion window displays the digit 5. The the
3-8 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
How to Run Internal Function Tests
How to Invoke Diagnostics: On the 3745 console, press F5 in Menu 1 to display the mainte-
nance function Menu (Menu 3).
à
ð
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-OFFLINE
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð1/12/87 ð4:29
MENU 3
MISUSE OF MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS MAY LEAD TO UNPREDICTABLE RESULTS
BER CORRELATION..: BRC
CADS SERVICES....: CAS
CONCURRENT DIAGS.: CDG
DUMP DISPLAY/DEL.: DDD
MODULE DISPLAY...: MDD
MOSS STORE DSPLY.: MSD
OFFLINE DIAGS....: ODG
POWER SERVICES...: POS
TSS SERVICES.....: TSS
TRSS SERVICES....: TRS
ENTER OFF TO LOG OFF
F4:MENU1
===>
áF1:END F2:MENU2
ñ
F3:ALARM
F6:RULES
Figure 3-4. Maintenance Functions Menu
See Figure 3-4.
In this menu, two options are available to run diagnostics:
Notes:
2. ODG to run diagnostics in offline mode when
the 3745 is fully available for maintenance.
1. CDG to run diagnostics in concurrent diag-
nostics mode.
Selected diagnostics will run whatever the
status of the adapter.
For channel diagnostics, all the channel inter-
faces must be disabled.
Selected diagnostics will run if the adapter is
available (ask the customer to disconnect the
related resources), and only the sections or
routines allowed to run in concurrent mode will
be called without interfering the 3745 opera-
tion.
ODG must be used if conditions for concurrent
maintenance mode are not met (no NCP or
CCU running).
For channel diagnostics:
Diagnostics must be used in CDG mode if
more than one CA is present and if CCU +
NCP are running. If it is not the case, use
ODG.
Ÿ Based on the previous notes, Type ODG or CDG after ===> and press SEND.
Ÿ Continue with “How to Select Diagnostics” on page 3-10.
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics 3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
How to Select Diagnostics
à
ð
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-OFFLINE
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð7/87 ðð:21
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: OFFLINE DIAGS
GROUP :ADP# :LINE :
1 ALL :
:
:
:
:
:
2 CCU : A- B:
3 IOCB: 1- 4:
4 CA : 1-16:
5 TSS : 1-32: ð-31:
6 TRSS: 1- 6: 1- 2:
7 HTSS: 1- 8:
8 OLT : 1-16:
9 ESS : 1- 8:
Xð CBA : 1- 2:
:
:
:
DIAGNOSTICS INITIALIZATION
OPT= Y IF MODIFY :
OPTION REQUIRED
:
: ENTER REQUEST ACCORDING TO THE DIAG MENU
: DIAG==> ADP#==> LINE==> OPT==>
===>
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
Figure 3-5. How to Select Diagnostics
After entering ODG or CDG in Menu 3, the diag-
nostic menu is displayed. See Figure 3-5.
from the LID function (in Menu 1) by entering
the line address.
Ÿ OPT==> Y to display the option menu.
Four input fields are available in this menu:
Ÿ DIAG==> Diagnostic group (1-10), IFT,
If the ALL option is entered, diagnostics will be
run on all adapters in the CDF and disconnected
from the NCP.
section, or routine to be run.
Example:
– 2 (full set of CCU IFTs)
– K (section K of IOC diagnostics)
– AC01 (specific routine of CCU diagnos-
tics)
Note
Do not select ALL when a channel adapter
and an Ethernet adapter are installed. An error
will be reported on the Ethernet adapter.
Note
If you select 3 (IOCB) with no adapter
installed, a warning will be reported (invalid
request).
Type your request in the input fields and press
SEND.
If OPT==>Y is entered, the option menu is dis-
played. See Figure 3-6 on page 3-11. If not, the
diagnostic is started and the diagnostic result is
displayed in this frame.
Ÿ ADP#==> Adapter number
Ÿ LINE==> Line number for TSS, TRSS,
HPTSS, or ESS. The line number is obtained
3-10 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
Options Menu
à
ð
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-OFFLINE
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð6/87 ðð:15
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: OFFLINE DIAGS
:
R RERUN REQUEST
A ABORT ROUTINE
:
:
C CANCEL REQUEST :
G GO
:
M MODIFY OPTIONS: :
S/LS/AL/ALS/B/DM :
NW/W
: START ð9:58:15
C1/CNNN/C
R1/RNNN
BR/NBR
: REQUEST: CCU
: OPTIONS: S
:
DIAGNOSTICS INITIALIZATION
NW C1
R1
BR
: ENTER REQUEST ACCORDING TO THE DIAG MENU
: ==>M R2
===>
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
Figure 3-6. How to Enter Options
When the OPT field is set to Y in the diagnostic
menu, the options menu is displayed. See
Figure 3-6.
1. Enter or modify the option using the M func-
tion followed by the option or options needed
(for example : M C5 DM will cause your
request to cycle 5 times and display multiple
errors).
The default options are automatically displayed.
Options:
Meaning
Only one option per line of the menu can be
selected. If more than one option is entered,
only the last one is accepted.
S
Stop on first error.
Loop on first error with stop.
Automatic loop on error.
LS
AL
ALS
2. Press SEND
Restart the same procedure to enter the other
options if needed.
Automatic loop on error with new
error stop.
3. Enter G
B
Bypass error stop.
4. Press SEND.
DM
NW
Display multiple errors.
The diagnostic is started and the diagnostic
result is displayed on this frame.
No wait before execution of each
routine.
If an error is detected, an error message is
displayed. See Figure 3-7 on page 3-12.
W
Wait before execution of each
routine.
C1/CNNN/C Cycle request option.
R1/RNNN
BR/NBR
Repeat routine option.
BER recording option.
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics 3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
Error Menu
à
ð
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-OFFLINE
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 1ð:17
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: OFFLINE DIAGS
: ᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍ
FRU REMOVAL ==> POWER OFF
R RERUN REQUEST
A ABORT ROUTINE
: ᑍRH B3ð322ð8 ᑍ
: ᑍRAC 8ð5ðAðððð ᑍ ERR BIT FFFFFFð2
C CANCEL REQUEST : ᑍ ERC ACð1ð7ð1 ᑍ
ERROR COUNT ðððð1
GO
: ᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍᑍ
M MODIFY OPTIONS: :
S/LS/AL/ALS/B/DM :
NW/W
: START 1ð:13:46 STOP 1ð:18:ð2
C1/CNNN/C
R1/RNNN
BR/NBR
: REQUEST: AC
: OPTIONS: S
:
CCU DIAG RUNNING
NW C1
R1
NER
ROUTINE ACð1 ADP ðA
: ENTER REQUEST ACCORDING TO THE DIAG MENU
: ==>
===>
ᑍᑍᑍERROR FOUNDᑍᑍᑍ
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
Figure 3-7. Error Menu
Note: The RH field contains the reference code.
3-12 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
How to Run the LIC Wrap Test with IFTs
Netherlands
6162948
66X0748
65X8069
66X0807
Install the Wrap Plug:
Ÿ For HPTSS
Switzerland
U.K.
Install the wrap plug PN 58X9349 for V35 or
PN 58X9354 for X.21 on the tailgate con-
nector.
U.S.A./Canada
Ÿ For ESS
Install the wrap plug PN 70X8670 on the
tailgate connector.
Start the Diagnostic
Ÿ For HPTSS
Ÿ For LIC Types 1 and 4
1. Update the CDF to indicates that the lines
to be tested have wrap plugs installed.
Refer to IBM 3745 Service Functions.
Install the wrap plug PN 65X8927 on the LIC
connector. See Figure 3-8 and Figure 3-10
on page 3-23.
2. Using “How to Run Internal Function
Tests” on page 3-9, enter the following:
Ÿ For LIC Type 3
Install the wrap cable PN 65X8928 between
the two sockets. See Figure 3-9 and
Figure 3-10 on page 3-23.
a. Diagnostic group 7 in the DIAG==>
area.
b. Adapter number in the
ADP#==> area.
Notes:
1. To fully test the port (all control leads)
install the wrap cable and run the test.
3. Press SEND.
Ÿ For ESS
2. Reverse the wrap cable ends (between
the DCE and direct attach connector).
1. Using “How to Run Internal Function
Tests” on page 3-9 enter the following:
3. Repeat the test.
a. Diagnostic group 9 in the DIAG==>
Ÿ For LIC Types 5 and 6
area.
1. Unplug the line cable at the customer wall
frame.
b. Adapter number in the
ADP#==> area.
2. Install the appropriate wrap plug (see fol-
lowing list) at the end of the cable or
unplug the line cable from both ends.
3. Install the wrap plug PN 11F4815 at the
tail gate connector (the line cable must be
unplugged from wall frame for line loading
reasons.). See Figure 3-11 and
Figure 3-12 on page 3-24.
2. Press SEND.
Ÿ For LIC Types 1, 3, and 4
Using “How to Run Internal Function Tests” on
page 3-9, enter the following:
1. Routine number RC01 in the
DIAG==> area.
LIC Types 5 and 6 Wrap Plug Country Part
Number
2. Adapter number in the
ADP#==> area.
3. Line number in the LINE==> area. You
may obtain the line number from the LID
function (in Menu 1) by entering the line
address.
Country
Austria
Belgium
France
Part Number
6162946
6162950
6162955
6162950
65X8070
66X1954
6162957
6124644
6162950
4. Press SEND.
Ÿ For LIC Types 5, and 6
Germany
Hong Kong
Israel
Using “How to Run Internal Function Tests” on
page 3-9 enter the following :
1. Routine number RH59 in the
Italy
DIAG==> area.
Japan
2. Adapter number in the ADP#==> area.
Luxemburg
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics 3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
3. Line number in the LINE==> area. You may
obtain the line number from the LID function
(in Menu 1) by entering the line address.
4. Press SEND.
3-14 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
How to Run the Wrap Test (WTT) for TSS, HPTSS, or 3746-900
Attention: The MOSS must be online to start this procedure.
1. Select Menu 1.
2. Type WTT
3. Press SEND/ENTER.
The Wrap Test Initial Selection screen is displayed:
à
ð
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745-xxx
X71:ðAð8ðð
X72:ðBC8ðð
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCA-A
PROCESS MOSS-ALONE
BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK
RESET
-------------------------------------------------------------- mm/dd/yy hh:mm
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
WRAP TEST INITIAL SELECTION
- SELECT THE COMMUNICATION SUBSYSTEM (1, 2, 3) ==>
1 = TSS
2 = HPTSS
3 = 3746-9ðð
THEN PRESS ENTR
===>
áF1:END F2:MENU2
ñ
If you select:
Ÿ 1 = TSS: Go to “Wrap Test Initial Selection for TSS” on page 3-16
Ÿ 2 = HPTSS: Go to “Wrap Test Initial Selection for HPTSS” on page 3-18
Ÿ 3 = 3746-900: Go to “Wrap Test Initial Selection for 3746-900” on page 3-19
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics 3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
Wrap Test Initial Selection for TSS
Follow the instructions in the following screen.
à
ð
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745-xxx
X71:ðAð8ðð
X72:ðBC8ðð
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCA-A
PROCESS MOSS-ALONE
BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK
RESET
-------------------------------------------------------------- mm/dd/yy hh:mm
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
WRAP TEST INITIAL SELECTION FOR TSS
- SELECT ONE OPTION (1,2) ==> (A)
1 = AUTOMATIC WRAP TEST ON LIC UNIT
2 = WRAP TEST AT ANY LEVEL
THEN PRESS SEND
===>
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
ð
(A) Enter 1 or 2 here to select the wrap test option.
Option 1: Follow the instructions in the following screen.
à
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745-xxx
X71:ðAð8ðð
X72:ðBC8ðð
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCA-A
PROCESS MOSS-ALONE
BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK
RESET
-------------------------------------------------------------- mm/dd/yy hh:mm
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
AUTOMATIC WRAP TEST ON LIC UNIT
- ENTER A LINE ADDRESS OF THE LIC (ðððð-ð895) ==> (B)
WARNING: ALL LINES OF THE LIC MUST BE DISABLED/DEACTIVATED
===>
F4:WRAP TEST INITIAL SELECTION
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
(B) Enter the line address here.
3-16 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
Option 2: Follow the instructions in the following screen and select the wrap level 4 (tailgate).
à
ð
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745-xxx
X71:ðAð8ðð
X72:ðBC8ðð
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCA-A
PROCESS MOSS-ALONE
BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK
RESET
-------------------------------------------------------------- mm/dd/yy hh:mm
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
WRAP TEST INITIAL SELECTION FOR TSS
- ENTER LINE ADDRESS (ðððð-ð895) ==> (B)
- ENTER WRAP TYPE (1 to 2) ==>
1 = DATA
2 = CONTROL LEADS
- ENTER WRAP LEVEL (1 to 4) ==> (C)
1 = LOCAL MODEM
4 = TAILGATE
2 = NTT CABLE (TSS ONLY)
3 = LIC (DATA WRAP ONLY)
LINE(S) TO BE TESTED MUST BE DISABLED/DEACTIVATED
===>
F4:INITIAL SELECTION
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
(B) Enter the line address here.
(C) Enter 4 here to select the tailgate level
Ÿ For LIC Types 1, and 4
LIC Types 5 and 6 Wrap Plug Country Part
Number
Install the wrap plug PN 65X8927 on the LIC
connector. See Figure 3-8 on page 3-23 and
Figure 3-10 on page 3-23.
Country
Austria
Part Number
6162946
6162950
6162955
6162950
65X8070
66X1954
6162957
6124644
6162950
6162948
66X0748
65X8069
66X0807
Ÿ For LIC Type 3
Belgium
France
Install the wrap cable PN 65X8928 between
the two sockets. See Figure 3-9 on
page 3-23 and Figure 3-10 on page 3-23.
Germany
Hong Kong
Israel
Notes:
1. The test must be run a second time with
the wrap cable reversed end to end.
Italy
2. If you are working on a line adapter with
one line at 256 kbps connected to and at
least one other line, and if these lines are
initialized at the NCP activation, you are
not allowed to run the WTT on these lines.
Japan
Luxemburg
Netherlands
Switzerland
U.K.
Ÿ For LIC Types 5, and 6
1. Unplug the line cable at the customer wall
frame.
U.S.A./Canada
2. Install the appropriate wrap plug (see fol-
lowing list) at the end of the cable or
unplug the line cable from both ends.
3. Install the wrap plug PN 11F4815 at the
LIC connector (the line cable must be
unplugged from the wall frame when nec-
essary for telephone line loading reason).
See Figure 3-11 on page 3-24 and
Figure 3-12 on page 3-24.
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics 3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
Wrap Test Initial Selection for HPTSS
Follow the instructions in the following screen.
à
ð
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745-xxx
X71:ðAð8ðð
X72:ðBC8ðð
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCA-A
PROCESS MOSS-ALONE
BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK
RESET
-------------------------------------------------------------- mm/dd/yy hh:mm
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
WRAP TEST INITIAL SELECTION FOR HPTSS
- ENTER LINE ADDRESS (1ð24-1ð39) ==> (B)
- ENTER WRAP TYPE (1 to 2) ==>
1 = DATA
2 = CONTROL LEADS
- ENTER WRAP LEVEL (1 to 4) ==> (C)
1 = LOCAL MODEM (DATA WRAP ONLY) 4 = TAILGATE
2 = REMOTE MODEM (DATA WRAP ONLY)
3 = INTERNAL
LINE(S) TO BE TESTED MUST BE DISABLED/DEACTIVATED
===>
F4:INITIAL SELECTION
áF1:END F2:MENU2
ñ
(B) Enter the line address here.
(C) Enter 4 here to select the tailgate level.
For HPTSS
Install the wrap plug PN 58X9349 for V.35 or PN 58X9354 for X.21 on the tailgate connector.
3-18 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
Wrap Test Initial Selection for 3746-900
Follow the instructions in the following screen.
à
ð
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745-xxx
X71:ðAð8ðð
X72:ðBC8ðð
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCA-A
PROCESS MOSS-ALONE
BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK
RESET
-------------------------------------------------------------- mm/dd/yy hh:mm
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
WRAP TEST INITIAL SELECTION FOR 3746-9ðð
- ENTER LINE ADDRESS (2112-3135) ==> (A)
CCU (A, B) ==>
- ENTER WRAP TYPE (1 to 2) ==> (B)
1 = DATA
2 = CONTROL LEADS
- ENTER WRAP LEVEL (1 to 5) ==> (C)
1 = LOCAL MODEM
4 = NTT CABLE
2 = REMOTE MODEM (DATA WRAP ONLY) 5 = WRAP PLUG
3 = INTERNAL
LINE(S) TO BE TESTED MUST BE DISABLED/DEACTIVATED
===>
F4:INITIAL SELECTION
áF1:END F2:MENU2
ñ
(A) Enter the line address here.
(B) Select the required option.
Notes:
1. The control leads option is not valid when requesting the local
and remote modem wrap level on LIC12.
2. On LIC16 the control leads option is not available.
(C) Enter the desired wrap option
(see “Available Wrap Options” on page 3-20).
Ÿ The following screens prompt you:
– To enter the numbers of wraps.
– To install (if necessary) the wrap plug according to the entity tested (see “Available Wrap Plugs”
on page 3-22).
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics 3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
Available Wrap Options
Wrap Option Available on LIC11
Remote
Modem
3745
Local
Modem
LCB
DTE
3746-900
LIC11
ARC
(1)
Line
(2) (3)
(4)
Ÿ (1) Internal level wrap
Ÿ (2) NTT cable wrap
Ÿ (3) Local modem level wrap
Ÿ (4) Remote modem level wrap
3745
LCB
ARC
3746-900
LIC11
W
(5)
Ÿ (5) ARC Wrap plug for testing the ARC and its cable. Select the appropriate ARC wrap plug
according to the type of ARC (see Table 3-1 on page 3-22).
ARC Assembly A
ARC Assembly B
Note: With ARC assembly B (with a detachable cable) an additional wrap plug allows testing of the ARC
only (see Table 3-3 on page 3-22).
3-20 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
Wrap Option Available on LIC12
3745
DTE
3746-900
Remote
DSU/CSU
NCTE
Local
DSU/CSU
NCTE
LIC12
(1)
(2)
Line
(3)
Ÿ (1) Internal level Wrap
Ÿ (2) Local DSU/CSU or NCTE wrap
Ÿ (3) Remote DSU/CSU or NCTE wrap
3745
DTE
3746-900
Remote
DSU/CSU
NCTE
Local
DSU/CSU
NCTE
LIC12 W
(4)
Line
Ÿ (4) LIC12 wrap plug
Wrap Option Available on LIC16
3745
3746-900
LIC16 W
(1)
(2)
Ÿ (1) LIC16 internal level wrap
Ÿ (2) LIC16 wrap plug
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics 3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
Available Wrap Plugs
Table 3-1. Wrap Plugs for Testing ARC Assembly
A and ARC Assembly B (with Cable)
Table 3-2. Wrap Plugs for LIC Testing
LIC Type
Wrap Plug
ARC Type
Wrap Plug
PN
PN
LIC11
58G9425
58X9354
58X9349
57G8097
ARC V.24 DTE
61F4523
61F4522
61F4527
61F4526
61F4525
61F4525
61F4578
61F4528
LIC12 for X.21
LIC12 for V.35
LIC16
ARC V.24 DCE
ARC V.35 DTE
ARC V.35 DCE
ARC/3745 V.24 DTE
ARC/3745 V.24 DCE
ARC/3745 V.35 DTE
ARC/3745 V.35 DCE
Table 3-3. Wrap Plugs for Testing ARC Assembly
B (without Cable)
ARC
Wrap Plug
PN
ARC V.24
58G5660
58G5661
58G5659
58G5662
ARC V.35 non 3745
ARC V.35 3745
ARC X.21
3-22 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
Figure 3-8. LICs Type 1 and 4 (Wrap Plug PN
65X8927)
Figure 3-9. LIC Type 3 (Wrap Cable PN 65X8928)
Figure 3-10. LIC Types 1, 3, and 4
Note: On LIC4B, only the port 0 is used.
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics 3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
Figure 3-11. LICs Type 5 and 6 (Wrap Plug PN 11F4815)
Port 0
Port 0
W
W
X
Y
X
Y
Lever
Switch
Z
Port 1
TYPE
LIC5
Knob Color
Black
TYPE
LIC6
Knob Color
Black
Figure 3-12. LIC Types 5 and 6
3-24 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
How to Run the Channel Wrap Test
Note: Do not start the IFT L001 with the wrap
plug already installed. Install or remove
the wrap plug when directed by the MOSS
console.
Ÿ If using the channel wrap plugs:
PN 03F4300 (for Tag)
and PN 03F4301 (for Bus)
1. Ask the customer to disable the channel
related to the channel adapter to be tested
with the Channel Wrap Test.
Install them for interface A in the IN ROW
(dark grey) and the CA terminators:
2. Select option ODG or CDG from the mainte-
PN 2282676 (for Tag)
and PN 2282675 (for Bus)
nance function menu.
3. Enter the following:
In the OUT ROW (light grey).
Ÿ Routine number LO01 in the
Ÿ If using the channel wrap plugs :
DIAG==> area.
Ÿ Channel adapter number in the ADP#==>
PN 26F1754 (for Tag)
and PN 26F1755 (for Bus)
area.
4. Press SEND.
Two installations must be done, one
after the other (when requested by
messages on the screen):
5. Two models of wrap plugs can be used for
this test:
Ÿ Bus PN 03F4301 and Tag PN 03F4300
Step 1 - Install the wrap plugs for
interface A in the IN ROW (dark
grey), and the CA terminators:
or
Ÿ Bus PN 26F1755 and Tag PN 26F1754
You will be asked for the wrap tools P/N you
are using.
PN 2282676 (for Tag)
and PN 2282675 (for Bus)
6. Messages on the screen will prompt you for
the required actions.
In the OUT ROW (light grey).
7. Refer to Figure 4-27, Figure 4-28 and to
Table 4-8 on page 4-25 to remove the inter-
face cables.
Step 2 - Install the wrap plugs in the
OUT ROW (light grey) and leave
the IN ROW (dark grey) free
(CA terminators have not to be
used).
8. When you requested by the diagnostic,
remove the interface cables and install the
wrap plugs.
10. You will be asked to install the wrap plugs on
the interface connectors B if the TPS feature
is installed on this channel. In this case
repeat the action as for interface A.
In order to allow the customer to use the
channel during test time, you have to connect
the cables together or to the terminators.
9. Ensure that the 'Select Out Bypass' switch is
in the 'NORMAL' position.
Depending the wrap plugs used, follow one of
these two actions:
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics 3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics
3-26 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
This chapter is to be used to exchange a defined FRU. Use all section from the begining to the end, to
determine:
1. Where the FRU is physically located
2. How to properly exchange FRUs
3. How to test the machine
4. What else must be done before returning the machine to the customer.
Exchange Precautions
1. Most of the 3745 FRUs can be exchanged in concurrent maintenance. Thus, it is very important that
these procedures be followed when replacing any FRU in the machine.
2. The control panel has voltage present even with the machine Powered OFF.
3. Ensure that the 3745 is powered OFF before replacing any FRUs, except for hot-pluggable FRUs
(LIC,MUX) and the separated power-controlled FRUs (FDD and HDD).
4. Before starting the FRU exchange, ensure that the involved area has been disabled by the cus-
tomer.
5. The 3745 Communication Controller contains cards that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD).
Use the ESD kit and store all cards in their protective packaging when you are not actually exchanging
them.
6. Procedures for exchanging FRUs are listed on the next pages. Use the list in alphabetical order.
7. After the 3745 FRU exchange, go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on
page 4-99.
Attention
Do not disassemble or attempt to remove FRUs from the 3745 until you have read the Safety Infor-
mation manual, GA33-0400.
Very important
Ensure that the required area has been disabled
before any FRU exchange
if not, go to start page and follow the appropriate procedure.
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-1
FRU Exchange
List of 3745 FRUs
Basic BOARD
LIC BOARD type 1 and 3
LIC BOARD type 2
MOSS BOARD
BPC
Use the “Basic Board Exchange Procedure” on page 4-77.
Use the “LIC Board Type 1 and 3 Exchange Procedure” on page 4-84.
Use the “LIC Board Type 2 Exchange Procedure” on page 4-88.
Use the “MOSS Board Exchange Procedure” on page 4-92.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Battery Exchange Procedure” on page 4-48.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Channel Tailgate Exchange Procedure” on page 4-96.
Use the “Control Panel Exchange Procedure” on page 4-46.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “DCREG Exchange Procedure” on page 4-38.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “DMUX Exchange Procedure” on page 4-39.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “EPO Exchange Procedure” on page 4-73.
Use the “ESS Tailgate Exchange Procedure” on page 4-64.
Use the “Fan 1 Exchange Procedure” on page 4-50.
Use the “Fan 2 Exchange Procedure” on page 4-51.
Use the “FDD Exchange Procedure” on page 4-52.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “HDD Exchange Procedure” on page 4-56.
Use the “LIC Exchange Procedure” on page 4-44.
Battery
CADR
CAL6
CAL7
Channel Tailgate
Control Panel
CSC
CSP
DCREG
DFA
DMUX
EAC
EPO Box
ESS Tailgate
Fan1
Fan2
FDD
FESH
HDD
LIC
MAC
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “PS2 and Primary Power Box Exchange Procedure” on page 4-69.
Use the “PS1 Exchange Procedure” on page 4-67.
Use the “PS2 and Primary Power Box Exchange Procedure” on page 4-69.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “SMUXA/B Exchange Procedure” on page 4-41.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “TERMC/TERMR Exchange Procedure” on page 4-61.
Use the “TERMD/TERMI Exchange Procedure” on page 4-62.
Use the “TERMD/TERMI Exchange Procedure” on page 4-62.
Use the “TERMC/TERMR Exchange Procedure” on page 4-61.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
MCC
MLA
MPC/MPC2
MSC/MSC2
PCC
PPB
PS1
PS2
PUC
SCTL
SMUXA/B
STO4
STO8
TERMC
TERMD
TERMI
TERMR
TIC2
TRM
4-2 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
FRU Physical Locations
3745 Frame
Lo c a t io n : 01
Figure 4-1. 3745 Frame (Front)
A
B
C
D
E
MOSS board (01A-X0 and 01A-Y0)
F
PS1
FDD
G
H
K
Basic board (01G-A1)
Panel
Primary power box + PS2
Fan1 (for powers)
HDD
Fan2 (for logic)
a
b
Basic board test points
MOSS board test points
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
Lo c a t io n : 01
M
R
C o n so le
L
N
W
P
Q
G ro un d in g
Are a
TR S S
C A' S
H P TS S
E S S
S
EP O
Re a r
C u st o m e r Ac c e ss
Figure 4-2. 3745 Frame (Back)
A1
A2
LIC board type 2
LIC board type 2
or
(Lines 80-95)
(Lines 64-79)
N
P
Q
Rear board access (01G-A1)
CA tailgate
TRSS, HPTSS & ESS tailgate
TRSS (Lines 1088 - 1091)
HPTSS (Lines 1028 - 1031)
ESS (Lines 1060 - 1063)
Console operator tailgate
LIC board type 1
Connectors
(Lines 128-159)
B1
B2
A1
A2
Connectors
LIC board type 1
LIC board type 1
or
(Lines 32-63)
(Lines 00-31)
R
See Figure 4-29 on page 4-26 and
Figure 4-30 on page 4-26 for details.
S
EPO
LIC board type 3
(Lines 00-15)
W
Grounding area
4-4 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
Basic Board, Cards, Connectors, and Crossovers
┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│
A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V W X │
├───────┬────┬────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│
│
│ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . │
│ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X X X │
│ CCU │
│
│
│ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ CA
│ 5 │ . . . . . . X X . . . . . . . . . . .
│ 6 │ . . . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . . .
│ 7 │ . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
│ 8 │ X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
│
│
│
│
│
│
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . X X X . . . . . . . . . . .
│ TPS │ 5 │
│
│
│ 7 │
X X X
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
X X X . . . . . . . .
X X X . . . . .
│
│
│ TRSS │ 1 │
│
│
│ 2 │
│
│
. . . . . . . .
│ TSS │ 3 │
. . . . . . X .
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ 4 │
│ 9 │
│ 1ð │
│ 11 │
│ 12 │
. . . . X . . .
. . . X . . . .
. . X . . . .
. X
X
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . X X
X X
│
│
│ HPTSS │ 3 │
│ /ESS │ 4 │
│
│
│
├───────┴────┴────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│
A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V W X │
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 4-3. Card Locations
Table 4-1. TIC Position and Ring Address
TRM
TIC Position
TIC2-1
Ring Address
1088
TRM-1
TIC2-2
1089
TRM-2
TIC2-3
1090
TIC2-4
1091
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
The following table and figures are configuration examples.
Table 4-2. Basic Board Configurations
Model
130
130
150
160
17x
TPS
no
HPTSS/ESS
Figure Available
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
no
Figure 4-6 on page 4-8
Figure 4-7 on page 4-9
Figure 4-8 on page 4-10
Figure 4-4
no
no
17x
no
yes
no
17x
yes
yes
17x
yes
Figure 4-5 on page 4-7
Figure 4-4. 3745 Model 17X Basic Board (without TPS, HPTSS, or ESS)
.1/Terminators TERMC and TERMR are present on 3745 model 17A only.
Note 1: STO may be STO4 (4MB) or STO8 (8MB).
Note 2: CAL may be CAL6 (for CADS feature) or CAL7 (for BCCA feature).
4-6 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
Figure 4-5. 3745 Model 17X (Basic Board with TPS and HPTSS or ESS)
.1/Terminators TERMC and TERMR are present on the 3745 Model 17A only.
Note 1: When TPS-5 is installed a Bypass card 1 (BPC1) is needed in location E (if CADR-7 is present).
Note 2: STO may be STO4 (4MB) or STO8 (8MB).
Note 3: CAL may be CAL6 (for the CADS feature) or CAL7 (for the BCCA feature).
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
Figure 4-6. 3745 Model 130 (Basic Board with TPS)
Note 1: When TPS-5 is installed, a Bypass card 1 (BPC1) is needed in location E (if CADR-7 is present).
Note 2: STO may be STO4 (4MB) or STO8 (8MB).
Note 3: CAL may be CAL6 (for the CADS feature) or CAL7 (for the BCCA feature).
4-8 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
Lo c a tio n 01G -A1
Figure 4-7. 3745 Model 150 (Basic Board)
Note: STO may be STO4 (4MB) or STO8 (8MB).
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
Lo c a tio n 01G -A1
Figure 4-8. 3745 Model 160 (Basic Board)
Note: STO may be STO4 (4MB) or STO8 (8MB).
4-10 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
MOSS Board, Cards, and Connectors
Location: 01A
YO
C
XO
D
A
B
D
E
A
B
C
E
F
G
H
1
1
D
F
A
M
C
C
P
C
C
M
L
A
M
P
C
2
3
2
3
M
S
C
4
5
4
5
A
C
B
D
E
Figure 4-9. 3745 Models 130, 150, 160, and 170 (MOSS Board, Cards, and Connectors)
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
Location: 01A
YO
C
XO
D
A
B
D
E
A
B
C
E
F
G
H
1
1
D
F
A
M
A
C
P
C
C
M
L
A
M
P
C
2
3
2
3
M
S
C
4
5
4
5
A
C
B
D
E
Figure 4-10. 3745 Model 17A (MOSS Board, Cards, and Connectors)
4-12 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
LIC Board Type 1
Lo c a t io n : 01M-A1. 01M-A2. 01L-A2
GND
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
W
Ad d re ssin g
Po we r
C o nne c t
Y
Z
GND
C u st o m e r Ac c e ss Are a
Figure 4-11. 3745 LIC Unit Type 1 Board and Connectors (for LIC Types 1,3, and 4 in Models 150, 160, and 170)
LIC Board Type 2
Lo c a t io n : 01L-A1. 01L-A2
GND
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
W
Ad d re ssin g
Po we r
C o nne c t
Y
Z
GND
C u st o m e r Ac c e ss Are a
Figure 4-12. 3745 LIC Unit Type 2 Board and Connectors (for LIC Types 5 and 6 in Models 150 and 170)
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
LIC Board Type 3
Lo c a t io n :01M-A2
Figure 4-13. 3745 LIC Unit Type 3 Board and Connectors (for LIC Types 1,3, and 4 in Model 150)
DMUX and SMUX Packaging
Table 4-3. DMUX Packaging
DMUX
Id
DMUX
Location
1 or 2
3 or 4
9 or 10
01M-A2B
01M-A1B
01L-A2B
Table 4-4. SMUX Packaging
SMUX
Type
SMUX
Id
SMUX
Location
SMUX-A
SMUX-B
5
7
01L-A2B
01L-A1B
4-14 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
LIC Board Type 1 Packaging for LICs Type 1 to 4
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
A
D
M
U
LIC Locations
in Board 01M-A2
03
01 02
04 05 06 07 08
X
00 04
12 16 20 24 28
08
01 05 09 13 17 21
29
25
D
M
U
Line Locations
in Board 01M-A2
(for LICs 1 and 4)
X
02
03
06
07
14 18 22 26 30
10
11 15 19 23 27 31
D
M
U
Line Locations
in Board 01M-A2
(for LIC 3)
X
00 04 08 12 16 20 24 28
Figure 4-14. 3745 LIC Board 01M-A2 Packaging
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
A
D
M
U
LIC Locations
in Board 01M-A1
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
X
60
52 56
32 36 40
44 48
37 41 45 49 53 57 61
33
34
D
M
U
Line Locations
in Board 01M-A1
(for LICs 1 and 4)
X
46
38 42
50 54 58 62
35 39 43 47 51 55 59 63
D
M
U
Line Locations
in Board 01M-A1
(for LIC 3)
X
40
56 60
44 48 52
32 36
Figure 4-15. 3745 LIC Board 01M-A1 Packaging
4-16 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
A
D
M
U
LIC Locations
in Board 01L-A2
35
33 34
36 37
39 40
38
X
136
128 132
129 133
140
144 148 152 156
157
145 149 153
137 141
D
M
U
Line Locations
in Board 01L-A2
(for LICs 1 and 4)
X
138
139
146
154
155
134
135
142
143
150
158
159
130
131
147 151
D
M
U
Line Locations
in Board 01L-A2
(for LIC 3)
X
148
128 132 136 140 144
152 156
Figure 4-16. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
LIC Board Type 2 Packaging for LIC Type 5
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
A
S
M
U
X
A
LIC Locations
in Board 01L-A2
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
A
78
64 66 68 70 72 74 76
S
M
U
X
A
Line Locations
in Board 01L-A2
65 67 69 71 73 75 77 79
Figure 4-17. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging (LICs Type 5)
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
A
S
M
U
X
A
LIC Locations
in Board 01L-A1
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
A
94
80 82 84 86 88 90 92
S
M
U
X
A
Line Locations
in Board 01L-A1
81 83 85 87 89 91 93 95
Figure 4-18. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A1 Packaging (LIC type 5)
4-18 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
LIC Board Type 2 Packaging for LIC Type 6 (Low Speed)
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
A
S
M
U
X
A
LIC Locations
in Board 01L-A2
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
A
78
64 66 68 70 72 74 76
S
M
U
X
A
Line Locations
in Board 01L-A2
Figure 4-19. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging (LICs Type 6 Low Speed)
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
A
S
M
U
X
A
LIC Locations
in Board 01L-A1
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
A
94
80 82 84 86 88 90 92
S
M
U
X
A
Line Locations
in Board 01L-A1
Figure 4-20. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A1 Packaging (LICs Type 6 Low Speed)
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
LIC Board Type 2 Packaging for LIC Type 6 (High Speed)
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
A
S
M
U
X
A
LIC Locations
in Board 01L-A2
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
A
78
64 66 68 70 72 74 76
S
M
U
X
A
Line Locations
in Board 01L-A2
Figure 4-21. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging (LIC Type 6 High Speed)
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
A
S
M
U
X
A
LIC Locations
in Board 01L-A1
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
A
94
80 82 84 86 88 90 92
S
M
U
X
A
Line Locations
in Board 01L-A1
Figure 4-22. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A1 Packaging (LIC Type 6 High Speed)
4-20 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
LIC Board Type 3 Packaging for LIC Types 1 to 4
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
A
D
M
U
LIC Locations
in Board 01M-A2
03
01 02
04
X
00 04
12
08
01 05 09 13
D
M
U
Line Locations
in Board 01M-A2
(for LICs 1 and 4)
X
02
03
06
07
14
10
11 15
D
M
U
Line Locations
in Board 01M-A2
(for LIC 3)
X
00 04 08 12
Figure 4-23. 3745 LIC Board 01M-A2 Packaging
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
Ethernet Lines Tailgate
Lo c a tio n : 01Q
C0
D0
Pin
15
Pin
8
J1
J1
Pin
9
Pin
1
J 2
J 2
E S S 3
E S S 4
Figure 4-24. 3745 Ethernet Lines Tailgate
Table 4-5. 3745 Ethernet Line Locations
Line
1060
1061
1062
1063
Location
01Q-C0J1
01Q-C0J2
01Q-D0J1
01Q-D0J2
ELA
3
3
4
4
4-22 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
High Speed Lines Tailgate
Lo c a tio n : 01Q
C0
D0
Pin 18
P in 3 4
J1
J1
J 2
J 2
Pin
1
P in 5 0
P in 3 3
Pin 17
Figure 4-25. 3745 High-Speed Lines Tailgate
Table 4-6. 3745 High-Speed Line Locations
Line
1028
1029
1030
1031
Location
01Q-C0J2
01Q-C0J1
01Q-D0J2
01Q-D0J1
LA
3
3
4
4
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
Token-Ring Tailgate
Lo c a t io n : 01Q -A0
Lo c a t io n : 01 Q -B0
Figure 4-26. 3745 Token-Ring Tailgate
Table 4-7. 3745 Token-ring Line Locations
Line
1088
1089
1090
1091
Location
01Q-A0J1
01Q-A0J2
01Q-B0J1
01Q-B0J2
TRA
1
1
2
2
4-24 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
Channel Tailgate
Lo c a tio n : 01G
Lo c a t io n : 01P
Figure 4-27. 3745 Channel Tailgate
Se le c t o u t
By p a ss Sw it c h
By p a s s
Ta g
Bu s
No rm a l
Figure 4-28. 3745 Channel Tailgate Details. For more details see YZ052 Sheet 2.
Table 4-8. Channel Interface. Channel Interface A and Channel Interface B (TPS) Distrib-
ution Chart.
Basic Board
Tailgate
CA (Interface A or Interface B)
Rear Position
01G-H
01G-F
01G-D
01G-B
01P-1
01P-2
01P-3
01P-4
CA5-A
CA6-A or CA5-B
CA7-A
CA8-A or CA7-B
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
Console Operator Tailgate For 3745 Models 1X0
Lo c a t io n : 01R -A0
J1
J 3
J 2
Figure 4-29. 3745 Models 1X0 Console Operator Tailgate
Console Operator Tailgate for 3745 Model 17A
Lo c a t io n : 01R -A0
P IN SIDE
C O NSO LE
PIN 1
Figure 4-30. 3745 Models 17A Console Operator Tailgate
EPO Tailgate
4-26 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
Lo c a t io n : 01S
Figure 4-31. 3745 EPO
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
3745 Control Panel
Lo c a t io n 01C
C o n t ro l Ke yb o a rd
Disp la y
LED
(Po we r o n o n ly)
BLAC K
RED
B1
1
2
4
A1
+
-
C o nn e c to r 01C -D1J1
EP O
C1
D1
Sw it c h O FF
Ba t t e ry
J1
1
3
Fro n t Vie w
LED
De t a il B 01C -B1J 1
B1
Fo r Mo d e l
17A
Fo r Mo d e ls
130 t o 170
A1
EP O
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
J1
C1
6
3
D
C
B A
Wirin g Sid e
D1
Ba t t e ry
De ta il C 01C -C 1SW1
Re a r Vie w
Figure 4-32. 3745 Control Panel
4-28 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
Flexible Diskette Drive
Lo c a t io n : 01B-A1
Figure 4-33. 3745 Flexible Diskette Drive
Hard Disk Drive
Lo c a t io n : 01D-A1
1
Figure 4-34. 3745 Hard Disk Drive
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
Primary Power Box
Lo c a t io n : 01H
Figure 4-35. 3745 Primary Power Box Components
4-30 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
Power Supply 1
Lo c a t io n : 01F
J 2
J 3
J 5
J 7
J1
J 6
J 4
TB 1
J 8
TB
3
5V
TB
2
5V
TB 5
TB
4
TB6
T0
01H-A1J1
Re a r vie w
Fro n t vie w
Figure 4-36. 3745 Power Supply 1 Components
3745 Power Supply Cross Reference
Table 4-9. 3745 Power Supply Cross Reference
Power Supply
Location
Area Supplied
PS1
01F
Basic board
MOSS board
FDD and HDD
LIC board 01M-A1
LIC board 01M-A2
LIC board 01L-A1
LIC board 01L-A2
PS2
01H
Fans
PCC
Panel
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
Power Supply 2
Lo c a t io n : 01H
J 6
C R1
R1
T1
C 2
C R2
C1
F1
C P3
C VT
SW1
K 2
C 3
J 3
TB1
Figure 4-37. 3745 Power Supply 2 Components
4-32 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRU Exchange
Fan 1
Figure 4-38. 3745 Fan 1 Components
Fan 2
Figure 4-39. 3745 Fan 2 Components
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
3745 FRU Exchange Procedures
Card Exchange Procedure
8. If the card to be replaced is a CADR, go to
Step 24 on page 4-36.
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
9. If the card to be replaced is an MLA, go to
Step 33 on page 4-37.
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front door.
10. Remove the crossover connectors (if installed)
from the card exchanged.
11. Remove the line cable(s), if any (cards FESH,
TIC2, or EAC).
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-40.
12. If the card to be exchanged is on the MOSS
board, remove the shipping springs that
secure the extractor levers by sqeezing them
together. Refer to Figure 4-42 on page 4-35.
13. If the card to be exchanged is a CAL or a
STO, ensure that the new card is identical
with the previous one (for STO there are two
types of cards: STO4 for 4MB and STO8 for
8MB. For CAL there are two types of cards:
CAL6 for CADS feature and CAL7 for BCCA
feature).
14. Exchange the card, re-install the crossover
connectors (if installed) and re-install the ship-
ping springs (if you have exchanged a card
on the MOSS board).
15. Replace the board covers.
16. Switch CB1 ON.
17. Close the front door.
18. If the replaced card is the PCC, go to step 21.
19. Power the 3745 ON.
20. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diag-
nostic in ODG that you ran before you
exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take
After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange”
on page 4-99.
Figure 4-40. CB1 Location.
5. Check for the physical location.
a. For the physical board location, refer to
Figure 4-1 on page 4-3
b. For the physical card location:
PCC Replacement
Ÿ On the Basic board refer to Figure 4-4
on page 4-6, Figure 4-5 on page 4-7,
or Figure 4-6 on page 4-8 or
Figure 4-7 on page 4-9.
21. From Step 18: Power the 3745 ON. Ignore
the BERs that are logged, (they are due to the
time-of-day clock not being set).
Ÿ On the MOSS board, refer to
22. Set the time-of-day clock. Refer to the IBM
3745 Communication Controller Service
Function, SY33-2069.
Figure 4-9 on page 4-11.
6. Remove the following covers, (refer to
Figure 4-41 on page 4-35): Cover .1/ for the
basic board (loosen the 2 screws .2/ and lift
up the cover), and covers .3/ for the MOSS
board (remove the 7 screws .4/).
23. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diag-
nostic in ODG that you ran before you
exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take
After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange”
on page 4-99.
7. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
4-34 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Fro n t Vie w
Figure 4-41. Covers
Sp rin g
Figure 4-42. Shipping Springs
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
CADR Exchange
24. From step 8 on page 4-34: At the Channel
Tailgate set the Select Out Bypass switch to
bypass (refer to Figure 4-27 on page 4-25, to
Figure 4-43, and to Figure 4-44) according to
the CADR to be replaced (refer to
Table 4-10).
25. Remove the crossover connectors from the
card to be exchanged.
26. Exchange the card and re-install the crossover
connectors.
27. Replace the board cover.
28. Set the Select Out Bypass switch to normal
29. Switch CB1 ON.
30. Close the front door.
31. Power the 3745 ON.
32. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diag-
nostic in ODG that you ran before you
exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take
After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange”
on page 4-99.
Cha nne l
Ta il Ga te
Re a r
Figure 4-43. Channel Tailgate Location
Table 4-10. Select Out Switches According to
CADR Cards
Select Out Switch
01P-4
CADR Card
01G-A1B
01G-A1D
01G-A1F
01G-A1H
01P-3
01P-2
01P-1
Se le c t o u t
By p a ss Sw it c h
By p a s s
Ta g
Bu s
No rm a l
Figure 4-44. Select Out Switch
4-36 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
MLA Exchange.
a. Locate the card (refer to Figure 4-10 on
page 4-12).
b. Disconnect the cable attached to the card.
c. Attention: Use the ESD kit and
procedures.
d. Loosen the two thumbscrews and remove
the card.
e. Install the new card and tighten the two
thumbscrews.
33. From step 9 on page 4-34: Obtain the
service processor maintenance password from
the customer in order to logon at the service
processor console.
34. If the logon is already done, go to Step 36. If
it is not done, proceed with Step 35.
35. To log on:
f. Reconnect the cable to the card.
g. Replace the board cover(s).
h. Switch CB1 ON.
a. In the MOSS-E View window, click on
Program (in the action bar).
i. Close the front door.
j. Power ON the 3745.
b. Click on Log on MOSS-E.
c. Enter the password.
Note: This action will also run MOSS
diagnostics and complete a MOSS IML. A
successful completion will result in a code
F0E, F0F, or 000. If any other code is
displayed, an error was detected. See
“3745 Control Panel Codes” on
36. In the MOSS-E View window, locate the serial
number of the machine that contains the MLA
card.
37. Click on the associated icon. The serial
number is displayed on the bottom line of the
MOSS-E View window.
page 1-15.
44. On the Controller Repair Message window
of the MOSS-E, click on OK.
38. In the MOSS-E View window double-click on
Service Processor icon.
45. On the Controller Installation window, click
on Save.
39. In the Service Processor Menu window, click
on the Configuration Management option.
46. A new window prompts you to install the
installation diskette in the service processor.
40. Double-click on the Manage 3745/3746-9x0
Installation option.
47. Click on OK when it is done, a Controller
Saving Message is displayed.
41. In the Controller Installation window select
the machine by clicking on the 3745 serial
number for which your are called and click on
Repair.
48. Remove the diskette, and click on OK.
49. The Controller Installation window is again
displayed, click on Cancel.
42. On the Repairs Action for 3745 window
select the Change 3745 MOSS LAN Adapter
option and click on OK.
50. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run
or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
43. The Controller Repair Message window is
displayed. Perform the following steps before
clicking on OK.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
DCREG Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power OFF on the control panel.
3. Open the front door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-45.
5. Locate the basic board. Refer to Figure 4-45.
6. Remove the basic board cover (loosen the
two screws then lift up the cover).
7. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
8. At the channel tailgate set all the Select Out
Bypass switches to bypass (refer to
Figure 4-43 and to Figure 4-44 on
page 4-36).
9. Remove all the cards.
10. Release the retainer at the bottom of the
board (one screw must be loosened).
11. Remove the DCREG card in position E-F or
G-H of row Z. Refer to Figure 4-5 on
page 4-7, Figure 4-6 on page 4-8, or
Figure 4-7 on page 4-9.
Figure 4-45. Basic Board and CB1 Locations
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new DCREG card.
2. Re-install the retainer.
3. Re-install the cards.
4. Replace the basic board cover.
5. Set all the Select Out Bypass switches to
normal.
6. Switch CB1 ON.
7. Close the front door.
8. Press Power On on the control panel.
9. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diag-
nostic in ODG that you ran before you
exchanged the FRU.
10. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run
or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
4-38 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
DMUX Exchange Procedure
Since the DMUX is hot-pluggable, there is no
need to power OFF.
Removal Procedure
1. Open the rear door.
2. For the board location refer to Figure 4-46.
3. Remove the related DMUX cover (refer to
Figure 4-47). Two screws must be removed
.1/. (Two types of DMUX cover exist
according to the board location.)
4. For the DMUX location, refer to Figure 4-48
on page 4-40. The thumb screw color of the
DMUX is white.
5. Refer to Figure 4-49 on page 4-40. Note the
DMUX cables locations then remove them.
6. Unfasten the thumb screw holding the DMUX
cassette to the board.
7. Remove the DMUX cassette.
Figure 4-46. Location of the LIC Boards
Figure 4-47. DMUX Cover
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
DMUX
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
W
W
X
Cable 2
Y
Z
Y
Z
Figure 4-48. DMUX Location
Cable 1
Figure 4-49. DMUX
4. Re-install the DMUX cover with the two
screws. Refer to Figure 4-47 on page 4-39.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new DMUX cassette.
5. Close the rear door.
2. Fasten the thumb screw holding the DMUX
cassette to the board. Finger strengh is
enough. Do not use tools.
6. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diag-
nostic that you ran before you exchanged the
FRU. Go to “Action to Take After a Diag-
nostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on
page 4-99.
3. Replace the DMUX cables in their proper
positions.
Note
If exchanging the DMUX does not solve the problem, you should test the voltage levels at the DMUX
test points. If voltage levels are not correct, suspect the Power Supply 1.
For test point pin locations, see page YZ738.
For voltage tolerances, see IBM 3745 Hardware Maintenance Reference, SY33-2066.
4-40 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
SMUXA/B Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
Since the SMUX is hot-pluggable, there is no
need to power OFF.
1. Open the rear door.
2. For the board location, refer to Figure 4-50.
3. Remove one of the SMUX covers. Refer to
Figure 4-51 (two screws must be removed
.1/).
Figure 4-50. Location of the LIC Boards Type 2
Figure 4-51. SMUX Cover
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
4. For the SMUX location, refer to Figure 4-52.
Refer to Figure 4-53 and do the following:
5. Remove the serial link cable (if installed) from
the SMUX (this cable is absent on SMUXB
when SMUXA and the flat cable .2/ are
present).
6. Remove the flat cable .2/ (if installed) which
connects the two SMUXs, (if two LIC boards
type 2 are present in the machine). This
cable may be absent in spite of the presence
of the two boards.
7. Unfasten the thumb screw holding the SMUX
cassette to the board.
8. Remove the SMUX cassette.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
Figure 4-53. SMUX Link and Cable
Figure 4-52. SMUX Location
4-42 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
5. Re-install the SMUX cover with the 2 screws.
Refer to Figure 4-51 on page 4-41.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new SMUX cassette.
6. Close the rear door.
2. Fasten the thumb screw holding the SMUX
cassette to the board. Finger strength is
enough. Do not use tools.
7. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diag-
nostic you ran before you exchanged the
FRU, then go to “Action to Take After a Diag-
nostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on
page 4-99.
3. Replace the SMUX cables.
4. Set the XMIT level according to the table
below. Refer to Figure 4-53 on page 4-42 for
the sliding switches.
3
┌────────────────────┬──────────┬───────────────────────────┐
│ Country
|XMIT Level|Sliding Switches
|(in dBm) |
|
|
│ (leased lines)
├────────────────────┼──────────┼───────────────────────────┤
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ 1
2
3
4 │
ON
│
├──────┬──────┬──────┬──────┤
│Canada, Greece,
│Ireland, U.S.A.,
│and other
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
Push
ð
────5┌──┐
────5┌──┐
┌────┴──┴┐
│AP/APG countries
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│
│
│
│ - 1
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│ - 2 │ ON │
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│ - 3 │ ON │ ON │
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│ - 4 │ ON │
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│ - 5 │ ON │ │ ON │
│ ON │
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
OFF
│
│
│
Push
│
│
│
│
┌──┐%────
┌┴──┴────┐
│
│
│
│
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│Chile, and other
│E.M.E.A.
│ - 6
│
│
│
│ ON │ ON │
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│countries
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│
│ - 7
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│ - 8 │ ON │
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│Hong-Kong │ - 9 │ ON │ │ ON │
│ ON │ ON │ ON │
│
│
│
│
│
│
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│Denmark, Finland
│Iceland, Italy,
│Sweden
│ -1ð
│
│
│
│ ON │
│ ON │
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│
│ -11
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│ -12 │ ON │ ON │
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│Australia, U.K. │ -13 │ ON │ │ ON │ ON │
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│ -14 │ ON │ ON │ ON │
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│ ON │ ON │
│ ON │
│
│
│
│
│
│France, Japan
│ -15
│ ON │ ON │ ON │ ON │
└────────────────────┴──────────┴──────┴──────┴──────┴──────┘
Note
If exchanging the SMUX does not solve the problem, you should test the voltage levels at the SMUX
test points. If the voltage levels are not correct, suspect the Power Supply 1.
For test point pin location, see page YZ739.
For voltage tolerances, see IBM 3745 Hardware Maintenance Reference, SY33-2066.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
LIC Exchange Procedure
Line
Speed Switch
Removal Procedure: Since the LIC is hot-
pluggable, there is no need to power OFF.
1. For physical locations, refer to Figure 4-54,
Figure 4-56, and to Figure 4-57 on
page 4-45.
2. Open the rear door.
3. Remove the line cables from the
PTT/Common carrier wall socket if you deal
with LIC 5 or 6.
4. Remove the line cables from the LIC. Note
their positions.
W
5. If you are working with LIC 5 or 6, check if the
LIC configuration is available.If it is not, use
the PKD (Refer to the Connection and Inte-
gration Guide, SA33-0141).
X
Y
6. Unfasten the thumb screw holding the LIC
cassette to the board.
7. Remove the LIC cassette.
BPS
19200
9600
BPS
56000
(V35)
(V24)
Figure 4-55. LIC 6
Installation Procedure
1. If you are working with a LIC type 6 (refer to
Figure 4-55), note the position of the line
speed switch, then set the line speed switch
of the new LIC accordingly.
2. Install the new LIC cassette.
3. Fasten the thumb screw holding the LIC cas-
sette to the board. Finger strength is enough.
Do not use tools.
4. If a LIC 5 or 6 has been installed, configura-
tion must be done with the PKD (refer to the
Connection and Integration Guide,
SA33-0141).
5. Replace the line cables in their proper posi-
tions on the LIC.
6. Reconnect the line cable(s) to the
PTT/Common carrier wall socket if you are
working with LIC 5 or 6.
Figure 4-54. Location of the LIC Boards
7. Close the rear door.
8. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diag-
nostic that you ran before you exchanged the
FRU. Go to “Action to Take After a Diag-
4-44 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
nostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on
page 4-99.
GND
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
W
Ad d re ssin g
Po we r
C o nne c t
Y
Z
GND
C u st o m e r Ac c e ss Are a
Figure 4-56. LIC Board Type 1 and 2
Figure 4-57. LIC Board Type 3
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Control Panel Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-58.
5. Locate the control panel and the MOSS.
Refer to Figure 4-58.
6. Open the control panel door (one screw must
be removed).
7. Remove the MOSS right cover (three screws
must be removed .1/). Refer to Figure 4-59.
8. Refer to Figure 4-58 and to Figure 4-60 on
page 4-47, then remove (from the MOSS
board) the cable going to the control panel
(Y0-D1).
9. Release the cable from its securing points.
Refer to Figure 4-61 on page 4-47 and do the
following:
Figure 4-58. Panel, MOSS, and CB1 Locations
Figure 4-59. MOSS Right Cover
4-46 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
10. Remove the panel cover (three screws must
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new panel on the panel door and
be removed .2/).
11. Remove the five screws holding the panel to
attach it with the five screws .3/.
the door .3/.
2. Re-install the panel cover with the three
12. Withdraw the panel with the cable.
screws .2/.
3. Re-install the cable in its path and reconnect it
to the MOSS board.
4. Re-install the MOSS right cover with the three
screws .1/.
5. Close the control panel door with one screw.
6. Switch CB1 ON.
7. Close the front door.
8. Press Power On on the control panel.
9. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diag-
nostic in ODG that you ran before you
exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take
After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange”
on page 4-99.
Figure 4-60. Panel Cable Location on MOSS Board
J
1
Figure 4-61. Panel
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Battery Exchange Procedure
It is the Service Personnels responsibility to
exchange the battery.
The 3745 will automatically send an alert to the
operator console when there is a need to
exchange the battery.
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the control panel. Refer to
Figure 4-62.
J
1
2. Open the front door.
3. Open the control panel door (one screw must
be removed).
4. Locate the battery .1/. Refer to Figure 4-63.
5. Remove the tie wrap on the battery and dis-
connect the battery plug .2/.
Figure 4-63. Battery Location
5. Battery disposal must be performed
according to the instruction on the battery
case.
Reporting: Update the battery exchange
record as follows:
Ÿ Using the 3745 console, type POS on any dis-
played screen selection area for Power Ser-
vices Screen.
Ÿ Press SEND.
Ÿ The Power Services Screen is displayed.
Refer to Figure 4-64 on page 4-49. If a
MOSS console function is in process, press
the F1 key to terminate.
Ÿ Type 2 in the selection area for Battery
change acknowledge.
Ÿ Press SEND.
Ÿ The Battery Change Screen is displayed.
Refer to Figure 4-65 on page 4-49.
Ÿ Type Y in the CONFIRM THAT THE
BATTERY HAS BEEN CHANGED (Y/N) ==>
field.
Figure 4-62. Panel Location
Ÿ Press SEND.
Installation Procedure
A successful command message will appear.
1. Insert the new battery and reconnect the plug.
2. Fasten the tie wrap to the battery.
3. Close the control panel door with the screw.
4. Close the front door.
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102 for
the time update.
Note: If the code 007 is displayed on the 3745
control panel, a MOSS IML (function 1)
should be performed to reset this code.
4-48 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
à
ð
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745
X71:ðAð8ðð
X71:ðBC8ðð
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCA-A
PROCESS MOSS-ALONE
BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK
RESET
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:2
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: POWER SERVICES
- SELECT ONE OPTION, THEN PRESS ENTER ==>
1 = POWER DUMP
2 = BATTERY CHANGE ACKNOWLEDGE
===>
F6:QUIT
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
ð
Figure 4-64. Power Services Screen
à
ꢀCUSTOMER ID:
3745
X71:ðAð8ðð
X72:ðBC8ðð
SERIAL NUMBER:
CCU-A
PROCESS MOSS-ALONE
BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK
RUN
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:2
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: POWER SERVICES
CONFIRM THAT THE BATTERY HAS BEEN CHANGED (Y/N) ==>
===>
F6:QUIT
áF1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
ñ
Figure 4-65. Acknowledge Screen
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Fan 1 Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-66.
5. Locate Fan 1. Refer to Figure 4-66.
6. At Fan 1, disconnect the air flow detector
cable and the power cable. Refer to
Figure 4-67.
7. Remove the screw .1/ which maintains Fan 1
to the frame.
8. Slide the Fan 1 assembly out.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new Fan 1 in the frame and fasten
Figure 4-66. Fan 1 and CB1 Locations
it with the screw .1/.
2. Reconnect the air flow detector cable and the
power cable to Fan 1.
3. Switch CB1 ON.
4. Close the front door.
5. Press Power On on the control panel.
6. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diag-
nostic in ODG that you ran before you
exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take
After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange”
on page 4-99.
Figure 4-67. Fan 1 Air Flow Detector and Power
Cables
4-50 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Fan 2 Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power OFF on the control panel.
3. Open the front door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-68.
5. Locate Fan 2. Refer to Figure 4-68.
6. At Fan 2, disconnect the air flow detector
cable and the power cable. Refer to
Figure 4-69.
7. Remove the two screws .1/ which maintain
Fan 2 on the frame.
8. Slide the Fan 2 assembly out.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new Fan 2 in the frame and fasten
Figure 4-68. Fan 2 and CB1 Locations
it with the two screws .1/.
2. Reconnect the air flow detector cable and the
power cable to Fan 2.
3. Switch CB1 ON.
4. Close the front door.
5. Press Power On on the control panel.
6. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diag-
nostic in ODG that you ran before you
exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take
After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange”
on page 4-99.
Figure 4-69. Fan 2 Air Flow Detector and Power
Cables
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
FDD Exchange Procedure
4. Press Validate.
Removal Procedure: For physical locations,
refer to Figure 4-70.
5. Disable the MOSS area as follows (if NCP is
running in the 3745):
Important
a. Invoke Menu 2 (See PF key line).
The MOSS must be loaded from the Disk. If you
are not sure, execute a MOSS IML from the Disk.
Refer to “How to Perform 3745 Control Panel
Operations” on page 1-82.
b. In Menu 2, type MOF in the selection area
for MOSS OFFLINE.
c. Press SEND.
d. MOSS OFFLINE is displayed.
6. Open the front door.
Check that the Power Control display is set to
local 3 on the control panel. If yes, go to Step 3.
7. Before exchanging the FDD, check the volt-
ages as follows:
If not, proceed with Step 1.
1. Press power Control until 3 (Local mode) is
Note: The voltages are not permanently
applied on the FDD and, to have them avail-
able for measurement for approximately 15
minutes, a MOSS IML is required.
displayed in the power control window.
2. Press Validate.
3. Press Service until 1 (Maintenance 1) is dis-
a. Press Function key on the control panel
until the MOSS IML function 1 is dis-
played.
played in the service window.
Figure 4-70. FDD and CB1 Location
4-52 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Table 4-11. Voltage Test Points
Connector
Pin
Voltage
Maximum
Minimum
01B-A1J2
(FDD)
1
2
3
4
+12 V
GND
GND
+ 5 V
+13.00 V
+11.00 V
+ 5.25 V
+ 4.85 V
PS1-J1
Voltage
Test Points
2
5
12
+12 V
+ 5 V
GND
+13.00 V
+ 5.25 V
+11.00 V
+ 4.85 V
b. Press Validate.
1) Inform the customer that the 3745
is to be powered OFF.
c. Using Table 4-11, measure the voltages
on the voltage test points of PS1 (refer to
Figure 4-71). If the voltages are incorrect,
exchange PS1.
2) Press Power Off on the control panel.
3) Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to
Figure 4-70 on page 4-52.
8. Remove the power as follows:
4) Go to Step 9 on page 4-54.
a. Invoke the menu 1 (see PF key line).
b. In menu 1 type DIF in the selection area
for Disk Function.
c. Press SEND.
d. The Disk Function Screen is displayed.
e. Type 8 the in selection area for Power
OFF Disk/Diskette Driver.
f. Press SEND.
g. If DISK/DISKETTE DRIVES CONCUR-
RENT MAINTENANCE ENTERED is dis-
played, go to Step 9 on page 4-54.
h. If DISK/DISKETTE DRIVES CONCUR-
RENT MAINTENANCE CANCELLED is
displayed, procede as follows:
Figure 4-71. PS1
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
9. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
10. Refer to Figure 4-72. Remove the MOSS
board covers
.1/ (seven screws must be
removed .2/).
11. Refer to Figure 4-73 .
12. Locate the FDD .3/.
P
13. Remove the two cables .4/ at the back of the
FDD.
14. Remove the four securing screws from the
assembly .5/.
15. Slide the FDD assembly out.
Figure 4-73. FDD Removal
Figure 4-72. MOSS Covers
4-54 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
6. Install the primary diskette in the FDD.
Installation Procedure
7. Press Function on the control panel until 9
(Load from Diskette) is displayed in the func-
tion window.
1. Check that the new FDD has a jumper in posi-
tion 0 (refer to Figure 4-74).
8. Press Validate.
Note: This action will also run MOSS diag-
nostics and complete a MOSS IML. A suc-
cessful completion will result in a code F0E,
F0F, or 000. If any other code is displayed,
an error was detected. See “3745 Control
Panel Codes” on page 1-15
9. Remove the primary diskette from the FDD.
10. Close the front door.
11. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diag-
nostic that you ran before you exchanged the
FRU. Go to “Action to Take After a Diag-
nostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on
page 4-99.
Figure 4-74. FDD Connectors
2. Install the new FDD assembly with the four
screws .5/. Refer to Figure 4-73 on
page 4-54.
12. Install the primary diskette in the FDD.
13. Switch CB1 ON.
14. Power the 3745 ON with function 9 (Load
3. Reconnect the two cables at the back of the
from Diskette).
FDD .4/. Refer to Figure 4-73 on page 4-54.
15. A successful completion will result in a code
F0E, F0F, or 000. If any other code is dis-
played, an error was detected. See “3745
Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15
4. Re-install the covers of the MOSS board .1/
with the seven screws .2/. Refer to
Figure 4-72 on page 4-54.
Note: In the remaining steps, it is assumed
that the microcode is at the same level on
both the diskette and the hard disk.
16. Remove the primary diskette from the FDD.
17. Close the front door.
5. Re-apply power as follows:
18. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diag-
nostic that you ran before you exchanged the
FRU. Go to “Action to Take After a Diag-
nostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on
page 4-99.
a. If you powered OFF the machine, go to
Step 12.
b. If you did not power OFF the machine,
then go to Step 6.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
HDD Exchange Procedure
g. If POWER OFF SUCCESSFUL. CON-
CURRENT MAINTENANCE ACCEPTED
is displayed, go to Step 12 on page 4-57.
Removal Procedure: For physical locations,
refer to Figure 4-75.
Important
h. If POWER OFF UNSUCCESSFUL. CON-
CURRENT MAINTENANCE REJECTED
is displayed, do the following:
Check that the Power Control display is set to
local 3 on the control panel. If yes, go to Step 3.
1) Inform the customer that the 3745
If not, proceed with Step 1.
is to be powered OFF.
1. Press power Control until 3 (Local mode) is
2) Press Power Off on the control panel.
displayed in the power control window.
3) Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to
2. Press Validate.
Figure 4-75
3. Press Service until 1 (Maintenance 1) is dis-
4) Go to Step 12 on page 4-57.
played in the service window.
4. Press Validate.
5. For the 3745 Model 130 to 170 go to Step 9.
For Model 17A continue, with Step 6
6. You should be logged ON on the service
processor console. If not, go to “Console Use
for Maintenance” on page 1-1 for logging ON
and return here.
7. In the MOSS-E View window, double-click on
your 3745 icon.
8. In the 3745 Menu window, double-click on the
MOSS Console option.
9. Disable the MOSS area as follows:
a. Call Menu 2.
b. Type MOF on the selection line.
c. Press SEND.
d. MOSS OFFLINE is displayed.
10. Open the front door.
11. Remove power as follows:
a. Invoke Menu 1 (see PF key line).
Figure 4-75. HDD and CB1 Locations
b. In Menu 1 type DIF in the selection area
for Disk Functions.
c. Press SEND.
d. The Disk Functions Screen is displayed.
e. Type 7 in the selection area for Power
OFF Disk/Diskette Drive.
f. Press SEND.
4-56 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
12. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
13. Open the control panel door.
14. Refer to Figure 4-76:
15. Locate the HDD .1/.
16. Remove the three cables (and the ground wire
if any) from the drive .2/.
17. Unfasten the HDD assembly .3/ from the
frame. Two screws .4/ must be removed.
18. Slide the HDD assembly out .3/.
19. Remove the four screws .5/ which maintain
the HDD to the assembly bracket.
Figure 4-76. HDD Removal
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Identify the HDD that you received using
Figure 4-77 (several types of HDD are avail-
able).
9. Install the new HDD on the assembly bracket
with the four screws .5/.
10. Slide in the HDD assembly and fasten it to the
frame with the two screws .4/.
11. Reconnect the three cables and the ground
2. If you receive a new HDD assembly similar to
the HDD shown (see Figure 4-77) continue
with Step 3. Otherwise, go to Step 8.
wire .2/.
Note: After HDD exchange, it will be neces-
sary to IML from the diskette.
12. Continue with Step 13.
13. Re-apply power as follows:
a. If you powered OFF the 3745, then go to
Step 28 on page 4-59.
b. If you did not power OFF the 3745, go to
Step 14
14. Install the primary backup diskette in the FDD.
15. At the control panel, select Service Mode .1/
or .2/ and press Validate.
16. Press Function on the control panel until 9
(Load from Diskette) is displayed in the func-
tion window.
Figure 4-77. New Type of HDD
17. Press Validate.
3. Ensure that the jumpers are present in posi-
tion J3 and J4. See Figure 4-77.
Note: This action will also run MOSS diag-
nostics and complete a MOSS IML. A suc-
cessful completion will result in a code F0E,
F0F, or 000. If any other code is displayed, an
error was detected. See “3745 Control Panel
Codes” on page 1-15.
4. Install the new HDD on the assembly bracket
with the four screws .5/.
5. Slide in the HDD assembly and fasten it to the
frame with the two screws .4/.
18. For 3745 Model 130 to 170 go to Step 20.
For Model 17A, continue with step 19.
6. Reconnect the three cables .2/.
Note: After HDD exchange, it will be neces-
sary to IML from the diskette.
19. Check that the 3745 icon in the MOSS-E
View window has changed from grey to pink
and perform the following bullet otherwise
check your installation. If problem persists
call your support.
7. Go to Step 13.
Ÿ In the MOSS-E View window, double-click
on your 3745 icon.
Ÿ In the 3745 Menu window, double-click on
the MOSS Console option.
20. Inform the customer that the 3745 will be
powered OFF during the following steps.
21. Refer to the IBM 3745 Communication Con-
troller Service Function, SY33-2069 to:
Ÿ Initialize the disk.
Ÿ Restore the disk from the backup
diskettes, follow the prompt screens until
Disk correctly restored is displayed.
Ÿ Press Power Off on the control panel.
Figure 4-78. HDD Installation
8. Ensure that there is a jumper in position 1 of
the new HDD. Refer to Figure 4-80 or to
Figure 4-79 on page 4-60 according to the
HDD type.
When these actions are completed, a MOSS
IML from the HDD will have been executed.
Note: This action will also run MOSS diag-
nostics and complete a MOSS IML. A suc-
cessful completion will result in a code F0E,
4-58 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
F0F, or 000. If any other code is displayed, an
error was detected. See “3745 Control Panel
Codes” on page 1-15
Ÿ Restore the disk from the backup
diskettes. Follow the prompt screens until
Disk correctly restored is displayed.
Then power OFF the 3745.
22. Press Service until 2 is displayed in the
service window.
When these actions are completed, a MOSS
IML from the HDD will have been executed.
23. Press Validate.
Note: This action will also run MOSS diag-
nostics and complete a MOSS IML. A suc-
cessful completion will result in a code F0E
,F0F, or 000. If any other code is displayed,
an error was detected. See “3745 Control
Panel Codes” on page 1-15
24. Press Function. until 1 is displayed in the
power control window.
25. Press Validate.
26. Press Power On on the control panel.
27. Go to Step 42.
37. Press Service until 2 is displayed in the
28. Install the primary backup diskette in the FDD.
29. Switch CB1 ON.
service window.
38. Press Validate.
30. At the control panel select Service Mode .1/
or .2/ and press Validate.
39. Press Function until 1 is displayed in the
power control window.
31. Press Function on the control panel until 9
(Load from Diskette) is displayed in the func-
tion window.
40. Press Validate.
41. Press Power On on the control panel.
42. Close the control panel door.
43. Close the front door.
32. Press Validate.
33. Press Power On on the control panel.
44. For 3745 Model 130 to 170 continue with Step
45. For model 17A, go to Step 47.
34. For 3745 Model 130 to 170 go to Step 36.
For Model 17A, continue with step 35.
45. Refer to the Installation Guide SY33-2067,
and enter the customer default password.
Then update and activate the maintenance
password.
35. Check that the 3745 icon in the MOSS-E
View window has changed from grey to pink
and perform the following bullet otherwise
check your installation and if problem persists
call your support.
46. Ask the customer to update the customer
password if needed.
Ÿ In the MOSS-E View window, double-click
on your 3745 icon.
47. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diag-
nostic that you ran before you exchanged the
FRU.
Ÿ In the 3745 Menu window, double-click on
the MOSS Console option.
36. Refer to the IBM 3745 Communication Con-
troller Service Function, SY33-2069 to:
48. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run
or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
Ÿ Initialize the disk.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
┌─┐
│ │ ð1D-A1J2
│ │
│ │
└─┤
Data
│ o o %── Position 1
│ o o %── Position 1
┌─┐
│ o o
│ o o
│ │
│ o o
│ o o
│ o o %── Position 5
│
│
│
│
│ o o
ð1D-A1J2 │ │
Data │ │
│ o o
│ o o
└─┤
│
│
│
│ o o
│ o o
│ o o %── Position 8
│
│ ┌─┤
┌─┤
│ │ │
│ │
│ │ │
│ │
│ │ │
│ │
│ │ │
│ │
│ │ │ ð1D-A1J1
│ │ │ Control
│ │ │
│ │ ð1D-A1J1
│ │ Control
│ │
│ │ │
│ │
│ └─┤
└─┤
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
├─┐
├─┐
│O│
│O│
│O│ ð1D-A1J3
│O│ Power
│O│
│O│ ð1D-A1J3
│O│ Power
│O│
└─┘
└─┘
┌─┐ ð1D-A1J4
└─┘ Frame Ground
┌─┐ ð1D-A1J4
└─┘ Frame Ground
Figure 4-80. HDD Connectors and Jumpers
Figure 4-79. HDD Connectors and Jumpers
4-60 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
TERMC/TERMR Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-81.
5. Locate the basic board. Refer to Figure 4-81.
6. Remove the basic board cover (two screws
must be loosened). Then lift up the cover.
7. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
8. At the Channel Tailgate set all the Select Out
Bypass switches to bypass (refer to
Figure 4-43 and to Figure 4-44 on
page 4-36).
9. Remove all the cards.
10. According to the card terminator that is to be
exchanged continue with Step a or b.
a. For TERMC:
Release the retainer at the bottom of the
board (one screw must be loosened).
Then remove the TERMC card from row
Z. Refer to Figure 4-4 on page 4-6 or
Figure 4-5 on page 4-7
Figure 4-81. Basic Board and CB1 Locations
b. For TERMR:
Remove the TERMR card from row Y.
Refer to Figure 4-4 on page 4-6 or
Figure 4-5 on page 4-7.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new terminator card.
2. Re-install the retainer if removed.
3. Re-install the cards.
4. Replace the basic board cover.
5. Set all the Select Out Bypass switches to
normal
6. Switch CB1 ON.
7. Close the front door.
8. Press Power On on the control panel..
9. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diag-
nostic in ODG that you ran before you
exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take
After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange”
on page 4-99.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
TERMD/TERMI Exchange
Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the Control panel.
3. Open the front door and the rear door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-82.
Ba sic
Bo a rd
G rid
Re a r
Figure 4-83. Basic Board Grid
Figure 4-82. CB1 Location
5. Remove the grid of the basic board. (four
screws must be removed). Refer to
Figure 4-83.
6. Remove the retainer which holds the termi-
nator card to the board (one screw must be
removed).
7. Remove the suspected terminator card. Refer
to Figure 4-84.
Figure 4-84. Terminator Card Locations
4-62 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
6. Close the front door.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new terminator card.
2. Re-install the retainer.
7. Press Power Off on the Control panel.
8. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diag-
nostic in ODG that you ran before you
exchanged the FRU.
3. Install the grid of the Basic board.
4. Close the rear door.
9. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run
or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
5. Switch CB1 ON.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
ESS Tailgate Exchange Procedure
c. Locate the related EAC card. Refer to
Figure 4-87 on page 4-65.
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
d. Remove the three non-polarized top card
connector from positions W, X, and Y.
Refer to Figure 4-89 on page 4-65.
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front door and the rear door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-85.
e. Disconnect the two cable ground wires
from the board.
f. Withdraw the EAC card until the line cable
(J1) on the component side is accessible.
Disconnect the cable.
g. Unclamp the cable connected to the
tailgate.
h. Remove the external cable from the
related connector.
i. Unscrew the connector (two screws) and
remove it with its internal cable.
Figure 4-85. CB1 Location
5. For physical locations, refer to Figure 4-86
and to Figure 4-87 on page 4-65.
6. Referring to Figure 4-89 on page 4-65 and to
Figure 4-88 on page 4-65 remove the cable
from EAC to tailgate as follow:
E S S
Ta il Ga te
a. Remove the cover of the basic board.
Loosen the two screws and lift up the
cover.
Re a r
b. Attention: Use the ESD kit and proce-
Figure 4-86. ESS Tailgate Location
dures.
4-64 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Basic Board 01G-A1
Tailgate 01Q
CO
D0
ELA1
ELA2
Figure 4-87. ESS Tailgate and Basic board
C a rd C SP
C a rd EAC
W
J1
X
Y
Figure 4-89. EAC Card
Figure 4-88. ESS Cables
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new connector with its internal
cable into the tailgate. Two screws must be
used.
7. Reconnect the external cable on the tailgate
connector.
8. Reinstall the cover of the Basic board.
9. Close the rear door.
2. Clamp the internal cable to the EAC card.
10. Switch CB1 ON.
3. Replug the cable to the EAC card connector
(J1).
11. Close the front door.
12. Press Power On on the control panel.
4. Replug the two cable ground wires to the
board.
13. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diag-
nostic in ODG that you ran before you
exchanged the FRU.
5. Replug the EAC card.
6. Replace the three top card connectors.
14. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run
or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
4-66 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
PS1 Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front door.
4. Open the rear door.
5. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-90.
6. Locate the PS1 and Primary power box. Refer
to Figure 4-90.
7. Remove the DMUX/PS1 cover. Refer to
Figure 4-91. Two screws must be removed
.1/.
Refer to Figure 4-93 and to Figure 4-92 on
page 4-68 and do the following:
8. At the Primary power box, remove the power
cable going to PS1 .2/.
9. Remove the cover which protects TB1 to TB4
(two screws must be removed).
10. Remove the cover which protects TB5 and
TB6 (two screws must be removed).
Figure 4-90. Power Supply 1 (PS1) and CB1
Locations
11. Verify that on each side of the PS1, the power
cables are labeled according to their positions.
If not done, label them.
12. Remove the cables from the PS1.
13. Remove the two screws .3/ which hold PS1
to the frame.
14. Remove the cable between Fan1 and the
primary power box (J7).
15. Slide the PS1 out.
Figure 4-91. Power Supply 1 (PS1) Cover
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Installation Procedure
nostic in ODG that you ran before you
exchanged the FRU.
1. Install the new PS1 in the frame and fasten it
12. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run
or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
with the two screws .3/.
2. Reconnect the cable between the Fan1 and
the primary power box (J7).
3. Reconnect the power cables in their proper
positions on the PS1 front and rear sides.
4. Re-install the cover which protects TB1 to TB4
with two screws. Refer to Figure 4-93.
5. Re-install the cover which protects TB5 and
TB6 with two screws. Refer to Figure 4-93.
6. Re-install PS1 cover with the 2 screws .1/.
7. At the primary power box, reconnect the PS1
power cable .2/.
.
8. Switch CB1 ON.
9. Close the front and the rear door.
10. Press Power On on the control panel.
11. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diag-
Figure 4-92. Primary Power Box
Figure 4-93. Power Supply 1
4-68 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
PS2 and Primary Power Box Exchange Procedure
14. Remove the PSs covers .4/.
Removal Procedure
15. Remove the two screws .5/ which secure the
DC/DC converter cover .6/.
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
16. Remove the DC/DC converter cover .6/.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front door and the rear door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-94.
5. Set OFF the Customer power supply
switch related to the 3745. Install the
appropriate safety panel which indicates
that the supply should not be turned ON
6. Locate the PS2 and the primary power box.
Refer to Figure 4-94.
7. Refer to Figure 4-95 and to Figure 4-96 on
page 4-70 .
8. Disconnect the main power cable from outlet
J3.
9. Release the ground wire .1/ from the frame.
10. At the front and rear sides of the primary
power box, verify that the cables are labeled
according to their positions. If they are not,
label them. Then remove all the cables.
11. Remove the four screws .2/ which secure the
primary power box to the frame.
12. Slide the primary power box out and place it
in a safe working area.
Figure 4-94. Primary Power Box, Power Supply 2, and
CB1 Locations
13. Remove the six screws .3/ which secure the
PSs covers .4/.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Figure 4-95. Cable Locations on Primary Power Box
Figure 4-96. PS2 in Primary Power Box
4-70 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
17. Refer to Figure 4-97.
19. Remove the five screws .8/ which maintain
the PS2 onto the primary power box.
18. Disconnect the three cables .7/ and remove
the ground wire from the DC/DC converter
connector .9/.
20. Remove the PS2.
Figure 4-97. PS2 and Primary Power Box Assembly
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
7. Reconnect all the cables in their proper posi-
tion, at the front and rear sides of the primary
power box.
Installation Procedure
1. If you are exchanging:
Ÿ The PS2 install the new PS2 in the
primary power box.
8. Reconnect the main power cable in outlet J3.
9. Set ON the Customer power supply switch
related to the 3745 and remove the safety
panel installed previously.
Ÿ The primary power box, install the PS2 in
the new primary power box.
Use the five screws .8/.
10. Switch CB1 ON.
2. Reconnect the three cables .7/ and re-install
the ground wire at the DC/DC converter con-
nector .9/.
11. Close the front door and the rear door.
12. Press Power On on the control panel.
3. Re-install the DC/DC converter cover .6/ with
the two screws .5/.
13. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diag-
nostic in ODG that you ran before you
exchanged the FRU.
4. Re-install the PSs covers .4/ with the six
screws .3/.
5. Slide the primary power box in the frame and
14. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run
or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
fasten it with the four screws .2/.
6. Reconnect the ground wire .1/ to the frame.
4-72 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
EPO Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front and rear door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-98.
5. Set OFF the Customer power supply
switch related to the 3745 Install the appro-
priate safety panel which indicates that the
supply should not be turned ON
6. Locate the primary power box and the EPO.
Refer to Figure 4-98 and to Figure 4-99.
7. Refer to Figure 4-100 and to Figure 4-101
on page 4-74:
8. Disconnect the main power cable from the
outlet J3.
9. At the front side and at the rear side of the
primary power box, verify that the cables are
labeled according to their positions. If they
are not, label them. Remove all the cables.
Figure 4-98. Primary Power Box and CB1 Locations
10. Release the ground wire .1/ from the frame.
11. Remove the four screws .2/ which secure the
primary power box to the frame. Refer to
Figure 4-100 on page 4-74 and Figure 4-101
on page 4-74.
EP O
Re a r
Figure 4-99. EPO Location
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
12. Slide the primary power box out and place it
13. Remove the four screws .3/ which secure the
in a safe working area.
PS2 cover.
14. Remove the PS2 cover .4/.
Figure 4-100. Cables on Primary Power Box
Figure 4-101. Primary Power Box and PS2 Cover Removal
4-74 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
15. Refer to Figure 4-102:
17. Remove the four screws .8/ which secure the
EPO plate to the frame. Remove the EPO
assembly .9/.
16. Disconnect the cable .7/ from the PS2.
Figure 4-102. EPO Assembly
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Installation Procedure
7. Reconnect the main power cable in outlet J3.
8. Set the Customer power supply switch to ON,
and remove the safety panel previously
installed. panel.
1. Install the new EPO assembly and fasten it
with the four screws .8/.
2. Reconnect the cable .7/.
9. Switch CB1 ON.
3. Re-install the PS2 cover .4/ with the four
screws .3/.
10. Close the front and rear door.
11. Press Power On on the control panel.
4. Slide the primary power box in the frame and
fasten it with the four screws .2/.
12. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diag-
nostic that you ran before you exchanged the
FRU.
5. Reconnect the ground wire .1/ to the frame.
6. Reconnect all the cables to their proper posi-
tion at the front side and at the rear side of
the primary power box.
13. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run
or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
4-76 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Basic Board Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front and rear door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-103.
5. Locate the board. Refer to Figure 4-103.
6. Refer to Figure 4-104 on page 4-78 .
7. Remove the basic board cover .1/ (loosen the
two screws .2/ and lift up the cover).
8. remove the 2 MOSS board covers .3/ (seven
screws must be removed .4/).
9. Remove the basic board grid (four screws
must be removed). Refer to Figure 4-105 on
page 4-78.
10. At the channel tailgate, set all the select out
switches to bypass (if any channel adapter is
installed).
11. At the PS1 remove the cover of the four FDS
cables (two screws must be removed). Dis-
connect these four cables and the multivoltage
cable going to the basic board. Refer to
Figure 4-106 on page 4-78.
Figure 4-103. Basic Board, MOSS Board, and CB1
Locations
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Fro n t Vie w
Figure 4-104. Basic Board and MOSS Covers
Figure 4-106. FDS and Multivoltage Cable Locations
on the PS1
Ba sic
Bo a rd
G rid
Re a r
Figure 4-105. Basic Board Grid
4-78 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
12. At Fan2, disconnect the air flow detector cable
and the power cable. Refer to Figure 4-107.
13. Remove the two screws .1/ which maintain
Fan2 to the frame.
14. Slide the Fan2 assembly out.
Figure 4-107. Fan2 Air Flow Detector and Power Con-
nectors
15. At the MOSS board disconnect the four cables
going to the basic board. Refer to
Figure 4-108.
Figure 4-108. MOSS to Basic Cable Locations
16. Open the clamps which secure these cables
to the basic board enclosure.
17. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
18. Remove the cross-over connectors.
19. Verify that the cards and the cables from the
cards are labeled according to their positions.
if they are not, label them. Unplug the cables
from the cards, then remove the cards and
store them in a safe place (do not remove the
horizontal cards in row Z, they will be
removed later).
20. At the rear side of the board, remove the
channel tailgate cables if a channel adapter is
installed.
21. Remove the five screws .5/ which maintain
the enclosure to the frame (refer to
Figure 4-109). Slide the enclosure out of the
machine taking care not to damage the
cables.
22. Place the enclosure in a safe working area.
Figure 4-109. Basic Board Enclosure
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
23. Refer to Figure 4-110 .
27. Disconnect the cables and remove them with
the retainer.
24. Remove the 10 screws .6/ which secure the
retainers that hold the cables and the termi-
nator cards in rows Y and Z. Remove the
retainers.
28. At the front side of the board, remove the
retainer at the bottom of the board, (row Z one
screw must be removed).
25. Remove the terminator cards and store them
in a safe place.
29. Remove the DCREG cards (if they are
present).
26. Remove the two screws .7/ which hold the
two ground FDS cables in the rack assembly.
Re t a in e r
Ra c k
Asse m b ly
Te rm in a t o r
C a rd s
Figure 4-110. Basic Board Cables
4-80 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
30. Remove the six screws .8/ which secure the
board assembly to the rack assembly. Refer
to Figure 4-111.
31. Remove the board assembly.
Bo a rd Asse m b ly
Ra c k Asse m b ly
Figure 4-111. Basic Assembly 1
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
32. Remove the 14 screws .9/ which hold the
34. Remove the four screws .1ð/ which hold the
stiffener to the board (refer to Figure 4-112).
board to the ASM gate (refer to Figure 4-112).
33. Remove the stiffener.
35. Remove the board.
Figure 4-112. Basic Assembly 2
4-82 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
10. Fasten the enclosure to the frame with the five
screws .5/.Refer to Figure 4-109 on
page 4-79.
Installation Procedure
1. Place the new board on the ASM gate and
fasten it with the four screws. .1ð/. Refer to
Figure 4-112 on page 4-82.
11. If a channel adapter is installed, reconnect the
channel tailgate cables tot the rear side of the
board.
2. Install the stiffener on the board and fasten it
with the 14 screws. .9/ Refer to Figure 4-112
on page 4-82.
12. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
13. Install the cards into their correct location
according to their labels. If you have suspi-
cions about the locations, refer to Figure 4-4
on page 4-6, to Figure 4-5 on page 4-7, or to
Figure 4-6 on page 4-8.
3. Install the DCREG cards (if present) in the
board and tighten them with the retainer.
4. Install the board assembly on the rack
assembly and fasten it with the six screws
.8/. Refer to Figure 4-111 on page 4-81.
14. Install the cross-over connectors and cables.
If you have suspicions about the cross-over
location, refer to Figure 4-4 on page 4-6,
Figure 4-5 on page 4-7, or Figure 4-6 on
page 4-8.
5. Reconnect the two ground FDS cables and
fasten them to the rack assembly with the two
screws .7/. Refer to Figure 4-110 on
page 4-80.
6. Reconnect the other cables. Refer to
Figure 4-110 on page 4-80 and to
Figure 4-113.
15. At the MOSS board, reconnect the four cables
from Basic board and close the clamps which
maintain them. Refer to Figure 4-108 on
page 4-79.
Ÿ Reconnect the cables located in the upper
Y row.
16. Install the Fan2 assembly in the frame and
fasten it with the two screws .1/. Refer to
Figure 4-107 on page 4-79.
Ÿ Install on the upper retainer (with four
screws) on these cables.
17. Reconnect the air flow detector cable and the
power cable at Fan2.
Ÿ Reconnect the cables located in the lower
Y row.
18. At the PS1 reconnect the four FDS cables and
the multivoltage cable (from basic board) and
close the clamps which maintain them.
Ÿ Install on retainer (with three screws) on
these cables.
Ÿ Reconnect the cable in the Z row.
19. Reinstall the cover with the two screws. Refer
to Figure 4-106 on page 4-78.
Ÿ Install on the retainer (with one screw) on
the cable.
20. Replace the grid of the base board with the
four screws. Refer to Figure 4-83 on
page 4-62.
7. Press Power Off on the control panel.
Y Row Upper
Y Row Upper
21. At the channel tailgate, set all the select out
bypass switches to normal (if any channel
adapter is installed).
22. Close the rear door.
23. Re-install the MOSS board covers with the
Z Row
seven screws .4/.
24. Re-install the Basic board cover with the two
screws .2/.
Figure 4-113. Y and Z Rows
25. Switch CB1 ON.
8. Install the terminator cards and tighten them
with the two retainers (one screw per
retainer). Refer to Figure 4-110 on
page 4-80.
26. Close the front door.
27. Press Power On on the control panel.
28. Run all diagnostics,
9. Slide the enclosure intoe the machine frame
taking care not to damage the cables.
29. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run
or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
LIC Board Type 1 and 3 Exchange Procedure
5. Locate the board to be exchanged. Refer to
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
Figure 4-115.
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front and rear door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-114.
Figure 4-115. LIC Board Type 1 Locations
Figure 4-114. CB1 Location
4-84 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
6. Remove one of the DMUX covers. Refer to
Figure 4-116.
7. Two screws must be removed .1/. Two kinds
of DMUX cover exist according to the LIC
board location.
Figure 4-116. DMUX Cover
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
8. Refer to Figure 4-117
11. Verify that the LIC cables are labeled
according to their positions. If they are not,
label them. Then remove the LIC cables.
9. Verify that the serial link cables on the DMUX
are labeled according to their positions. If they
are not, label them.
12. Note the type and locations of the LICs.The
LIC type is indicated by the color of the thumb
screw.
10. Remove the serial link cables.
Figure 4-117. LIC Locations
LIC Board
Location
Address Switches
5 to 1
LIC Type
Thumb Screw
Color
01L-A1
01M-A2
01L-A2
00011
00000
00010
LIC type 1
LIC type 3
LIC type 4A
LIC type 4B
DMUX
Brown
Blue
Green
Green
White
4-86 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
13. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
Remove the LICs and the DMUX by unfas-
tening the thumb screws holding them to the
board. (See “LIC Exchange Procedure” on
page 4-44 and “DMUX Exchange Procedure”
on page 4-39 for more details about
removals).
14. Refer to Figure 4-117 on page 4-86,
Figure 4-118 .
15. Disconnect the power cable .2/ from the LIC
board.
16. Remove the four screws .3/ holding the board
assembly on the frame.
17. Remove the LIC board assembly.
18. Note the board address for later use.
Figure 4-118. LIC Board Assembly
5. Install the LIC cables in the LICs.
Installation Procedure
6. Install the serial link cables on the DMUX.
1. Refer to Figure 4-117 on page 4-86 and set
the same board address as you noted during
the board removal.
7. Refer to Figure 4-116 on page 4-85. Install
the DMUX cover with two screws .1/.
2. Refer to Figure 4-118. Mount the new LIC
board assembly in place and secure it with the
four screws .3/.
8. Close the rear door.
9. Switch CB1 ON.
10. Close the front door.
11. Press Power On on the control panel.
12. Run all diagnostics.
3. Refer to Figure 4-117 on page 4-86. Recon-
nect the flat power cable .2/.
4. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
Install the LICs and DMUX into their proper
positions and fasten the thumb screws holding
them to the board. Finger strength is enough.
Do not use tools.
13. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run
or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
LIC Board Type 2 Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure:
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front door and the rear door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-119
5. Locate the board to exchange. Refer to
Figure 4-121 on page 4-89
6. Remove the SMUX covers. Refer to
Figure 4-120 (four screws must be removed
.1/).
Figure 4-119. CB1 Location
Figure 4-120. SMUX Cover
4-88 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
7. Refer to Figure 4-122 .
8. Remove the serial link cable (if installed) from
the SMUX: (this cable may be absent on
SMUXB if SMUXA and the flat cable .2/ are
present).
9. Remove the flat cable .2/ (if installed) which
connects the two SMUXs, (if two LIC boards
Type 2 are present in the machine): These
cable may be absent in spite of the presence
of the two boards.
Figure 4-122. SMUX Link and Cable
Figure 4-121. LIC Board Type 2 Locations
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
10. Refer to Figure 4-123 .
label them. Then remove the LIC cables from
the LICs.
11. Verify that the LIC cables are labeled
according to their positions. If they are not,
Figure 4-123. LIC Locations
LIC Board
Location
Address Switches
7 to 1
01L-A1
01L-A2
0000010
0000011
12. Note the types and locations of the LICs.
13. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
Remove the LICs and the SMUX by unfas-
tening the thumb screws holding them to the
board.
14. Refer to Figure 4-123 and Figure 4-124 .
15. Disconnect the power cables .3/ from the LIC
board, and remove the screw and washer
keeping ground strap to the frame .7/.
16. Remove the four screws .4/ holding the board
assembly to the frame.
17. Remove the LIC board .5/ and the ground
bracket .6/.
18. Note the board address for later use.
Figure 4-124. LIC Board Assembly
4-90 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
them to the board. Finger strength is enough.
Do not use tools.
Installation Procedure
1. Refer to Figure 4-123 on page 4-90 and set
the same board address as you noted during
the board removal.
9. Install the LIC cables on the LICs.
10. Refer to Figure 4-122 on page 4-89.
2. Refer to Figure 4-124 on page 4-90.
11. Install the serial link cable (if any) on the
SMUX.
3. Mount the new LIC board .5/ and the ground
bracket .6/ in place and secure them with the
four screws .4/.
12. Install the flat cable (if any) between the two
SMUXs.
4. Refer to Figure 4-123 on page 4-90.
5. Reconnect the flat power cables .3/.
6. Refer to Figure 4-124 on page 4-90.
13. Refer to Figure 4-120 on page 4-88.
14. Install the SMUX cover with two screws .1/.
15. Close the rear door.
7. Mount the ground strap onto the LIC board to
16. Switch CB1 ON.
the frame with the screw and a washer .7/.
17. Close the front door.
8. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
18. Press Power On on the control panel.
19. Run all diagnostics.
Install the LICs and SMUX into their proper
positions and fasten the thumb screws holding
20. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run
or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
MOSS Board Exchange Procedure
8
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-125.
5. Locate the board. Refer to Figure 4-125.
6. Remove the covers of the MOSS board .1/.
(seven screws must be removed .2/). Refer
to Figure 4-126.
Figure 4-126. MOSS Board Covers
Figure 4-125. MOSS Board and CB1 Locations
4-92 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
7. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
8. Refer to Figure 4-127 .
10. Remove the cassettes and store them in a
safe place.
11. Verify that the cables are labeled according to
their position. If they are not, label them.
9. Check if the cassettes are labelled according
to their positions. If they are not, label them.
12. Remove all the cables from the board.
Figure 4-127. MOSS Board Cards and Cables
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
13. Remove the eight screws .3/ which maintain
the MOSS board enclosure in the frame.
Refer to Figure 4-128. Remove the enclosure
and place it in a safe working place.
14. Remove the 12 screws .4/ which hold the
MOSS board on the stiffener. Refer to
Figure 4-128. Remove the MOSS board.
St iffe n e r
Bo a rd
C h a ssis Asse m b ly
Figure 4-128. MOSS Board Enclosure
4-94 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
5. Install the covers of the MOSS board with the
Installation Procedure
1. Place the new board on the stiffener and
fasten it with the 12 screws .4/. Refer to
Figure 4-128 on page 4-94.
7 screws .2/.
6. Switch CB1 ON.
7. Close the front door.
2. Replace the MOSS board enclosure in the
machine frame and fasten it with the eight
screws .3/. Refer to Figure 4-128 on
page 4-94.
8. Press Power On on the control panel.
9. Run all diagnostics.
10. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run
or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
3. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
4. Reconnect the cables and the cassettes in
their correct location according to their labels.
Refer to Figure 4-127 on page 4-93.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Channel Tailgate Exchange Procedure
retention screw. These parts are fragile.
Handle them with care.
Removal Procedure
1. Ask the customer to disable the channel
related to the suspected channel tailgate
connector. Also inform him that the 3745
is to be powered OFF.
12. Remove the connector flat cables assembly
from the channel tailgate rack.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front and rear door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-129.
5. Locate the channel tailgate. Refer to
Figure 4-131 on page 4-97.
6. Remove the basic board grid. (two screws
must be removed). Refer to Figure 4-131 on
page 4-97.
7. At the channel tailgate connectors, set all the
select out bypass switches to Bypass. Refer
to Figure 4-130.
8. Disconnect the channel bus and tag cables
from the channel tailgate connector to be
removed.
9. In order to allow the customer to use the
channel during the repair time, you must
connect the cables together or to the termina-
tors.
10. Remove the two screws which maintain the
1
channel tailgate connector. See note.
11. At the Basic board rear side disconnect the
corresponding flat cables by loosening the
Figure 4-129. CB1 Location
Se le c t o u t
By p a ss Sw it c h
By p a s s
Ta g
Bu s
No rm a l
Figure 4-130. Select Out Switch
1
An easier access to a lower located channel tailgate connector can be obtained by removing the upper one(s). For each channel
tailgate connector use the steps 10 to 12. Do not disconnect the channel bus and tag cables from the connectors.
4-96 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Ba sic
Bo a rd
G rid
Re a r
Cha nne l
Ta il Ga te
Figure 4-131. Channel Tailgate and Basic Board Grid
Lo c a tio n : 01G
Lo c a t io n : 01P
Figure 4-132. Channel Tailgate, Cables, and Basic Board
3. Hold the channel tailgate connector with the
two screws.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new connector flat cables assembly
in the channel tailgate rack.
4. If the customer has restarted the channel ask
him to disable this channel again.
2. Connect the flat cables to the basic board rear
side. Ensure that the connector is fully
plugged before securing the screw. The
retention screw is not designed to achieve the
connection.
5. Reconnect the channel bus and tag cables
onto the channel tailgate connector.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
6. Set all the select out bypass switches to
10. Close the front door.
normal.
11. Press Power On on the control panel.
7. Replace the basic board grid with the two
screws.
12. Run the channel wrap test on each channel.
Refer to “How to Run the Channel Wrap Test”
on page 3-25.
8. Close the rear door.
9. Switch CB1 ON.
13. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run
or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
4-98 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange
Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000
007 (continued)
001
Did the diagnostic detect a failure?
Yes No
This procedure analyzes the results of the diag-
nostics or an FRU exchange and explains what
must be done afterwards.
008
– Go to Step 018 on page 4-100.
When MOSS diagnostics detect an error, a hex
code is set on the control panel. The code can be
decoded by using “3745 Control Panel Codes” on
page 1-15.
009
Was the failure other than 'unexpected error'?
Yes No
When ODG/CDG diagnostics detect an error, a
reference code is given on the diagnostic screen.
See Figure 3-7 on page 3-12.
010
From Menu 3, select the BRC function. Enter the
reference code. The action to be taken is dis-
played. See “Using Reference Codes” on
page 1-14.
Was the diagnostic running in CDG
mode?
Yes No
Did diagnostics initialization completed and
the diagnostics start to run?
Yes No
011
Run the previous diagnostic for the
upper level in the 'run all' diagnostics.
For example, TRSS > IOC Bus >
CCU. Go to “3745 Diagnostic
Requirement” on page 1-60
002
Start the MOSS diagnostics. Refer to “How
to Run MOSS Diagnostics” on page 3-4.
012
003
Analyse the reference code. Refer to “Using
Reference Codes” on page 1-14. Continue
with Step 013.
Did the diagnostics run without a message for
manual intervention?
Yes No
004
013
Follow the instructions given by the diagnos-
tics. Go back to this procedure according to
the result.
You may have started this service call to
exchange FRUs called by a reference code or
panel code.
Is the first FRU called by the diagnostics dif-
ferent from the FRU you were going to
exchange?
005
Was the diagnostic result obtained before any
FRUs were exchanged?
Yes No
Yes No
014
006
Perform FRU exchange using Chapter 4,
“3745 FRU Exchange” on page 4-1.
Go to Step 025 on page 4-100.
015
007
(Step 015 continues)
(Step 007 continues)
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
015 (continued)
022 (continued)
Is there a common FRU given by both lists?
Yes No
Is the FRU you were processing the last FRU
called for the error?
Yes No
016
023
– If you do not have the first FRU called by
the diagnostics, obtain it.
You have an intermittent error or an error
not detected by this diagnostic.
If you have the FRU or when you obtain the
FRU, go to “3745 FRU List” on page 1-53
and follow the instructions to exchange it.
Continue using this manual for the next
FRU called. Go to “3745 FRU List” on
page 1-53.
017
024
Consider that it is the first FRU of the list and
perform FRU exchange using Chapter 4, “3745
FRU Exchange” on page 4-1.
All parts of the machine required for FRU
exchange will now be available for service.
Change all FRUs called (use, Chapter 4, “3745
FRU Exchange” on page 4-1).
018
Were HPTSS diagnostics being run for a sus-
pected FESH card?
025
Yes No
Have you been told to exchange all FRUs for
an intermittent problem?
Yes No
019
Go to Step 022.
020
026
Go to Step 032.
027
– In 3745 frame 01 (at tailgate location 01Q),
remove the cables from the HPTSS lines to be
tested. Refer to Figure 4-2 on page 4-4.
Did the diagnostics run error free or power
successfully ON?
Yes No
– Install wrap plugs in the sockets of 01Q for the
lines to be tested.
– Update the CDF to show that the lines to be
tested have wrap plugs installed. Refer to the
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service
Function (CDF chapter).
028
You have a problem with the new FRU. Try
another one or put the original back in.
Refer to Chapter 4, “3745 FRU Exchange”
on page 4-1 and continue with next Step.
– Run one of the following HPTSS diagnostic rou-
tines:
Ÿ VI and VK if V.35 wrap plug is installed
Ÿ VJ and VK if X.21 wrap plug is installed
Ÿ VI, VJ, and VK if both types of wrap plugs
are installed.
029
Have all the FRUs called been exchanged?
Yes No
Refer to “How to Run Internal Function Tests”
on page 3-9.
030
Did the diagnostics run free of error?
Yes No
Go to Chapter 4, “3745 FRU Exchange” on
page 4-1 for next FRU called.
021
031
Go to Step 013 on page 4-99.
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
022
032
(Step 022 continues)
(Step 032 continues)
4-100 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
032 (continued)
042 (continued)
Was the FRU other than a power supply?
Yes No
Follow the “3745 FRU List” on
page 1-53.
043
033
Go to “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1
for the next FRU called.
Has the power supply successfully
powered up?
Yes No
044
034
Go to Step 046.
035
– Check what you have done:
Ÿ Cards correctly installed
Ÿ Cables correctly plugged
Ÿ Crossovers correctly located and oriented
Ÿ Switches in correct position.
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
– Run the diagnostics again, IML or any other
action you were asked after FRU exchange.
036
Was a failure detected?
Yes No
Did the last run of the diagnostics or IML
detect an error?
Yes No
045
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
037
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on
page 4-102.
046
During your path through the MIP, have you
recorded an Other Action or MAP to use?
Yes No
038
Is the error the same as before?
Yes No
047
You may have a defective new FRU, or
multiple problems. Try to determine if
restarting the full procedure, or if another
symptom may help you.
Also suspect cables, boards and voltages.
It may also be necessary to run diagnostics
with the ALL option in offline mode. In any
case, contact your support structure for
further assistance.
039
Go to Step 044.
040
– As the problem is not solved by changing this
FRU, you must put the original back in. Refer to
“Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1. Continue
with the next step.
048
Have all the FRUs called been changed?
Yes No
Go there now.
041
In “3745 FRU List” on page 1-53 check if
the next FRU and the FRU you have just
exchanged have the same 'Diagnostic' and
'Area'.
Do both have the same 'Diagnostic' and
'Area'.
Yes No
042
(Step 042 continues)
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CE leaving procedure
CE Leaving Procedure
The maintenance package has determined that the 3745 is ready to be returned to normal operation.
001
Did you work on the 3745 Model 17A?
Yes No
002
Go to Step 004.
003
Ÿ In the MOSS-E View window, double click on the service processor icon.
Ÿ The Service Processor Menu window is displayed.
Ÿ Click on the Configuration Management option.
Ÿ Double click on the Manage Remote Operations option.
Ÿ In the Remote Operation Management window, select the Remote operations authorization option
and click on OK.
Ÿ On the Remote Support Facility window, select the two following options:
– Enable Remote Support Facility
– Generate alerts
Ÿ Click on OK.
Ÿ Click on Cancel to return to Service Processor Menu.
Ÿ Click on Function and Exit to return to the MOSS-E View window.
Ÿ In the MOSS-E View window, click on Program in the action bar.
Ÿ Click on Log Off MOSS-E.
Ÿ Continue with Step 004.
004
You should use the following list to ensure that the machine is in suitable condition for customer operation
and that all call information is recorded.
1. Replace any cables removed.
2. Check the battery voltage and exchange it if necessary.
3. Do all the actions that apply in the following list:
If You Have
What You Should Do
Exchanged all the FRUs that were
identified for an intermittent problem
or a problem not detected by the diag-
nostics (tentative repair which can be
unsuccessful).
Use the manual BER correlation (BRC, refer to the IBM
3745 Service Functions) to point out some additional
potentially failing FRUs.
1. Find, in the Error Log Display the alarm with the Ref-
erence Code that you used to exchange the FRUs.
2. Select the BER range which occurs in the same time
frame as the alarm.
3. Type BRC in the Menu 3.
4. Enter the most recent and the oldest BER in the
range you have selected.
5. Press SEND.
6. Note the extra FRUs, if any, provided by the BER cor-
relation and inform the HSC/HCS or update the PMH
in case of problem reoccurence.
Exchanged a Board
If the new board has a different part number with regard
to the old one, you have to update the 'Board Level' label
located on the front door.
Exchanged a LIC Board
Check the address plugging.
4-102 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CE leaving procedure
Exchanged a FRU with a Different PN
Used the MIP for an Installation
Upgrade the CDF. Refer to the IBM 3745 Communication
Controller Service Function (CDF chapter) to upgrade or
verify the CDF.
Go back to the installation procedure in the Installation
Manual.
Exchanged the PCC Card or Battery
with Power OFF
Inform the customer that the TOD-clock and scheduled
power ON services will have to be recreated.
Exchanged the HDD
1. Inform the customer that he will have to refresh the
NCP on this disk if he uses HDD to load the control
program.
2. Update the password.
Run the Wrap Diagnostic on the CA
Ensure that the wrap plug is removed
and replaced by the normal cable.
4. IML the MOSS as follows:
Ÿ Set service to 0 (normal mode).
Ÿ Set function to 1 (MOSS IML).
5. Do all actions that apply in the following list:
If you Have
What you Should Do
Been working on the channels area in
Concurrent Diagnostic mode
Restore the adapters back to NCP, using the channel
service screen. Refer to “CA Restore Procedure” on
page 4-105.
Been working on the TSS, HPTSS, or
ESS adapter area in concurrent diag-
nostic mode
Ÿ Remove all wrap plugs installed during this service
call.
Ÿ Replace all modem and line cables removed during
this service call.
Ÿ If you have altered CDFs during this service call,
check CDFs and update, if necessary. Refer to the
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service Function
(CDF chapter).
Ÿ IML the scanners disconnected from NCP during this
call. This can be done by selecting IMS from Menu
1. When IML is complete, the adapters will automat-
ically be connected to NCP.
Ÿ Ask the customer to reactivate the lines that were
stopped during the maintenance.
Been working with TRSS in concurrent
diagnostic mode
Ÿ Connect the TRAs you disconnected during this
service call back the to NCP. Refer to “TRA Recon-
nect Procedure” on page 4-105.
Ÿ Ask the customer to reactivate the lines stopped
during the maintenance.
6. Log Off the console by typing OFF on any displayed screen.
7. Set the console in use according to customer requirements.
8. Restore the power mode as it was before your intervention.
9. Do all the actions that apply in the following list:
If you Have
What you Should Do
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CE leaving procedure
Had the whole configuration
Ask the customer to IPL and load the NCP into the CCU.
Verify that IPL completes whithout errors.
If the system is not available to load the NCP into the
CCU, return the console to maintenance mode and IPL
the CCU, one step at a time. At the beginning of phase 4
(IPL stop with phase 4 displayed) , verify that the
message 'SCANNER(s) not IMLED xxxx' is not displayed.
Continue to end of phase 4.
Disabled some channels
Put the 3746-900 Offline
Ask the customer to:
Ÿ Re-enable the channels using the CID screen.
Ÿ Put the channels online from the host.
Put the 3746-900 to online mode.
Been working on the 3746-900 in con-
current maintenance mode on
processors or couplers.
Use the CDF-E display function to check that the
replaced/tested FRUs are available or active.
10. Replace all covers and close the doors.
11. Leave the machine in a safe condition.
12. Record the actions taken and the FRUs replaced during the call.
If the origin of the intervention was an alarm A5, report it as preventive maintenance (Service Code
08).
13. Update the PMH record for this call.
14. Return parts to the stock room.
4-104 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CE leaving procedure
CA Restore Procedure
1. On the 3745 console, invoke Menu 3 and type CAS in the selection area for channel adapter services.
2. Press SEND.
3. Type 4 for concurrent maintenance commands.
4. Press SEND.
5. Type the channel adapter number corresponding to this FRU in the CA number ===> field.
6. Press SEND
7. Type RES in the command ===>field.
8. Press SEND.
9. Re-initiate the same procedure from Step 5 for the associated CA, if any.
How to Put the MOSS Online
Note: MOSS can only be put online if the NCP is running.
1. Using the console, invoke Menu 2 (See PF key line).
2. In Menu 2, type MON in the selection area.
3. Press SEND.
4. MOSS ONLINE will be displayed on the screen.
TRA Reconnect Procedure: For this procedure you may wish to refer to Figure 1-6 on
page 1-67, Figure 1-8 on page 1-68, and Figure 1-7 on page 1-67.
1. On the 3745 console, invoke Menu 3 (See PF key line).
2. In Menu 3 type TRS in the selection area for TRSS services.
3. Press SEND.
4. The TRSS Function Selection Screen is displayed.
5. Type 1 in the selection area for TRA Selection Screen.
6. Press SEND.
7. The TRA Selection Screen is displayed.
8. Type the TRA number in the TRA # ==> field.
9. Press SEND
10. The TRSS Function Selection Screen is displayed.
11. Type 2 in the selection area for Connect/Disconnect.
12. Press SEND.
13. The TRA Connect/Disconnect Selection Screen is displayed.
14. Type CT in the input area to connect the selected adapter to the NCP.
15. Press SEND.
16. Re-initiate the same procedure from Step 5 for the associated TRA, if any.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange 4-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CE leaving procedure
4-106 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Aids
Appendix A. Maintenance Aids
Contacting Support
You may wish to record your support center telephone number here.
You may be directed to call support for various reasons. When support is called you may be asked to
perform specific tasks. On the following pages you will find information about why you call support and
references to where you will find information about the tasks you may have to perform.
Ÿ “Control Program Maintenance Aids.”
Ÿ “MOSS Microcode Maintenance Aids” on page A-2.
Ÿ “Scanner Microcode Maintenance Aids” on page A-2.
Ÿ “Special Tools” on page A-3.
Ÿ “Shipping Group Tools” on page A-4.
Ÿ “PKD (Portable Keypad Display) Maintenance Aids for LIC 5 and 6” on page A-5.
Control Program Maintenance Aids
The following list gives some possible causes of control program errors.
Ÿ A hardware configuration change has been performed and there is a difference between the hardware
configuration and the control program generation.
Ÿ The customer has made some software changes.
Ÿ A PTF has been incorrectly applied.
Ÿ A PTF exists for the problem but has not been applied.
The following table shows where to find useful information in case of a suspected control program error.
Information
Where to Find It
Customer procedures for diagnosis
How to perform control program procedures
How to execute NCP functions
Line interface display (LID)
Port swap
ACF/SSP Diagnosis Reference
IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097
IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097
IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097
IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097
IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097
IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097
IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097
IBM 3745 Problem Determination Guide
IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097
NetView Bibliography.
LIC swap
Stand-alone link test (SALT)
Cataloged procedures (CP1 to CP6)
LIC internal wrap test
LIC wrap test with wrap plugs
NetView* program alerts
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Aids
MOSS Microcode Maintenance Aids
The following table shows where to find useful information in case of a suspected microcode error.
Information
Where to Find It
How to apply an MCF
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service
Function, SY33-2069
How to display and delete a MOSS dump
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service
Function, SY33-2069
How to save, restore, and format the MOSS hard
disk drive
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service
Function, SY33-2069
How to dump a MOSS
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service
Function, SY33-2069
Scanner Microcode Maintenance Aids
The following table shows where to find useful information in case of a suspected scanner microcode
error.
Information
Where to Find It
MCF
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service
Function, SY33-2069
Patches
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service
Function, SY33-2069
A-2 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Aids
Special Tools
Maintaining the 3745 requires using tools in addition to those in the IBM service representative's tool kit.
The tools needed include:
General Purpose Tools
ESD Kit
Tool
Qty
Part Nbr.
Part Name
Part Nbr.
PT2-220 V
or
PT2-110 V
PT3-220 V
or
PT3-110 V
PT3-TPAM Acc. kit
TPLM
1
1749268
ESD kit
6428316
This kit contains:
1
1
1749269
6406001
ESD mat
Wristband (small size)
(large size)
6428274
6428167
6428169
6428166
1
1
1
1
1
6406000
83X9300
1749290
1749270
8309874
or
ESD ground cord
Display
Digital voltmeter
8496278
453637
EIA breakout panel
1
1
One of the following oscilloscope
Tektronix 454**
Tektronix 475**
Tektronix 2235**
Tektronix 2465 A**
459559
453215
6428880
8309847
High voltage probes
2
453698
Appendix A. Maintenance Aids A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Aids
Shipping Group Tools
The following tools are shipped when a
3746-900 is installed in the machine:
The following tools are shipped with the machine:
Tool
Qty
Part Nbr.
ESCON wrap plug
TIC-3 wrap plug
Filler (dummy card)
LIC11 wrap plug
LIC12 wrap plug for X.21
LIC12 wrap plug for V.35
LIC16 wrap plug
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5605670
6165899
2733278
58G9425
58X9354
58X9349
57G8097
Segment board
2
1
1
1
1
1
5997533
6398697
2667737
26F0320
65X8927
03F4301
Console wrap plug (31XX)
Console wrap plug (3727)
Console wrap plug (PC*/PS2*)
LIC 1-4 wrap plug
CA bus wrap plug (old)
or
CA bus wrap plug (new)
CA tag wrap plug (old)
or
CA tag wrap plug (new)
CA bus terminator
CA tag terminator
EPO plug
Cover keys
Bypass card type 1 (BPC1)
Bypass card type 2 (BPC2)
1
1
26F1755
03F4300
Wrap plugs for testing ARCs and cables (these wrap
plugs must be installed on ARC cables):
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
26F1754
2282675
2282676
8482303
1643894
03F4372
66X0965
ARC V.35 DTE wrap plug
ARC V.35 DCE wrap plug
ARC V.24 DTE wrap plug
ARC V.24 DCE wrap plug
1
1
1
1
61F4527
61F4526
61F4523
61F4522
61F4525
61F4528
61F4578
61F4530
61F4529
65X8927
ARC V.24 DCE/DTE 3745 wrap plug1
ARC V.35 DCE 3745 wrap plug
ARC V.35 DTE 3745 wrap plug
ARC X.21 DTE wrap plug
1
1
1
1
The following tools are shipped when an HPTSS is
installed in the machine:
ARC X.21 DCE wrap plug
ARC X.21 DCE/DTE 3745 wrap plug1
V.35 Wrap Plug
X.21 Wrap Plug
ESS Wrap Plug
1
1
1
58X9349
58X9354
70X8670
Wrap plugs for testing ARCs assembly B (these wrap
plugs must be installed at the rear of the ARCs):
ARC V.24 wrap plug
1
1
1
1
1
58G5660
58G5661
58G5658
58G5659
58G5662
The following tool is shipped when a LIC3 is installed in
the machine:
ARC V.35 Non 3745 wrap plug
ARC V.35 DTE 3745 wrap plug
ARC V.35 DCE 3745 wrap plug
ARC X.21 wrap plug
LIC3 wrap cable
1
65X8928
The following tools are shipped when a LIC5 or LIC6 is
installed in the machine:
The following tool is shipped with the service processor,
which has an integrated modem installed:
PT2 adapter cable
LIC5/LIC6 wrap plug (tailgate)
2
1
11F4816
11F4815
Integrated modem wrap plug
1
74F4508
The following tools are shipped with the IBM controller
expansion rack containing the service processor and/or
the network node processor:
One of the following tools is also shipped:
LIC-5/6 wrap block (cable end) P/N according to the
country.
Spare fuse
2
58G5782
Austria
Belgium
France
Germany
Hong Kong
Israel
Italy
Japan
Luxemburg
Netherlands
Switzerland
U.K.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6162946
6162950
6162955
6162950
65X8070
66X1954
6162957
6124644
6162950
6162948
66X0748
65X8069
66X0807
U.S.A./Canada
A-4 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Aids
PKD (Portable Keypad Display) Maintenance Aids for LIC 5 and 6
Configuration: On a LIC type 5 or 6, the configuration parameters are set from the PKD.
Refer to the "3745 Connection and Integration Guide" for the detailed procedure.
On a LIC type 5, the following configuration parameters are "service representative only":
MODE (native or CCITT), CD SENSIT (normal or low), and L XMIT LEVEL.
They must be set by using the 'B' command as follows:
1. Enter the B 300 at the PKD.
2. Press GO several times to get the desired option message.
3. Press ERASE and enter the new value if applicable.
4. Press GO to validate the new value.
B Commands (Only for LIC Type 5): The following other B commands can be used by the CE
for miscellaneous actions:
Ÿ B 100 Reload default configuration.
Ÿ B 555 Address a remote modem (using the modem serial number) to change some parameters.
Ÿ B 666 Increase the time out from 30 seconds to 10 minutes.
Ÿ B 703/704/705 CO/CS functions (allows remote commands).
Ÿ B 730 Send a 1004 Hz tone on telephone line.
Manual Tests: The following manual tests can be executed on a LIC type 5:
Ÿ Local self-test
Ÿ Remote self-test
Ÿ Local status report
Ÿ Remote status report
Ÿ Analog test (line analysis)
Ÿ Digital test (transmit/receive test)
Ÿ Manual loopback.
The following manual tests can be executed on a LIC type 6:
Ÿ Local self-test
Ÿ Digital test (transmit/receive test)
Ÿ Manual loopback.
Refer to the "3745 Connection and Integration Guide" for detailed procedures.
Appendix A. Maintenance Aids A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Aids
A-6 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bibliography
Appendix B. 3745 Bibliography
Service Personnel Definitions
Definition
Uses
Product trained CE (PT CE).
RETAIN console
3745 control panel
3745 console
3746-900 control panel
Service Processor
Hardware CE also able to fix problems in the micro-
code.
Also called:
CE1
MIP
1st Level CE
CE Phase 1
Service Functions Guide
Installation Guide
Parts Catalog
Basic Operations Guide
Problem Determination Guide
Connection and Integration Guide
Advanced Operations Guide
Wiring Diagrams (YZ Pages)
Product support trained CE (PST CE).
Same as PT CE, plus:
Hardware CE also able to determine and fix problems
in the microcode
Hardware Maintenance Reference
Diagnostic Descriptions
Principles of Operation
Also called:
CE2
2nd Level CE
CE Phase 2
Specialist
Support
Hardware Central Service (HCS) may include:
All 3745 tools and books
Dispatchers
PT CEs
PST CEs
Program service representative (PSR): Also called:
Program support CE
Operating systems, access methods, and NCP/EP
library
Software CE
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bibliography
Customer Documentation for the 3745 (Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and
17A) and 3746 (Model 900)
Table B-1 (Page 1 of 4). Customer Documentation for the 3745 Models 130 to 17A and 3746 Model 900
This customer documentation has the following formats:
Books
and
CD-ROM
Bo o k s
a nd
Diske t t e s
O n lin e
Bo o ks
Finding Information
SA33-0142
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and 17A
IBM 3746 Expansion Unit Model 900
Customer Master Indexñ
Provides references for finding information in the customer documentation
library.
Evaluating and Configuring
GA33-0138
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130, 150, and 170
Introduction
Gives an introduction about the IBM Models 130 to 170 capabilities, including
Model 160. For Model 17A refer to the Overview, GA33-0180.
GA33-0180
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models Aò
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller
Models 900 and 950
Overview
Gives an overview of connectivity capabilities within SNA, APPN, and IP net-
working.
GA33-0183
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models Aò
IBM 3746 Expansion Unit Model 900
Migration and Planning Guide
Prepares 3745 Models A and 3746 Model 900 planning for:
Ÿ Field upgrades
Ÿ Network integration (NCP control)
Ÿ Physical installation.
B-2 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bibliography
Table B-1 (Page 2 of 4). Customer Documentation for the 3745 Models 130 to 17A and 3746 Model 900
Preparing Your Site
GC22-7064
GN22-5490
Input/Output Equipment
Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Technical News Letter
Provides information on physical installation for the 3745 Models 130 to 610.
For 3745 Models A and 3746 Model 900, refer to the Migration and Planning
Guide, GA33-0183.
GA33-0140
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130, 150, 160, and 170
Preparing for Connection
Helps for preparing the 3745 Models 130 to 170 cable installation. For 3745
Model 17A refer to the Connection and Integration Guide, SA33-0129.
Preparing for Operation
GA33-0400
IBM 3745 Communication Controller All Modelsó
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller
Models 900 and 950
Safety Informationñ
Provides general safety guidelines.
SA33-0129
IBM 3745 Communication Controller All Modelsó
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900
Connection and Integration Guideñ
Contains information for connecting hardware and integrating network of the
3745 and 3746-900 after installation.
SA33-0416
SA33-0158
Line Interface Coupler Type 5 and Type 6
Portable Keypad Display
Migration and Integration Guide
Contains information for moving and testing LIC types 5 and 6.
IBM 3745 Communication Controller All Modelsó
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900
Console Setup Guideñ
Provides information for:
Ÿ Installing local, alternate, or remote consoles for 3745 Models 130 to 610,
Ÿ Configuring user workstations to remotely control the service processor for
3745 Models A and 3746 Model 900, using:
– DCAF program
– Telnet Client program
Customizing Your Control Program
SA33-0178 Guide to Timed IPL and Rename Load Module
Provides VTAM procedures for:
Ÿ Scheduling an automatic reload of the 3745,
Ÿ Getting 3745 load module changes transparent to the operations staff.
Appendix B. 3745 Bibliography B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bibliography
Table B-1 (Page 3 of 4). Customer Documentation for the 3745 Models 130 to 17A and 3746 Model 900
Operating and Testing
SA33-0098
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
All Modelsô
Basic Operations Guideñ
Provides instructions for daily routine operations on the 3745 Models 130 to
610.
SA33-0177
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models Aò
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900
Basic Operations Guideñ
Provides instructions for daily routine operations on the 3745 Models 17A to
61A and 3746 Model 900 operating as an SNA node (NCP), APPN/HPR
Network Node, and IP Router.
SA33-0097
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
All Modelsó
Advanced Operations Guideñ
Provides instruction for advanced operations and testing, using the 3745
MOSS console.
On-line Information
Controller Configuration and Management Application
Provides a graphical user interface for configuring and managing a 3746
APPN/HPR Network Node and IP Router, and its resources.
Is also available as a stand-alone application, using an OS/2 workstation.
Defines and explains all the 3746 Network Node and IP Router configuration
parameters through its on-line help.
SH11-3081
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller
Models 900 and 950
Controller Configuration and Management: User's Guideõ
Explains how to use CCM and gives examples of the configuration process.
B-4 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bibliography
Table B-1 (Page 4 of 4). Customer Documentation for the 3745 Models 130 to 17A and 3746 Model 900
Managing Problems
SA33-0096
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
All Modelsó
Problem Determination Guideñ
A guide to performing problem determination on the 3745 Models 130 to 61A.
On-line Information
Problem Analysis Guide
An on-line guide to analyze alarms, events, and control panel codes on:
Ÿ IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models Aò
Ÿ IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Models 900 and 950.
SA33-0175
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models Aò
IBM 3746 Expansion Unit Model 900
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 950
Alert Reference Guide
Provides information about events or errors reported by alerts for:
Ÿ IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models Aò
Ÿ IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Models 900 and 950.
CD-ROM Bibliography
SK2T-6012
IBM Networking
Softcopy Collection Kit
Allows customer manuals consulting via CD-ROM viewer.
ñ Documentation shipped with the 3745.
ò 3745 Models 17A to 61A.
ó 3745 Models 130 to 61A.
ô Except 3745 Models A.
õ Documentation shipped with the 3746-900.
Appendix B. 3745 Bibliography B-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bibliography
Service Documentation for the 3745 (Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and
17A) and 3746 (Model 900)
Table B-2 (Page 1 of 3). Service Documentation for the 3745 Models 1x0 and 17A, and 3746 Model 900
This service documentation has the following formats:
Books
and
CD-ROM
O n lin e
Bo o ks
SY33-2079
SY33-2067
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and 17A
Service Master Indexñ
Provides references for finding information in the IBM 3745 Models 1X0 and
17A shipping group documentation.
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and 17A
Installation Guideñ
Provides instructions for installing or relocating the IBM 3745 Models 1X0 and
17A.
SY33-2114
SY33-2116
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900
Installation Guideò
Provides instructions for installing or relocating the IBM 3746 Model 900.
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900
Service Guideò
Provides procedures for isolating and fixing the IBM 3746 Model 900 prob-
lems.
SY33-2069
SY33-2070
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130, 150, 160, and 170
Service Functionsñ
Describes MOSS functions using the IBM 3745 Models 1X0 and 17A con-
soles.
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130 to 17A
Maintenance Information Proceduresñ
Provides procedures for isolating and fixing the IBM 3745 Models 1X0 and
17A problems.
B-6 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bibliography
Table B-2 (Page 2 of 3). Service Documentation for the 3745 Models 1x0 and 17A, and 3746 Model 900
SY33-2115
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models Aó
IBM 3746 Expansion Unit Model 900
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 950
Service Processor Installation and Maintenanceô
(Based on the 3172, 9585, and 9577)
Provides information on installing and maintaining the service processor based
on the PS/2 Types 3172, 9585, and 9577.
SY33-2112
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller
Models 900 and 950
Network Node Processor Installation and Maintenanceô
(Based on the 3172)
Provides information on installing and maintaining the network node processor
based on the PS/2 Type 3172.
SY33-2066
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130, 150, 160, and 170
Hardware Maintenance Referenceñ
Provides in-depth hardware reference information on the IBM 3745 Models
1X0 and 17A. Also valid for the 3745 Model 17A.
On-line Information
SY33-2075
Hardware Maintenance Referenceõ
Provides in-depth hardware reference information on the 3746 Model 900.
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
All Modelsö
External Cable Referencesñ
Provides references to console and line cables used for connecting the IBM
3745 Models 130 to 61A.
SY33-2117
S135-2015
S135-2012
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller
Models 900 and 950
External Cable Reference÷
Provides references to console and line cables used for connecting the IBM
3746 Models 900 and 950.
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller
Models 900 and 950
Parts Catalog÷
Provides reference information for ordering parts for the IBM 3746 Models 900
and 950.
3745 Communication Controller
Models 130 to 17A
Parts Catalogñ
Provides reference information for ordering IBM 3745 Models 1X0 and 17A
parts.
Appendix B. 3745 Bibliography B-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bibliography
Table B-2 (Page 3 of 3). Service Documentation for the 3745 Models 1x0 and 17A, and 3746 Model 900
S135-2014
IBM Controller Expansion
Parts Catalog
Provides reference information for ordering parts for the controller expansion
attached to the IBM 3746 Model 900 and 950.
CD-ROM Bibliography
ZK2T-8214
IBM Networking
Softcopy Collection Kit
Allows service manuals consulting via CD-ROM viewer. EMEA version.
ZK2T-8187
IBM Networking
Softcopy Collection Kit
Allows service manuals consulting via CD-ROM viewer. US version.
ñ Documentation shipped with the 3745.
ò Documentation shipped with the 3746-900.
ó 3745 Models 17A to 61A.
ô Documentation shipped with the processor.
õ Product integrated information.
ö 3745 Models 130 to 61A.
÷ Documentation shipped with the 3746 Models 900 and 950.
B-8 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bibliography
Related Signal Converter Product Information
The following publications relate to IBM signal converter products and are currently available:
Ÿ 7861 Description and Planning Guide, GA33-0122.
Ÿ 7861 Setup, User's Guide, and Problem Determination, SA33-0123.
Ÿ 7861 Maintenance Information and Parts Catalog, SY33-2062.
Ÿ 7868 Guide to Operation, GA33-0134.
Ÿ 5822-10 Guide to Operation, GA33-0118.
Ÿ 5822-18 Guide to Operation, GA33-0136.
Ÿ 5858 Guide to Operation, GH11-3027.
Ÿ 5858 Maintenance Information and Parts Catalog, SY12-8246.
Ÿ Link Problem Determination Aid, SY33-2064.
Ÿ Power Supply and Telecommunication Connections, GA33-0054.
Ÿ 7855 Guide to Operation, GA33-0160.
Ÿ IBM 7857 Modem, Guide to Operation, GA13-1839.
Ÿ IBM Asynchronous/SDLC V.32 Modem/A: Installation, Operation, and Problem Determination Guide,
SA27-3955.
Appendix B. 3745 Bibliography B-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bibliography
Related NCP Service Information
NCP and EP Reference Summary and Data Areas (LY30-3196 for V4R3.1 only)
NCP and EP Reference Summary and Data Areas (LY30-5603 for V5 only)
These manuals are for system programmers and IBM program service representatives. They provide
quick access to often-used diagnostic and debugging information about NCP and EP in the PEP environ-
ment.
NCP, SSP, and EP Diagnosis Guide (LY30-5591)
This manual is designed to help customers and IBM program service representatives isolate and define
problems in NCP Version 3, NCP Version 4, NCP V4 Subset, NCP Version 5, and EP in the PEP environ-
ment using SSP Version 3. The primary purpose of the manual is to help the user interact with the IBM
Support Center to resolve a problem. Procedures in these manuals describe how to:
Ÿ Determine whether the problem is in NCP
Ÿ Use relevant information to describe the problem
Ÿ Gather appropriate documentation about the problem
Ÿ Report the problem to the IBM Support Center
In addition, it includes detailed descriptions of how to use the programming tools available with NCP and
SSP.
NCP and EP Reference (LY30-5569 for V4R3.1 only)
NCP and EP Reference (LY30-5605 for V5 only)
These manuals contain reference material describing the internal organization and function of the NCP
and the EP in the PEP environment. These manuals provide information for customization and diagnosis.
World Wide Web
You can access the latest news and information about IBM network products, customer services and
support via the internet, at the Universal Resource Locator (URL):
http://www.ibm.com
B-10 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Abbreviation
List of Abbreviations
A
ampere
CBP
controller bus and service processor
AC
1) alternating current
2) address compare
CBTRA
CBx
controller bus and token-ring adapter
FRU name of circuit breaker number x
ACK
affirmative acknowledgment (BSC)
ac power box
CCITT
Comite Consultatif International
Telegraphique et Telephonique
ACPW
ACUN
access unit (token ring access unit such
as the IBM 8228)
CCU
CCW
CD
central control unit
channel command word
carrier detector (signal)
configuration data file
concurrent diagnostic
configuration data set (NCP/EP)
customer engineer
AC1
AC2
ac power box (ACPW) installed in posi-
tion 1 of the 3746-900
CDF
CDG
CDS
CE
ac power box (ACPW) installed in posi-
tion 2 of the 3746-900
AFD
AIO
airflow detector
adapter-initiated operation
active remote connector
CEPT
Comite Europeen des Postes et Tele-
communications
ARC
ASCII
American National Standard Code for
Information Interchange
CID
channel interface display function
controller load/dump program
communication line processor
communication network management
contact operate / contact sense
customer problem number
CLDP
CLP
CNM
CO/CS
CPN
CP
AUI
access unit interface
basic board A
BASA
BASB
BASC
BAT
basic board B
basic board C
basic assurance test
FRU name of the battery
Buffer chaining channel adapter
buffer control list element
box event record
1) communication processor
2) control program
BATRY
BCCA
BCLE
BER
CPx
CRP
CRU
CS
FRU name of circuit protector number x
check record pool
customer replaceable unit
BPC1
FRU name of the bus propagation card
to replace the CAL card
1) cycle steal
2) communication scanner
3) connectivity switch
BPC2
bus propagation card to replace the TRM
card
CSC
1) FRU name of the scanner for medium-
/low-speed lines
bps
bits per second
BRC
BSC
CA
BER reference code
binary synchronous communication
channel adapter
2) connectivity switch cable
CSCE
CSCW
CSG
connectivity switch cable extension
cycle steal control word
cycle steal grant
CAB
CADR
channel adapter board
FRU name of the channel adapter driver
receiver card
CSGH
CSGL
CSP
cycle steal grant high
cycle steal grant low
CADS
CAL
Channel adapter data streaming
FRU name of the communication
scanner processor associated with the
FESH card for high speed lines
(CSC scanner for the medium-/low-speed
lines)
FRU name of the channel adapter logic
card
CBC
controller bus coupler
CBSA
controller bus and service adapter
CSR
cycle steal request
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
X-1
Abbreviation
CSRH
CSRL
CSS
CTS
cycle steal request high
ETG
FAN1
FAN2
FCC
FDD
FE
Ethernet tail gate
cycle steal request low
control subsystem
FRU name of the power supply box fan
FRU name of the logic box fan
Federal Communications Commission
FRU name of the flexible disk drive
field engineering
clear to send (signal)
dc
direct current
DCAF
DCE
DCDP
DCPW
DCREG
DE
Distributed Console Access Facility
data circuit-terminating equipment
dc distribution and protection box
dc power box
FESH
FRU name of the front-end scanner
(high-speed)
FRU
ft
field-replaceable unit
foot
FRU name of the dc regulator card
device end (channel status)
FRU name of the disk file adapter card
disk function
GPT
GTF
generalized PIU trace
generalized trace facility
Hardware Central Service
FRU name of the hard disk drive
header
DFA
DIF
HCS
HDD
HDR
hex
DMA
DMUX
DRS
DSI
direct memory access
FRU name of the double multiplex card
data rate select
hexadecimal
HLIR
HPP bus
HPTSS
high-level interrupt request
high-performance parallel bus
data store interface
DTE
data terminal equipment
data terminal ready (signal)
Ethernet adapter card
high-performance transmission sub-
system
DTR
EAC
EC
HSB
HSS
HW
Hz
high-speed buffer (cache)
high-speed scanner
hardware
engineering change
EIA
Electronic Industries Association
Ethernet line adapter
ELA
Hertz
ENQ
EPO
ERC
ESCA
enquiry (BSC)
IBE
ID
internal box error
identifier
emergency power-OFF
error reference code
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers
ESCON channel adapter. An ESCA con-
sists of an ESCON channel processor
(ESCP) and an ESCON channel coupler
(ESCC)
IFT
IML
in.
internal function test
initial microcode load
inch
ESCC
ESCON channel coupler. A communi-
cation controller hardware unit which is
the interface between the ESCON
channel processor and the ESCON fiber
optic cable
INN
IOC
IO
intermediate network node
input/output control
input/output
ESCC2
ESCON channel coupler type 2
IOH
IOHI
input/output halfword (instruction)
ESCON channel A channel having an Enterprise
System Connection* channel-control-unit
interface that uses optical cables as a
transmission medium
input/output halfword immediate (instruc-
tion)
IPL
IR
initial program load
interrupt request
ESCP
ESCON channel processor. A communi-
cation controller hardware unit which pro-
vides the channel data link control for the
ESCON channel adapter
IRR
ISO
interrupt request removed
International Organization of Standardi-
zation
ESS
Ethernet sub-system
X-2 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Abbreviation
KB
kilobyte (1024 bytes)
kilobits per second
kilogram
min
minute
kbps
kg
MIO
MOSS input/output
MOSS I/O control bus
MIOC
MIP
kHz
LA
kilohertz
Maintenance Information Procedures
MOSS LAN adapter
1) load address (instruction)
2) line adapter
MLA
mm
millimeter
LCBB
LCBE
LCEB
LCEE
LCPB
LCPE
LED
line connection box base
MMIO
MOSS
MOSS-E
memory mapped input/output
maintenance and operator subsystem
line connection box expansion
line connection enclosure base
line connection enclosure expansion
line connection power base
line connection power expansion
light-emitting diode
maintenance and operator subsystem
extended
MPC
MSA
MSAU
MSC
MUX
mV
FRU name of the MOSS processor card
machine status area
multistation access unit
FRU name of the MOSS storage card
multiplex function
LIB
line interface coupler board
LIB1
LIC board type 1 for LICs 1, 3, and 4
(models A and B)
millivolt
LIB2
LIB3
LIB4
LIC board type 2 for LICs 5 and 6
(models A and B)
NAK
negative acknowledgment character
(BSC)
LIC board type 3 for LICs 1, 2, and 3
(model C)
NCCF
NCP
Network Communications Control Facility
Network Control Program
LIC board type 4 for LICs 5 and 6 (model
C)
NCTE
network communication terminal equip-
ment
LIC
line interface coupler card
NLDM
NMVT
NPDA
Network Logical Data Manager
LICx
FRU name of line interface coupler card
type x
network management vector transport
Network Problem Determination Applica-
tion
LID
line interface display
LLIR
LPDA
LS
low-level interrupt request
Link Problem Determination Aid
local storage
NPSI
oc
network packet switching interface
overcurrent
OLT
ov
online test
LSAR
LSR
LSS
LSSD
m
local storage address register
local storage register (CSP)
low-speed scanner
overvoltage
PANEL
PC
FRU name of the control panel
personal computer
level-sensitive scan design
meter
PCC
PCF
PKD
PIO
FRU name of the power control card
primary control field (storage)
portable keyboard display
program-initiated operation
FRU name of the panel card
power-ON reset
mA
milliampere
MAC
MB
MOSS adapter card for 3745 model 17A
megabyte; 1 048 576 bytes
FRU name of the MOSS control card
microcode fix
PNLC
POR
PRC
PROM
MCC
MCF
MCT
MDOR
MES
MHz
processor
machine configuration table
MOSS data operand register
miscellaneous equipment specification
megahertz
FRU name of the programmable read-
only memory module
PS
power supply
List of Abbreviations X-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Abbreviation
PCSS
PSTCE
PS1
power control subsystem
T
transmit (signal)
tag address
product support trained CE
FRU name of power supply number 1
FRU name of power supply number 2
product-trained CE
TA
TCM
1) thermally-controlled module
2) trellis coded modulation
PS2
TD
1) tag data
2) transmitted data (signal)
PTCE
PTT
Post, Telephone and Telegraph (agency)
FRU name of the CCU card
parity valid (signal)
TERMC
FRU name of the terminator/channel
signals card (IOC)
PUC
PV
TERMD
TERMI
TERMR
FRU name of the DMA terminator card
FRU name of the IOC terminator card
RAC
RCV
RD
repair action code
receive
FRU name of the terminator/redrive card
(IOC)
receive data (signal)
TI
test indicator (signal)
RETAIN
Remote Technical Assistance Information
Network
TIC
TIC1
token-ring interface coupler
RFS
RI
ready for sending (signal)
FRU name of the TIC card type 1 (4
Mbits only)
1) register to immediate operand
(instruction)
2) ring indicator (same as CI)
TIC2
TIC3
FRU name of the TIC card type 2 (4 and
16 Mbits)
RIM
request initialization mode (SDLC)
OS/VS VTAM IO trace
FRU name of the TIC card type 3 (4 and
16 Mbits)
RNIO
ROS
RPO
RSF
TPS
TRA
TRM
two-processor switch
token-ring adapter
read-only storage
remote power-OFF
FRU name of the token-ring multiplexer
card that controls up to two TICs
remote support facility
RTS
request to send (signal)
read/write
TRP
TRSS
TSS
T1
token-ring processor
token-ring subsystem
transmission subsystem
R/W
SALC
SAR
SAT
scanner ALC (Airline line control)
storage address register
specific assurance test
US service for very high speed trans-
missions at 1.5 million bps
SCTL
SDLC
SIM
FRU name of the storage control card
Synchronous Data Link Control
set initialization mode (SDLC)
UA
unnumbered acknowledgment (SDLC)
universal controller
UC
UEPO
URSF
V
unit emergency power-Off
universal remote support facility
volt
SMUXA
FRU name of the single multiplex card
for LIC board type 2
SMUXB
FRU name of the single multiplex card
for LIC board type 2
VB
valid byte (signal)
VAC
VDC
VH
volts, alternating current
volts, direct current
SNA
SNRM
SPDn
SPS
Systems Network Architecture
set normal response mode (SDLC)
signal and power distribution card
service and power support
system reference code
valid halfword (signal)
VTAM
Virtual Telecommunications Access
Method
SRC
STO
V.24
V.25
V.28
V.35
CCITT V.24 recommendation
CCITT V.25 recommendation
CCITT V.28 recommendation
CCITT V.35 recommendation
FRU name of the storage (card)
supervisor call
SVC
SWx
FRU name of switch number x
X-4 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Abbreviation
WLOB
XI
wire lobe (cable connecting token-ring
adapters to token-ring access units)
XID
exchange identification
X.21
X.25
CCITT X.21 recommendation
CCITT X.25 recommendation
X.25 SNA interconnection
List of Abbreviations X-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Abbreviation
X-6 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Glossary
This glossary defines all new terms used in this manual.
It also includes terms and definitions from the IBM Dic-
tionary of Computing, GC20-1699.
communication controller. A communication control
unit that is controlled by one or more programs stored
and executed in the unit. Examples are the IBM 3705,
IBM 3725/3726, IBM 3720, and IBM 3745.
adapter-initiated operation (AIO). A transfer of up to
256 bytes between an adapter (CA or LA) and the CCU
storage. The transfer is initiated by an IOH/IOHI
instruction, and is performed in cycle stealing via the
IOC bus.
communication scanner processor (CSP). The
processor of a scanner.
communication subsystem. The part of the controller
that controls the data transfers over the transmission
interface.
alarm. A message sent to the MOSS console. In
case of an error a reference code identifies the nature
of the error.
configuration data file (CDF). A MOSS file that con-
tains a description of all the hardware features (pres-
ence, type, address, and characteristics).
alert. A message sent to the host console. In case of
an error a reference code identifies the nature of the
error.
control panel. A panel that contains switches and
indicators for the use of the customer's operator and
service personnel.
autoBER. A program to automatically analyse a BER
file.
control program. A computer program designed to
schedule and to supervise the execution of programs of
the controller.
automaint. A function that uses autoBER to isolate
failing FRUs.
box event record (BER). Information about an event
detected by the controller. It is recorded on the
disk/diskette and can be displayed on the operator
console for event analysis.
control subsystem (CSS). The part of the controller
that stores and executes the control program, and moni-
tors the data transfers over the channel and trans-
mission interfaces.
block multiplexer channel. A multiplexer channel that
interleaves blocks of data. See also byte multiplexer
channel. Contrast with selector channel.
data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE). The
equipment installed at the user's premises that provides
all the functions required to establish, maintain, and ter-
minate a connection, and the signal conversion and
coding between the data terminal equipment (DTE) and
the line. For example, a modem is a DCE (see
modem.)
byte multiplexer channel. A multiplexer channel that
interleaves bytes of data. See also block multiplexer
channel. Contrast with selector channel.
Note: The DCE may be separate equipment or an
integral part of other equipment.
cache. A high-speed buffer storage that contains fre-
quently accessed instructions and data; it is used to
reduce access time.
data terminal equipment (DTE). That part of a data
station that serves as a data source, data link, or both,
and provides for the data communication control func-
tion according to protocols.
central control unit (CCU). In the 3745, the controller
hardware unit that contains the circuits and data flow
paths needed to execute instructions and to control its
storage and the attached adapters.
direct attachment. The attachment of a DTE to
another DTE without a DCE.
channel adapter (CA). A communication controller
hardware unit used to attach the controller to a host
processor.
high-performance transmission subsystem
(HPTSS). The part of the controller that controls the
data transfers over the high-speed transmission inter-
face (speed up to 2 million bps).
clear channel. Mode of data transmission where the
data passes through the DCE and network, and arrives
at the receiving communication controller unchanged
from the data transmitted. The DCE or network can
modify the data during transmission because of certain
network restrictions, but must ensure the received data
stream is the same as the transmitted data stream.
high-speed scanner. Line adapter for lines up to 2
million bps, composed of a communication scanner
processor (CSP) and a front-end high-speed scanner
(FESH).
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
X-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
initial microcode load (IML). The process of loading
the microcode into a scanner or into MOSS.
remote console may be connected to the (CC) through
the switched network.
initial program load (IPL). The initialization procedure
that causes 3745 control program to commence opera-
tion.
scanner. A device that scans and controls the trans-
mission lines. Also called line adapter.
selector channel. An I/O channel designed to operate
with only one I/O device at a time. Once the I/O device
is selected, a complete record is transferred one byte at
a time. Contrast with block multiplexer channel,
multiplexer channel.
input/output control (IOC). The circuit that controls
the input/output from/to the channel adapters and scan-
ners via the IOC bus.
internal clock function. A LIC function that provides a
transmit clock for sending data, and retrieves a receive
clock from received data, when the modem does not
provide those timing signals. When the terminal is con-
nected in direct-attach mode (without modem) the ICF
also provides the transmit and receive clocks to the ter-
minal, via the LIC card.
Systems Network Architecture (SNA). The
description of the logical structure, formats, protocols,
and operational sequences for transmitting information
through a user application network. The structure of
SNA allows the users to be independent of specific tele-
communication facilities.
line adapter (LA). The part of the TSS, HPTSS, or
TRSS that scans and controls the transmission lines.
Also called scanner.
token-ring subsystem (TRSS). The part of the con-
troller that controls the data transfers over an IBM
Token-Ring Network.
For the TSS the line adapters are low-speed scanners
(LSSs).
The TRSS consists of one token-ring adapter (TRA).
token-ring adapter (TRA). Line adapter for an IBM
Token-Ring Network, composed of one token-ring
multiplexer card (TRM), and two token-ring interface
couplers (TICs).
For the HPTSS the line adapters are high-speed scan-
ners (HSSs).
For the TRSS the line adapters are token-ring adapters
(TRAs).
transmission subsystem (TSS). The part of the con-
troller that controls the data transfers over low- and
medium-speed, switched and non switched transmission
interfaces.
line interface coupler (LIC). A circuit that attaches up
to four transmission cables to the controller.
low-speed scanner. Line adapter for lines up to 256
kbps, composed of a CSC card.
The TSS consists of up to six low-speed scanners
(LSSs) associated with the LICs units (LIUs), through
serial links (SLs).
maintenance and operator subsystem (MOSS). The
part of the controller that provides operating and ser-
vicing facilities to the customer's operator and the IBM
service representative.
two-processor switch (TPS). A feature of the channel
adapter that connects a second channel to the same
channel adapter.
NetView. An IBM licensed program used to monitor
a network, manage it, and diagnose its problems.
V.24. CCITT V.24 recommendation
V.25. CCITT V.25 recommendation
V.35. CCITT V.35 recommendation
X.20 bis. CCITT X.20 bis recommendation
X.21. CCITT X.21 recommendation
X.25. CCITT X.25 recommendation
YZxxx.. wiring diagram
Network Control Program (NCP). An IBM licensed
program that provides communication controller support
for single-domain, multiple-domain, and interconnected
network capability.
operator console. The IBM Operator Console that is
used to operate and service the communication con-
troller (CC) through the MOSS. Optionally an alternate
console may be installed up to 120 m from the CC, or a
X-8 3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Readers' Comments — We'd Like to Hear from You
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130 to 17A
Maintenance Information Procedures
Publication No. SY33-2070-09
Please send us your comments concerning this book. We will greatly appreciate them and will consider
them for later releases of the present book.
If you prefer sending comments by FAX or electronically, use:
Ÿ FAX: 33 4 93 24 77 97
Ÿ E-mail: FRIBMQF5 at IBMMAIL
Ÿ IBM Internal Use: LGERCF at LGEPROFS
Ÿ Internet: [email protected]
In advance, thank you.
Your comments:
Name
Address
Company or Organization
Phone No.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cut or Fold
Along Line
Readers' Comments — We'd Like to Hear from You
SY33-2070-09
IBM
Fold and Tape
Please do not staple
Fold and Tape
PLACE
POSTAGE
STAMP
HERE
IBM France
Centre d'Etudes et Recherches
Service 0798 - BP 79
06610 La Gaude
France
Fold and Tape
Please do not staple
Fold and Tape
Cut or Fold
Along Line
SY33-2070-09
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IBM
Part Number: 03F5017
Printed in Denmark by IBM Danmark A/S
SY33-2ð7ð-ð9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Spine
frmation:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|